23.11.2014 Views

ProgressBook v12.0 System Manager Guide - Swoca

ProgressBook v12.0 System Manager Guide - Swoca

ProgressBook v12.0 System Manager Guide - Swoca

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong><br />

<strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(This document is current for <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook v13.3.1 or later.)<br />

© 2012 Software Answers, Inc. All Rights Reserved. All other company and product names<br />

included in this material may be Trademarks, Registered Trademarks or Service Marks of the<br />

companies with which they are associated. Software Answers, Inc. reserves the right at any time<br />

and without notice to change these materials or any of the functions, features or specifications of<br />

any of the software described herein.<br />

Software Answers, Inc.<br />

www.progressbook.com<br />

6770 Snowville Rd., Suite 200 www.software-answers.com<br />

Brecksville, Ohio 44141


Change Log<br />

The following Change Log explains by Product Version, Heading, Page and Reason where<br />

changes in the <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> have been made.<br />

Product<br />

Version<br />

Heading Page Reason<br />

13.3.1 Entire <strong>Guide</strong> N/A<br />

13.3.1 Entire <strong>Guide</strong> N/A<br />

13.3.1 “Log In to GradeBook” 2<br />

13.3.1<br />

“Use the Application Quick<br />

Launch”<br />

13.3.1 “Sign Out of GradeBook” 4<br />

3<br />

Updated screen shots to show the application quick<br />

launch icon.<br />

Updated ParentAccess Website to Classic and Beta<br />

ParentAccess.<br />

Updated information about logging in to <strong>ProgressBook</strong><br />

applications.<br />

Added information about the application quick launch.<br />

Updated information and screen shot for signing out of<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> applications.<br />

13.3.1 “Change Password” 169 Updated information about changing a password.<br />

13.2 “Welcome to GradeBook” 1 Added note about editing staff accounts.<br />

13.2 “Log In to GradeBook” 2<br />

Added information about logging in to <strong>ProgressBook</strong><br />

applications.<br />

13.2 “Select a District” 3 Added information about selecting a district.<br />

13.2 “Sign Out of GradeBook” 4<br />

13.2<br />

13.2<br />

“Set Up School District<br />

Information”<br />

“Set Up Integration Settings for<br />

Student Information <strong>System</strong>s<br />

(Except StudentInformation and<br />

SMS)”<br />

13.2 “District Features” 9<br />

Added information about signing out of <strong>ProgressBook</strong><br />

applications.<br />

5 Added note about integration settings.<br />

6 Added information about setting up integration settings.<br />

Added information about <strong>ProgressBook</strong> authenticated<br />

users changing passwords.<br />

13.2 “Add Staff” 52 Updated information and screen shots for adding staff.<br />

13.2<br />

13.2<br />

“Assign a Staff Account in<br />

GradeBook to a CentralAdmin<br />

User”<br />

“Unlink a Staff Account in<br />

GradeBook from a CentralAdmin<br />

User”<br />

55 Added information about linking an account.<br />

56 Added information about unlinking an account.<br />

13.2 “Update Staff” 57 Updated information about updating staff.<br />

13.2<br />

13.2<br />

“Edit a Staff Account in<br />

GradeBook”<br />

“Reset a Password for a<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> Authenticated<br />

User”<br />

58<br />

59<br />

Added information about editing an account.<br />

Added information about resetting a password.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

i


Change Log<br />

Product<br />

Version<br />

Heading Page Reason<br />

13.2 “Password Authentication” 168<br />

13.2<br />

13.1<br />

“Change Password for<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> Authenticated<br />

Users”<br />

“Set Up School District<br />

Information”<br />

13.1 “District Features” 9<br />

13.1<br />

13.1<br />

“Disable an Individual Student<br />

from Classic and Beta<br />

ParentAccess”<br />

“Add Assessments to Report<br />

Cards”<br />

169<br />

5<br />

108<br />

131<br />

13.1 “Delete Students” 162<br />

13.1 “Delete Students Individually” 163<br />

13.1 “Mass Delete Students” 164<br />

12.4 “Recalculate Grade Books” 161<br />

Deleted information that is no longer valid for<br />

passwords in GradeBook.<br />

Updated information about changing your password.<br />

Added note about the differences between reading<br />

report cards between Classic and Beta ParentAccess.<br />

Reordered features to appear as they do on the Feature<br />

Selection screen and added information about Class<br />

Notifications.<br />

Added information about disabling student information<br />

for Classic and Beta ParentAccess.<br />

Added note about unlimited number of different mark<br />

types.<br />

Deleted information about not being able to delete<br />

students with SpecialServices forms.<br />

Deleted information about not being able to delete<br />

students with SpecialServices forms and added notes<br />

about deleting students with SpecialServices forms.<br />

Deleted information about not being able to delete<br />

students with SpecialServices forms and added notes<br />

about deleting students with SpecialServices forms.<br />

Added information about Gradebook Calculation<br />

Progress window.<br />

12.3 Entire <strong>Guide</strong> N/A Updated some screen shots with new logo.<br />

12.3 “Add Courses” 74<br />

12.3 “Update Courses” 76<br />

12.3<br />

“Allow Teachers to Update<br />

Course Roster”<br />

12.3 “Copy Assessments” 137<br />

12.3<br />

12.3<br />

12.3<br />

12.3<br />

“Set a Default Assessment for<br />

the GradeBook Configuration<br />

Utility for Standards-Based<br />

Report Cards”<br />

“Set Up Multiple Grade Books for<br />

Standards-Based Report Cards”<br />

“Class Assignment Marks Admin<br />

Report”<br />

“Homework and Marks Posted to<br />

Parent Access Admin Report”<br />

77<br />

136<br />

157<br />

177<br />

180<br />

Updated screen shot to show Retain During Rollover?<br />

option, and added information on the Retain During<br />

Rollover? option.<br />

Updated screen shot to show Retain During Rollover?<br />

option, and added information on the Retain During<br />

Rollover? option.<br />

Updated screen shot to show Retain During Rollover?<br />

option.<br />

Updated screen shot to show default assessment<br />

option for GradeBook Configuration Utility.<br />

Added section on how to set a default assessment,<br />

which will be used when running the GradeBook<br />

Configuration Utility.<br />

Added information on how to set a default assessment,<br />

which will be used when running the GradeBook<br />

Configuration Utility.<br />

Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead<br />

of <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Report Viewer.<br />

Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead<br />

of <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Report Viewer.<br />

ii <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Change Log<br />

Product<br />

Version<br />

Heading Page Reason<br />

12.3<br />

12.3<br />

12.3<br />

12.3<br />

“Homework and Marks Posted to<br />

Parent Access Admin Report”<br />

“Report Card Marks Admin<br />

Report”<br />

“Section Info Meeting Times<br />

Integration Report”<br />

“Student Daily Attendance<br />

Integration Report”<br />

180<br />

183<br />

187<br />

190<br />

12.3 “Student Demographics Report” 193<br />

12.3 “Student Demographics Report” 193<br />

12.3<br />

12.3<br />

“Student Section Enrollment<br />

Integration Report”<br />

“YTD (Year-to-Date) Final Grade<br />

Admin Report”<br />

196<br />

199<br />

Updated screen shot to display Printed from<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> instead of the old <strong>ProgressBook</strong> logo.<br />

Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead<br />

of <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Report Viewer.<br />

Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead<br />

of <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Report Viewer.<br />

Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead<br />

of <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Report Viewer.<br />

Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead<br />

of <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Report Viewer.<br />

Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead<br />

of <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Report Viewer, and updated screen<br />

shot to display Printed from <strong>ProgressBook</strong> instead of<br />

the old <strong>ProgressBook</strong> logo.<br />

Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead<br />

of <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Report Viewer.<br />

Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead<br />

of <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Report Viewer.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

iii


Change Log<br />

This page intentionally left blank.<br />

iv <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Table of Contents<br />

Change Log<br />

i<br />

Welcome to GradeBook 1<br />

Log In to GradeBook ................................................................................................... 2<br />

Select a District ........................................................................................................... 3<br />

Use the Application Quick Launch .............................................................................. 3<br />

Sign Out of GradeBook ............................................................................................... 4<br />

Initial District Setup 5<br />

Set Up School District Information .............................................................................. 5<br />

Set Up Integration Settings for Student Information <strong>System</strong>s (Except<br />

StudentInformation and SMS)............................................................................... 6<br />

Set Up School Information .......................................................................................... 7<br />

GradeBook Features................................................................................................... 9<br />

District Features .................................................................................................... 9<br />

School Features .................................................................................................. 10<br />

Set Up Data Integration............................................................................................. 13<br />

Disable Data Integration for District .................................................................... 14<br />

Disable Data Integration for School .................................................................... 14<br />

Named Codes Overview ........................................................................................... 15<br />

Associate Named Codes Lists with Schools ............................................................. 16<br />

Add Instructional Cycle Codes .................................................................................. 17<br />

Copy Named Codes to New List ......................................................................... 18<br />

Modify Named Codes.......................................................................................... 18<br />

Delete Individual Named Codes from List........................................................... 18<br />

Add Attendance Day Codes ...................................................................................... 19<br />

Create School Calendars .......................................................................................... 19<br />

Edit Calendar Month ................................................................................................. 21<br />

Assign Instructional Cycles ....................................................................................... 23<br />

Associate Schools with Calendars ............................................................................ 24<br />

Set Up Rounding Preferences for Student Averages................................................ 25<br />

Set Up Rounding for Grade Book ....................................................................... 25<br />

Make Student Pictures Available on Seating Chart................................................... 26<br />

Create New Virtual Directory............................................................................... 26<br />

Create New Directory.......................................................................................... 28<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

iii


Add Directory to GradeBook ............................................................................... 29<br />

Audit User Activity ..................................................................................................... 29<br />

View User Login/Logout Activity.......................................................................... 29<br />

Install GradeBook Audit Logs.............................................................................. 30<br />

Estimate Amount of Drive Space Required to Maintain Audit Log Records........ 31<br />

Modify Audit Log Settings in Windows Server 2003 ........................................... 32<br />

Modify Audit Log Settings in Windows Server 2008 ........................................... 33<br />

Enable Audit Log................................................................................................. 34<br />

View Changes Made in GradeBook in Audit Log ................................................ 35<br />

Disable Audit Log ............................................................................................... 36<br />

Grading Setup 37<br />

Add Reporting Periods.............................................................................................. 37<br />

Enter Report Card Entry Dates ........................................................................... 38<br />

Edit Reporting Periods ........................................................................................ 39<br />

Delete Reporting Periods.................................................................................... 39<br />

Export Report Card Grades on Demand for Districts that Run Batch Integration..... 39<br />

Set Up Cross References for Reporting Periods ...................................................... 41<br />

Mark Types ............................................................................................................... 42<br />

Add Mark Types .................................................................................................. 43<br />

Edit Mark Types .................................................................................................. 45<br />

Delete Mark Types .............................................................................................. 46<br />

Grading Scales ......................................................................................................... 46<br />

Add Grading Scales ............................................................................................ 47<br />

Copy Grading Scales .......................................................................................... 48<br />

Edit Grading Scales ............................................................................................ 48<br />

Delete Grading Scales ........................................................................................ 49<br />

Maintain Staff Accounts 51<br />

GradeBook User Roles ............................................................................................. 51<br />

Search for Staff ......................................................................................................... 52<br />

Add Staff ................................................................................................................... 52<br />

Assign a Staff Account in GradeBook to a CentralAdmin User........................... 55<br />

Unlink a Staff Account in GradeBook from a CentralAdmin User ....................... 56<br />

Update Staff .............................................................................................................. 57<br />

Edit a Staff Account in GradeBook...................................................................... 58<br />

Reset a Password for a <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Authenticated User................................ 59<br />

Transfer Staff Activity ................................................................................................ 60<br />

iv <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Delete Staff ............................................................................................................... 62<br />

Help a Teacher.......................................................................................................... 64<br />

Maintain District 67<br />

Add Rooms ............................................................................................................... 67<br />

Delete Rooms ........................................................................................................... 68<br />

Set Up Homerooms .................................................................................................. 68<br />

Add Teachers to Homerooms.............................................................................. 69<br />

Remove Teachers from Homerooms .................................................................. 70<br />

Add Students to Homeroom Roster .................................................................... 71<br />

Remove Students from Homeroom Roster......................................................... 72<br />

Set Required Homerooms for Daily Attendance ................................................. 72<br />

Add Courses ............................................................................................................. 74<br />

Update Courses ........................................................................................................ 76<br />

Allow Teachers to Update Course Roster ........................................................... 77<br />

Delete Courses ................................................................................................... 78<br />

Add Classes.............................................................................................................. 79<br />

Add Staff to Classes............................................................................................ 81<br />

Schedule Classes ............................................................................................... 83<br />

Add Students to Classes..................................................................................... 86<br />

Update Classes......................................................................................................... 87<br />

Modify Class Schedule ....................................................................................... 90<br />

Delete Students from Class Roster..................................................................... 92<br />

Delete Classes.................................................................................................... 93<br />

Update Lunch Choices.............................................................................................. 94<br />

Maintain Period/Block Codes.................................................................................... 94<br />

Maintain Students 97<br />

Student-Related Named Codes ................................................................................ 97<br />

Add Admission Codes............................................................................................... 97<br />

Add Withdrawal Codes ............................................................................................. 98<br />

Add Student Status Codes........................................................................................ 99<br />

Add Address Types Codes........................................................................................ 99<br />

Add Contact Type Codes ........................................................................................ 100<br />

Copy Named Codes to New List............................................................................. 101<br />

Modify Named Codes ............................................................................................. 101<br />

Delete Individual Named Codes from List............................................................... 102<br />

Add Students .......................................................................................................... 102<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

v


Add Contacts to Students ................................................................................. 104<br />

Add Addresses to Students............................................................................... 104<br />

Add Enrollment Entry to Students..................................................................... 105<br />

Update Students ..................................................................................................... 106<br />

Disable an Individual Student from Classic and Beta ParentAccess ................ 108<br />

Attendance Setup 109<br />

Attendance-Related Named Codes ........................................................................ 109<br />

Add Absence Types Codes......................................................................................110<br />

Add Absence Totals Codes ...................................................................................... 111<br />

Add Absence Reason Codes ...................................................................................113<br />

Attendance Day Codes ............................................................................................113<br />

Add Attendance Note Codes....................................................................................114<br />

Copy Named Codes to New List..............................................................................115<br />

Modify Named Codes ..............................................................................................115<br />

Delete Individual Named Codes from List................................................................116<br />

Add Attendance Assessments to Report Cards .......................................................116<br />

Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods ......................................................118<br />

Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting Periods...................119<br />

Update Attendance Totals During Data Integration................................................. 120<br />

Report Cards and Interims 121<br />

Create Report Cards/Interims ................................................................................. 122<br />

Assign Grade Levels to Schools ....................................................................... 127<br />

Assign Order to Reporting Periods ................................................................... 128<br />

Add Courses to Report Cards........................................................................... 129<br />

Add Assessments to Report Cards ................................................................... 131<br />

Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods ............................................... 138<br />

Determine Protected Marks .............................................................................. 139<br />

<strong>System</strong> Calculations ......................................................................................... 140<br />

Assign Grade Entry Method to Assessments and Reporting Periods............... 142<br />

Set Up Year to Date (YTD) Calculation Method................................................ 147<br />

Format Report Card Templates......................................................................... 150<br />

Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting Periods............ 153<br />

Add Messages to Report Cards........................................................................ 154<br />

Compile Report Cards ...................................................................................... 155<br />

Set Up Multiple Grade Books for Standards-Based Report Cards ......................... 157<br />

Copy Report Cards ................................................................................................. 158<br />

vi <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Delete Report Cards ............................................................................................... 159<br />

General Maintenance 161<br />

Check Software Version.......................................................................................... 161<br />

Recalculate Grade Books ....................................................................................... 161<br />

Delete Students ...................................................................................................... 162<br />

Delete Students Individually.............................................................................. 163<br />

Mass Delete Students....................................................................................... 164<br />

Associate District Grade Levels with State Grade Levels....................................... 166<br />

Update Email Address ............................................................................................ 168<br />

Password Authentication......................................................................................... 168<br />

Enable <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Authentication................................................................ 169<br />

Change Password................................................................................................... 169<br />

Use GradeBook Help .............................................................................................. 170<br />

Enable Default District ID Setting............................................................................ 171<br />

Reports 173<br />

Report Builder Reports ........................................................................................... 174<br />

Class Assignment Marks Admin Report............................................................ 177<br />

Homework and Marks Posted to Parent Access Admin Report ........................ 180<br />

Report Card Marks Admin Report..................................................................... 183<br />

Section Info Meeting Times Integration Report................................................. 187<br />

Student Daily Attendance Integration Report.................................................... 190<br />

Student Demographics Report.......................................................................... 193<br />

Student Section Enrollment Integration Report................................................. 196<br />

YTD (Year-to-Date) Final Grade Admin Report................................................. 199<br />

Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates 203<br />

Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2 x 11 portrait) .......................................... 203<br />

Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2x14 portrait) ............................................ 220<br />

Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2x11 landscape,<br />

2 columns) .............................................................................................................. 235<br />

Standard Elementary Report Card (Legal tri-fold) .................................................. 249<br />

Standard Elementary Report Card (11x17 landscape,<br />

2 columns) .............................................................................................................. 262<br />

Appendix B: Sample Traditional Report Card 277<br />

Create Report Cards – General Tab ....................................................................... 277<br />

Assign Grade Levels to Schools – Grade Levels Tab............................................. 278<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

vii


Assign Order to Reporting Periods – Periods Tab .................................................. 279<br />

Add Assessments – Assessments Tab ................................................................... 280<br />

Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods – Requirements Tab.................... 281<br />

Determine Protected Marks – Protected Marks Tab ............................................... 282<br />

Assign Grade Entry Methods to Assessments and Reporting Periods – Advanced<br />

Calcs Tab ................................................................................................................ 283<br />

Set Up Average Calculation Methods for <strong>System</strong><br />

Calculations – <strong>System</strong> Calcs Tab............................................................................ 283<br />

Set Up Year to Date Calculation Method ................................................................ 286<br />

Compile Report Card .............................................................................................. 287<br />

Appendix C: Sample Standards-Based Report Card 291<br />

Create Report Cards – General Tab ....................................................................... 292<br />

Assign Grade Levels to Schools – Grade Levels Tab............................................. 293<br />

Assign Order to Reporting Periods – Periods Tab .................................................. 294<br />

Add Courses – Courses Tab ................................................................................... 295<br />

Search for Courses ........................................................................................... 296<br />

Continue to Add Courses .................................................................................. 298<br />

Add Assessments – Assessments Tab ................................................................... 299<br />

Copy Assessments ........................................................................................... 306<br />

Continue to Add Assessments .......................................................................... 307<br />

Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods – Requirements Tab.................... 309<br />

Determine Protected Marks – Protected Marks Tab ............................................... 310<br />

Set Up Average Calculation Method – Average Calcs Tab ......................................311<br />

Add Messages – Messages Tab ............................................................................. 312<br />

Format Templates – Templates Tab ........................................................................ 313<br />

Preview Report Card............................................................................................... 316<br />

Adjust Template to Eliminate Third Page .......................................................... 318<br />

Preview Adjusted Columns ............................................................................... 319<br />

Add Subject Continued Assessments ............................................................... 319<br />

Preview Subject Continued Assessments......................................................... 320<br />

Add End of Year Placement to Template........................................................... 320<br />

Preview End of Year Placement........................................................................ 321<br />

Adjust Messages Using RTF Code ................................................................... 322<br />

Preview Messages Using RTF Code ................................................................ 323<br />

Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting Periods – Mappings<br />

Tab .......................................................................................................................... 324<br />

Check Spelling on Report Card .............................................................................. 327<br />

Compile Report Card .............................................................................................. 328<br />

viii <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Welcome to GradeBook<br />

The purpose of this guide is to assist GradeBook users with Master or School Administrator<br />

privileges in setting up and maintaining their GradeBook system. The chapters in this guide<br />

provide reference and procedural information about related types of system functionality<br />

beginning with the tasks you need to perform the first time you set up your system, such as named<br />

codes, school calendars, reporting periods, mark types and grading scales. In continuing to<br />

prepare your system, you will find information on setting up and maintaining, rooms, courses,<br />

classes, student and staff accounts.<br />

Note: You can create staff accounts in GradeBook and link staff accounts in<br />

CentralAdmin; however, unless you have CentralAdmin administrative user<br />

privileges, you cannot edit staff accounts.<br />

In addition, you will find an explanation of proper attendance setup and its impact on the display<br />

of attendance totals on report cards, as well as procedures for creating report cards in the Report<br />

Card Builder.<br />

Finally, appendices in the guide include report card template pieces available for each report card<br />

template size and layout option that you can use to format printed report cards, as well as<br />

step-by-step examples for creating both traditional and standards-based report cards.<br />

Administrator Home Page<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 1


Welcome to GradeBook<br />

Log In to GradeBook<br />

1. On the login screen, in the Domain drop-down list, select your domain.<br />

Note: Once you select a domain, the system remembers the last domain<br />

accessed.<br />

Note: If you do not select a domain, you receive the following message: “Please<br />

select your domain.”<br />

2. In the User Name field, enter your user name.<br />

Note: If you do not enter a user name, you receive the following message:<br />

“Please enter your user name.”<br />

3. In the Password field, enter your password.<br />

Note: By default, <strong>ProgressBook</strong> authenticated password requirements are eight<br />

characters with at least one uppercase letter, one lowercase letter, one number<br />

and one special character; however, your district may have different<br />

requirements.<br />

Note: If you do not enter a password, your receive the following message:<br />

“Please enter your password.”<br />

4. Click Sign In.<br />

Note: Signing in to any <strong>ProgressBook</strong> application signs you in to all<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> applications to which you have access.<br />

Login Screen for <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Applications<br />

Note: For <strong>ProgressBook</strong> authenticated users, once you log in, if your password is<br />

soon to expire, the Your password is expiring soon! screen displays. The following<br />

message displays: “Your password will be expiring on ‘MM/DD/YYYY’ ‘H:M:S’<br />

‘AM/PM’. Would you like to change your password now?” Underneath the<br />

message, you have the following options: Change Password or Continue.<br />

2 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Welcome to GradeBook<br />

Your password is expiring soon! Screen<br />

Note: If your password is expired, CentralAdmin displays the Password expired<br />

screen, and you must change your password to access <strong>ProgressBook</strong><br />

applications.<br />

Note: If you enter your user name and/or password incorrectly or if your account<br />

is locked, you receive the following message: “The User Name or Password<br />

supplied is invalid or your account may be locked.”<br />

Note: If your account is locked, the amount of time it is locked is based on system<br />

settings. By default, it remains locked for 5 minutes; however, your district may<br />

have different settings.<br />

Select a District<br />

If you have access to more than one district, under Administrator Home Page, you can change<br />

the district in the Select a district list.<br />

Note: By default, the system automatically remembers the last district you<br />

accessed.<br />

Select a District<br />

Use the Application Quick Launch<br />

You can use the application quick launch to easily navigate between <strong>ProgressBook</strong> applications.<br />

1. In the banner, to the right of the GradeBook logo, click the application quick launch icon.<br />

In the application quick launch area, logos display for all other <strong>ProgressBook</strong> applications<br />

that are registered in CentralAdmin.<br />

2. To open another application that you are authorized to use, click the application’s logo.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 3


Welcome to GradeBook<br />

The application opens in another window or tab depending on your browser’s settings.<br />

Note: To close the application quick launch without navigating to another<br />

application, click the application quick launch icon again, or click the screen<br />

anywhere outside the application quick launch area.<br />

Application Quick Launch<br />

Sign Out of GradeBook<br />

When you click Logout, in the upper-right corner of any GradeBook screen, you are logged out of<br />

all <strong>ProgressBook</strong> applications, and the CentralAdmin sign out screen displays.<br />

Note: Click Sign In to log in to GradeBook again.<br />

Click Here to log in to<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> applications.<br />

Sign Out of GradeBook<br />

4 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Initial District Setup<br />

This chapter describes how to enter your school district and school information in GradeBook, so<br />

the information displays properly on report cards. You can choose to enable any of available<br />

features to suit your district’s and individual school’s needs. In addition, this chapter describes how<br />

to set up and maintain the calendars used by your district as well as the named codes used in the<br />

calendars. Proper calendar setup is important for attendance totaling.<br />

Set Up School District Information<br />

School district information must be set up in your system, so the district, school names and<br />

addresses and principal names display on certain SpecialServices forms and report cards. If you<br />

leave the District Name column empty, the principal's name will not display when printing<br />

standards-based report cards.<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system, GradeBook loads data, such<br />

as student accounts, class schedules, staff accounts and attendance records for the entire district<br />

directly from the student information system.<br />

To begin setting up data integration, if applicable, designate the appropriate student information<br />

system with which your district is integrated. Then complete the other steps required to enable<br />

data integration on the Data Integration Setup screen. See “Set Up Data Integration.”<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, select District.<br />

2. On the District Setup screen in the District Name column, click in the empty field and enter<br />

the district name.<br />

3. In the Superintendent Name field, enter the district superintendent's name.<br />

4. If your school district is integrated with a student information system in the Integration<br />

<strong>System</strong> list, select the appropriate student information system.<br />

The selection of the appropriate student information system here enables data integration<br />

for the entire district and allows it to be the only option available for the individual schools<br />

on the Data Integration Setup screen.<br />

Note: If you select None in the Integration <strong>System</strong> list on this screen, the<br />

integration system for each school is automatically set to None on the Data<br />

Integration Setup screen.<br />

Note: In the Integration <strong>System</strong> column, if None is selected and in Report Card<br />

Builder on the Report Card screen if Live is selected for the Choose the data<br />

integration method, then Beta ParentAccess reads report cards from GradeBook.<br />

However, in Classic ParentAccess, the system reads report cards from the<br />

student information system.<br />

Note: In the Integration <strong>System</strong> list, if you select a student information system<br />

other than SMS or DASL (StudentInformation), then on the Administrator Home<br />

Page in the Tools section, under Miscellaneous, the Integration Settings link<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 5


Initial District Setup<br />

appears. See “Set Up Integration Settings for Student Information <strong>System</strong>s<br />

(Except StudentInformation and SMS).”<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

Integration <strong>System</strong> on the District Setup Screen<br />

Set Up Integration Settings for Student Information <strong>System</strong>s (Except<br />

StudentInformation and SMS)<br />

If on the District Setup screen, in the Integration <strong>System</strong> list, you select a student information<br />

system other than SMS or DASL (StudentInformation), then on the Integration Settings screen,<br />

you must select a default domain.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page in the Tools section, under Miscellaneous, click<br />

Integration Settings.<br />

2. On the Integration Settings screen, in the Select Nightly Integration Domain list, select a<br />

domain.<br />

Note: This is the default domain under which users’ accounts are created during<br />

nightly integration.<br />

3. If this is a Windows domain, proceed to step 4. If this is a <strong>ProgressBook</strong> domain, in the<br />

Default Integration User Password field, enter a password.<br />

Note: This is the default password for new users created during the nightly<br />

integration.<br />

Note: By default, password requirements are eight characters with at least one<br />

uppercase letter, one lowercase letter, one number and one special character;<br />

however, your district may have different requirements.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

6 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Initial District Setup<br />

Windows Domain<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong><br />

Domain<br />

Set Up Integration Settings<br />

Set Up School Information<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system, schools are imported into<br />

GradeBook from that system. Make any necessary changes in the student information system. If<br />

your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you can make changes to<br />

schools as needed.<br />

A check mark in the view-only Active column indicates that the school is active in the District<br />

database. However, you cannot deactivate a school on this screen.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, click Schools.<br />

2. On the Schools screen at the bottom of the screen, click the Add a School link.<br />

3. In the Add a School window in the School Name field, type the new school name.<br />

4. In the District School ID field, enter the district's school identification number.<br />

Note: If your school does not integrate with a student information system, the<br />

District School ID can be any unique alphanumeric identification.<br />

5. In the School Short Name field, enter an abbreviation.<br />

Note: The school short name should be meaningful to the users as it will be used<br />

in list options for staff searches and other related tasks.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 7


Initial District Setup<br />

6. In the School Address field, enter the school's address.<br />

7. In the City, State and Zip fields, enter the city, state and zip code where the school is<br />

located.<br />

8. In the Phone Number field, enter the school's phone number.<br />

9. In the Principal's Name field, enter the principal's name for the school.<br />

Note: Entering the principal name here will not allow it to display on report cards.<br />

10. In the State School ID list, select the school's state ID.<br />

Note: If your school is integrated with a student information system, your school's<br />

state ID will automatically populate. If your school does not integrate with a<br />

student information system, N/A displays in this list.<br />

11. Click Update.<br />

The Delete and Add a New School links display at the bottom of the screen.<br />

Update a School Window<br />

12. To continue adding schools, repeat step 2 through step 11.<br />

13. Close the Update a School window.<br />

Schools Screen<br />

8 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Initial District Setup<br />

GradeBook Features<br />

GradeBook users with Master or School Administrator privileges can enable or disable any of the<br />

available features for your school district and each individual school, as desired.<br />

District Features<br />

The following district features are available:<br />

• Parent/Student Access – This option allows access to the Classic and Beta<br />

ParentAccess. Staff can access the site. However, parents and students will only be able<br />

to access it once they have been provided with user names and passwords for Classic<br />

ParentAccess. For Beta ParentAccess, parents and students will only be able to access it<br />

once they have been provided registration keys and have created their accounts.<br />

• Standards – This option allows the use of academic standards with lesson plans and<br />

assignments. GradeBook provides state academic standards for core subjects.<br />

Additional content areas can be entered/edited by users with the Curriculum, School<br />

Administrator and Master roles.<br />

• Teacher Roster Setup for All Courses – This option provides teachers with the ability to<br />

add students to their class rosters. If integrated with a student information system, this<br />

option should be turned off. When this feature is disabled, teachers can still be given the<br />

ability to update class rosters on an individual course basis if the GradeBook system<br />

manager selects that option on the Update Course window.<br />

• Lunch Counts – This option provides the ability for teachers to enter lunch counts on the<br />

Lunch Counts screen. The lunch choices are customizable for individual schools and can<br />

be entered/edited by users with the Cafeteria, Principal, School Support, School<br />

Administrator and Master roles.<br />

• SpecialServices – This option provides access to SpecialServices through a link in the<br />

Web banner for all users. Additional configuration of that system will be necessary. See<br />

SpecialServices <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> for more details.<br />

• Debugging for DASL (Keep off unless testing) – This option should be disabled at all<br />

times. The option is used for troubleshooting only by school districts that integrate with<br />

the DASL student information system.<br />

• Enable Attendance Short Comments – This option is used by school districts that<br />

integrate with the Student Sphere student information system. The option allows a<br />

second comment field to be used on the Absence Queue screen.<br />

• Import DASL External Student Status Code – For school districts integrated with the<br />

DASL student information system, this option allows the External Student Status Code to<br />

be imported into GradeBook.<br />

• Staff Password Changes – This option provides users who are <strong>ProgressBook</strong><br />

authenticated with the ability to change their password on the Change Password screen.<br />

• Virtual Classroom – Provides access to the VirtualClassroom application.<br />

• Class Notifications – Allows teachers to send emails to parents, students or parent and<br />

students, if they registered an email address in Classic or Beta ParentAccess.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 9


Initial District Setup<br />

Available District Features on the Feature Selection Screen<br />

Enable and Disable District Features<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, select District Features.<br />

2. On the Feature Selection screen in the Use? column, select the check box for each of the<br />

features you want to enable.<br />

3. Click Save.<br />

Note: To disable the feature, deselect the check box in the Use? column, and<br />

click Save.<br />

School Features<br />

For GradeBook users with School Administrator privileges, only the schools to which you have<br />

been assigned display on the screen. Enabling or disabling these features affects the functionality<br />

to which other GradeBook users have access, which is explained in detail for each option. If your<br />

school district is integrated with a student information system, make sure you also select the<br />

appropriate integration system for each school on the Data Integration Setup screen. See “Set Up<br />

Data Integration.”<br />

Period Attendance Tab<br />

The following school features are available on the Period Attendance tab:<br />

• Enable – Provides schools with the ability to take period attendance in classes on the<br />

Period Attendance and Seating Chart screens. The Period Attendance links display in the<br />

Web site banner in the Period Attendance view on the Grade Book Grid. When this<br />

feature is disabled, the Period Attendance link does not display on the Teacher Home<br />

Page; the Period Attendance and Period Attendance by Seating Chart links do not<br />

display on the Class Dashboard; the Period Attendance option is not available in the View<br />

list on the Grade Book Grid; and the Allow period attendance to be taken with this chart<br />

option and is not available on the Seating Chart.<br />

• Prior Day – Allows schools to provide teachers with the ability to enter or modify period<br />

attendance for days prior to the current day on the Period Attendance screen and Seating<br />

Chart screens. See “Set Prior Days to Change Period Attendance.”<br />

10 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Initial District Setup<br />

• Live Integration – Allows schools to read and save period attendance and period<br />

attendance by block data from the student information system, where available on a<br />

real-time basis. This option is enabled only if your district runs live period attendance.<br />

• By Block – Provides teachers with the ability to take period attendance by block in<br />

classes that meet for multiple blocks on the Period Attendance screen. The Enable<br />

feature must be selected for this option to work. When this feature is enabled and the<br />

class meets for multiple blocks, each block displays in a separate column in which the<br />

teacher can enter an attendance code. This icon displays on the Period Attendance<br />

screen to allow teachers to set the desired default view. The Take Attendance by Block<br />

link displays in the Web site banner on the Seating Chart.<br />

• Auto-Roster – Automatically updates the class roster with students from the SMS<br />

student information system when the teacher enters the Period Attendance screen to<br />

take period attendance. This option is enabled by default for all high schools and disabled<br />

by default for all other schools.<br />

Period Attendance Features on the Period Attendance Tab on the School Feature Setup<br />

Screen<br />

Set Prior Days to Change Period Attendance<br />

You can specify for all schools or each school individually the number of days prior to today in<br />

which teachers can enter or modify period attendance on the Period Attendance screen or Seating<br />

Chart.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, click School Features.<br />

2. To set the number of days prior to today that users can enter or modify period attendance<br />

for all the schools in the district, on the School Feature Setup screen Period Attendance<br />

tab, in the Prior Day column in the All schools row, click the multiple or 365 day(s) link.<br />

Note: To set the number of days prior to today that you can enter or modify period<br />

attendance for an individual school, click the 365 day(s) link in the Prior Day<br />

column for that school.<br />

3. In the Number of days to allow field, type the appropriate number of days. The default is<br />

365.<br />

4. Click Update.<br />

The number of prior days is updated for the selected schools and the following message<br />

displays, “Feature updated successfully.”<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 11


Initial District Setup<br />

Note: It is not necessary to click Save.<br />

Period Attendance Tab on the School Feature Setup Screen<br />

Teachers cannot enter or modify period attendance on the Period Attendance screen or Seating<br />

Chart on a day that is past the number of days set to allow for period attendance. On the Period<br />

Attendance screen in the Class Attendance list, the list of attendance codes is not available, and<br />

the following message displays, “Altering period attendance in the past is only available for X<br />

day(s) prior to the current date.”<br />

Daily Attendance Tab<br />

The following school features are available on the Daily Attendance tab:<br />

• Offer Daily Attendance – Provides teachers with the ability to take daily attendance in<br />

classes on the Daily Attendance screen and Seating Chart. When this feature is disabled,<br />

the Daily Attendance link does not display on the Teacher Home Page; the Daily<br />

Attendance and Daily Attendance by Seating Chart links do not display on the Class<br />

Dashboard; and the Allow daily attendance to be taken with this chart option and is<br />

not available on the Seating Chart.<br />

• Allow Prior Day Changes – Provide teachers with the ability to enter and, if the school is<br />

not integrated with a student information system, to modify daily attendance for days prior<br />

to the current day on the Daily Attendance screen and Seating Chart.<br />

• Enable Live SIS Integration – Allows schools to read and save daily attendance data<br />

from your student information system, where available on a real-time basis. This option is<br />

enabled only if your district runs live daily attendance.<br />

Daily Attendance Tab on the School Feature Setup Screen<br />

12 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Initial District Setup<br />

Reports Tab<br />

Schools can enable Report Builder reports on the Reports tab.<br />

Enable and Disable School Features<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, select School Features.<br />

2. On the School Feature Setup screen, select the Period Attendance, Daily Attendance<br />

or Reports tab.<br />

3. In the appropriate feature column, select the check box for each school for which you<br />

want to enable the feature.<br />

Note: To apply a feature to all the schools in the list at once, select the check box<br />

above the name of the feature, and click Save.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

Reports Tab on the School Feature Setup Screen<br />

Note: To disable the feature for a school, deselect the check box in the feature<br />

column, and click Save.<br />

Set Up Data Integration<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system and you have already<br />

selected the appropriate integration system for the district on the District Setup screen, you can<br />

enable data integration for each school building as needed.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Tools, click Data Integration Status.<br />

2. On the Data Integration Setup screen in the Integration <strong>System</strong> column, select the<br />

appropriate student information system for each building.<br />

3. Click Save.<br />

4. You may perform any of the following optional steps while setting up data integration for<br />

the exchange of attendance codes and report card grades with your student information<br />

system:<br />

• To enable live daily attendance integration, click the Click here to modify<br />

Integration status link, and then on the Daily Attendance tab on the School Feature<br />

Setup screen, select the check box in the Offer Daily Attendance column for the<br />

appropriate school. See “Daily Attendance Tab.”<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 13


Initial District Setup<br />

• To enable period attendance integration, click the Click here to modify Integration<br />

status link, select the Period Attendance tab on the School Feature Setup screen,<br />

and then select the check box in the Offer Period Attendance column for the<br />

appropriate school. See “Period Attendance Tab.”<br />

• To export report card grades to the student information system, make sure you have<br />

selected the appropriate data integration method and source options on the General<br />

tab while creating the report card. See “Create Report Cards/Interims.”<br />

Data Integrations Setup Screen<br />

Disable Data Integration for District<br />

It is recommended to disable data integration for the entire school district at the end of the school<br />

year after final report card grades have been completed to prevent data, such as student<br />

accounts, class schedules, staff accounts and attendance records, from being loaded into<br />

GradeBook directly from the student information system before the beginning of the next school<br />

year.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, click District.<br />

2. On the District Setup screen in the Integration <strong>System</strong> column, select None for the district.<br />

The following message displays: "Changing the integration system turns off integration at<br />

all schools. To re-enable integration for one or more schools, go to the Data Integration<br />

Setup Page."<br />

3. Click Save.<br />

Disable Data Integration for School<br />

You can disable data integration for an individual school building at any time. Disabling data<br />

integration on this screen overrides any data integration options you may have already selected<br />

on the Daily Attendance or Period Attendance tabs on the School Feature Setup screen. In the<br />

Report Card Builder, the student information system does not display in the data integration<br />

source list on the General tab, and the External Reference column does not display on the<br />

Assessments tab if you disable data integration for all schools on this screen.<br />

14 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Initial District Setup<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Tools, select Data Integration Status.<br />

2. On the Data Integration Setup screen in the Integration <strong>System</strong> column, select None for<br />

the appropriate school building.<br />

3. Click Save.<br />

Named Codes Overview<br />

Named codes lists are set up and maintained to specify the attendance-related codes, student<br />

status and other codes used in each school in your district. GradeBook provides default named<br />

codes groups for you to use that remain in the system regardless of whether or not your district is<br />

integrated with a student information system. Once you have set up the named codes lists, they<br />

remain in your system from year to year.<br />

Depending on the student information system in which your school district is integrated, certain<br />

named codes lists are imported into GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you<br />

should make them to the named codes lists in that student information system. Therefore, it is not<br />

recommended to create customized named codes lists in GradeBook.<br />

If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you must set up the<br />

named codes lists during the initial GradeBook setup. You can use the predefined named codes<br />

groups provided by GradeBook, or you can add customized named codes lists to the default<br />

groups to suit your needs.<br />

The specific code lists and their uses are distributed throughout this manual within the subjects to<br />

which they are related. For example, most attendance codes are covered in the Attendance<br />

chapter, while student codes are covered in the Maintain Students chapter. For your reference,<br />

all of the Named Codes Lists are listed in “Named Codes Lists” along with the page numbers<br />

where you can find more detailed information.<br />

Named Codes Lists<br />

Named Codes<br />

Page<br />

Instructional Cycle Codes 17<br />

Attendance Day Codes 19<br />

Period/Block Codes 94<br />

Admission Codes 97<br />

Withdrawal Codes 98<br />

Student Status Codes 99<br />

Address Type Codes 99<br />

Contact Type Codes 100<br />

Absence Types Codes 110<br />

Absence Totals Codes 111<br />

Absence Reason Codes 113<br />

Attendance Note Codes 114<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 15


Initial District Setup<br />

Associate Named Codes Lists with Schools<br />

Once you have set up or imported your Named Codes Lists into GradeBook, the codes must be<br />

associated with the appropriate school buildings within your district. For example, your district may<br />

use different attendance codes in the secondary schools than in the primary schools. Depending<br />

on the student information system in which your school district is integrated, the association of<br />

schools with named codes may have already been imported, and you do not have to follow the<br />

following procedure.<br />

Also, depending on the student information system in which your school district is integrated,<br />

Activity Codes and Activity Groups may be associated with specific codes or may not be used at<br />

all.<br />

If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you must associate a<br />

school with a named codes list for each named code group. If you do not associate named codes<br />

with schools, attendance information will not display appropriately throughout GradeBook.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click School Named<br />

Codes.<br />

2. On the School Named Codes screen in the School list, select the school you want to<br />

associate with a named codes list.<br />

3. In the Code List column, select the appropriate named codes list to associate with the<br />

Code Group for the school.<br />

4. Continue associating named codes lists with code groups the school uses.<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

6. To continue associating named codes lists with code groups for all the schools in the<br />

district, repeat step 2 through step 5.<br />

Note: If the Absence Totals and Absences Types named codes lists selected do<br />

not match, the following message displays at the bottom of the screen: “The<br />

Absence Types defined in the Absence Totals used for attendance totaling do not<br />

match the selected Absence Types. This may cause incorrect attendance totaling.<br />

Check the following Absence Totals calculation(s): lists the affected Absence<br />

Types.”<br />

16 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Initial District Setup<br />

School Named Codes Screen<br />

Add Instructional Cycle Codes<br />

Instructional cycle codes represent the instructional cycle that is used in the school calendar. The<br />

instructional cycle is the set of days that school meets during the week.<br />

By default, the Monday through Friday instructional cycles will already be set up in GradeBook,<br />

you may need to enter instructional cycle codes during the initial GradeBook setup regardless of<br />

whether or not your district is integrated with a student information system if you use something<br />

other than the standard Monday through Friday codes. Once you have set up the list, it remains<br />

in your system from year to year.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Instructional<br />

Cycles.<br />

2. On the Instructional Cycles screen in the Name list, select the appropriate instructional<br />

cycle.<br />

3. In the Code column, type the code (up to 2 characters) representing the day.<br />

4. In the Description column, type the name of the day.<br />

Note: The description may be the actual day of the week, such as Monday, or it<br />

may be an internal description, such as Day 1, based on your district's calendar<br />

cycle.<br />

5. In the Seq# column, type the number representing the order in which the cycle day should<br />

display.<br />

6. Click Save.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 17


Initial District Setup<br />

Instructional Cycles Screen<br />

Copy Named Codes to New List<br />

1. On the Instructional Cycles screen in the Name list, select the default named codes list.<br />

2. In the Copy to new List field, type the name of the list to which you want to copy.<br />

3. Click Go.<br />

The name entered in the Copy to new list field displays in the Name list.<br />

Modify Named Codes<br />

You should only modify the named codes in GradeBook if your school district is not integrated with<br />

a student information system.<br />

Depending on the student information system in which your school district may be integrated, the<br />

named codes may be imported into GradeBook from that system. You should make any<br />

necessary changes to named codes in the student information system.<br />

1. On the Instructional Cycles screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes<br />

list.<br />

2. Change the code, description or sequence number, as needed.<br />

3. Click Save.<br />

Delete Individual Named Codes from List<br />

You should only delete individual codes from a named codes list in GradeBook if your school<br />

district is not integrated with a student information system.<br />

1. On the Instructional Cycles screen in the Delete column, click the check box next to the<br />

code you want to remove from the list.<br />

2. Click Save.<br />

Note: You cannot delete a cycle day code that has been associated with a<br />

calendar day.<br />

18 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Initial District Setup<br />

Add Attendance Day Codes<br />

Attendance Days codes represent the types of days that school is in session. Each day type, for<br />

example, full day, half day and holiday, is assigned a value. The value of the type of day is used<br />

in attendance calculations. These codes display on the Attendance by Student and Update<br />

Absence Info screens.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Attendance<br />

Days.<br />

2. On the Attendance Day Codes screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named<br />

codes list.<br />

3. In the Code column, type the new code.<br />

4. In the Description column, type the description of the code.<br />

5. In the Multiplier list, select a value that represents the code.<br />

Note: The value is the number, such as 1 for a full day or 0.5 for a half day, used<br />

in calculating attendance totals.<br />

6. In the appropriate color box, select the option button to designate the color that<br />

represents the day as it appears on the attendance calendars.<br />

7. Click Save.<br />

8. To continue adding codes, repeat step 3 through step 7.<br />

Attendance Day Codes<br />

Create School Calendars<br />

The school calendar includes the total number of days that school meets for the year. You can<br />

create a separate calendar for each school building, which may be required by some school<br />

districts, and then associate the school with the appropriate calendar. You can also have different<br />

calendars for different grade levels in the same building. For example, the kindergarten calendar<br />

may have a different start date than the start date on the calendar used by the first through fourth<br />

grades. You must create a school calendar whether or not your school district is integrated with a<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 19


Initial District Setup<br />

student information system. School calendars may be imported through integration with the<br />

student information system; however, ongoing maintenance must still be done in GradeBook<br />

throughout the school year.<br />

Once the calendar has been created Saturday and Sunday are considered off days. If your school<br />

district or school building meets on Saturday or Sunday, you must edit the calendar to reflect that<br />

change.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click School Calendars.<br />

2. On the Calendar List screen in the Description column, type the name of new calendar in<br />

the blank cell.<br />

3. In the Cal# column, type a number.<br />

Note: If your school district is integrated with certain student information systems,<br />

this number may already be entered.<br />

4. In the Total Days column, type the number of days that school meets during the year.<br />

Note: This number of days is used in the Days Possible and Days Present<br />

calculations that can be selected on the Absence Totals screen.<br />

5. In the Instructional Cycle list, select the appropriate instructional cycle.<br />

Note: The instructional cycles created on the Named Codes screen displays in<br />

this list.<br />

6. In the Cycle Type list, select the appropriate cycle type option:<br />

• Mon-Fri – Use this when the instructional cycle is five days and Mondays are always<br />

the start of the cycle. This is the default option.<br />

• Rotating – The cycle is applied consecutively throughout the calendar.<br />

Note: The codes set up on the Attendance Day Codes screen display in this list.<br />

7. In the Attendance Days list, select the appropriate attendance days named codes.<br />

8. In the Start Month list, select the month that school begins.<br />

9. In the Start Day list, select the day that school begins.<br />

10. In the School Year list, select the year the calendar represents.<br />

11. Click Save.<br />

12. Proceed to edit the calendar to complete the calendar setup.<br />

20 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Initial District Setup<br />

Calendar List Screen<br />

Edit Calendar Month<br />

When a new calendar has been created, Mondays through Fridays are considered full days.<br />

GradeBook automatically calculates the last day of the school calendar based on the start date<br />

and the total number of days in the calendar. You must edit the calendar to reflect the days that<br />

school is not in session or any other special days and then adjust the end date based on those<br />

days. The colors that display at the bottom of the School Calendar screen have been set up on<br />

the Attendance Day Codes screen.<br />

Once you have completely edited the calendar, you must associate the calendar with the school<br />

buildings that use the calendar.<br />

1. On the Calendar List screen, select the Calendar Days tab.<br />

Note: On the School Calendar screen, you can also click<br />

calendar you want to edit.<br />

next to the<br />

2. On the School Calendar screen in the Select a Calendar list, select the appropriate<br />

calendar.<br />

Notice that the Selected Calendar, Calendar Start and Cycle Type display across the top<br />

of the calendar. The months in the calendar display along the left side of the calendar<br />

beginning with the first month in the school year. Cycle day codes that are included in the<br />

instructional cycle that is associated with this calendar display in each day. The<br />

background color of each day is denoted by the type of attendance day. Keys explaining<br />

the Attendance Days and Instructional Cycle Days displays across the bottom of the<br />

screen.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 21


Initial District Setup<br />

Monday - Friday School Calendar<br />

3. On the left side of the screen, click the month you want to edit.<br />

4. On the Edit Calendar Month screen at the bottom of the screen, select an attendance day<br />

option.<br />

5. In the date box, click directly on the number to which you want to apply that option.<br />

The color representing that option displays in the date box.<br />

Note: You can select multiple dates for that specific attendance day option.<br />

Note: You can navigate to future months by clicking the forward arrow near the<br />

month title.<br />

6. Click Save.<br />

Rotating Calendar<br />

22 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Initial District Setup<br />

Edit Calendar Month Screen<br />

7. To continue applying attendance day options, perform step 5 through step 6.<br />

8. In the Web site banner, click the Back to main calendar page link to return to the School<br />

Calendar screen.<br />

9. To continue editing calendar days, perform step 3 through step 6.<br />

10. Proceed to assign instructional cycles.<br />

Assign Instructional Cycles<br />

An instructional cycle is the set of days that school meets during the week. You should assign an<br />

instructional cycle to your school’s calendar when you are setting it up at the beginning of the<br />

school year. You may need to reassign cycle days during the initial set up after you modify the<br />

calendar to reflect holidays and other time off. You can also reassign cycle days in an instructional<br />

cycle associated with a specific calendar at any time during the school year in the event that<br />

school did not meet because of a weather emergency, for example.<br />

1. On the School Calendar screen in the Select a Calendar list, select the appropriate<br />

calendar.<br />

2. At the bottom of the screen, click the Assign Instructional Cycle Days link.<br />

The Assign Instructional Cycles window displays.<br />

3. On Assign Instructional Cycles window, verify that the calendar selected on the School<br />

Calendar screen displays in the Calendar list.<br />

4. If the school year is in progress in the Start Date field, the current date displays.<br />

You may click<br />

to select a different date, if desired.<br />

5. In the End Date field, the calendar’s end date displays.<br />

You may click<br />

to select a different date, if desired.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 23


Initial District Setup<br />

Note: If you are using the Rotating cycle type, the first cycle day in the set of cycle<br />

days for the instructional cycle associated with this calendar displays in the<br />

Starting Cycle Day list. You may select a different cycle day, if desired.<br />

6. Click Assign Instructional Cycle Days.<br />

The adjusted cycle days display on the calendar.<br />

Instructional Cycles on a School Calendar<br />

Associate Schools with Calendars<br />

You must associate a school calendar with the school buildings in your school district for accurate<br />

attendance totaling. You can also associate multiple school calendars with one school building if<br />

that is required in your school district. For example, kindergarten may follow a slightly different<br />

calendar schedule than the other grades in the same school. If you do not select a default calendar<br />

for the school, GradeBook uses the District Calendar.<br />

1. On the Calendar List screen, select the Schools tab.<br />

2. On the Link Schools with Calendars screen in the Default Calendar list, select the<br />

calendar the school will use as its default calendar.<br />

3. Select any additional calendars the school will use, if appropriate.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

24 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Initial District Setup<br />

Link Schools with Calendars Screen<br />

Set Up Rounding Preferences for Student Averages<br />

The Grade Book Rounding preference determines how student averages are rounded and<br />

displayed in GradeBook. This sets how student averages are displayed throughout the teacher’s<br />

grade book, such as the Class Dashboard, Grade Book Grid, Progress by Student Grid as well as<br />

Classic and Beta ParentAccess.<br />

The rounding preferences are determined by modifying specific records in the LookupCodes table<br />

in the district database. You can set the student averages to display up to two decimal places.<br />

Set Up Rounding for Grade Book<br />

1. Open SQL Server Management Studio.<br />

2. In the Object Explorer pane, expand the Databases node.<br />

3. Expand the district database.<br />

4. Expand the Tables node, and then open the LookupCodes table.<br />

5. In the Group_DBID field, locate the record with a value of 6.<br />

The value in the Group_DBID field is the identifying value for the record in the<br />

LookupGroups table that defines (Grade Book) Rounding.<br />

LookupGroups Table and Corresponding Record in the LookupCodes Table<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 25


Initial District Setup<br />

6. In the LookupCode field, enter one of the following values that represents the number of<br />

decimal places you want to display after the decimal point:<br />

• 2 – Displays two places after the decimal point, such as 89.67<br />

• 1 – Rounds up to the nearest tenth, and displays two places after the decimal point,<br />

such as 89.70<br />

• 0 – Rounds up to the nearest ten and displays two zeroes after the decimal point,<br />

such as 90.00<br />

7. In the LookupCodes table, click out of the row to save the changes to the record.<br />

8. Log in to GradeBook and navigate to the Grade Book Grid.<br />

Student averages should display on the Grade Book Grid and Class Dashboard as a<br />

percentage including the number of places after the decimal point that is represented by<br />

the value you entered in step 6.<br />

9. In each district database, repeat step 2 through step 8 for which you want to set up the<br />

rounding for the grade book.<br />

Make Student Pictures Available on Seating Chart<br />

To ensure that student photographs are available to display on the desks of the seating charts<br />

created in GradeBook, you can create a virtual directory if your GradeBook Web application and<br />

picture directory are located on two different servers or you want to use a different physical<br />

directory on the same server. You can also create a physical directory if you are going to store the<br />

pictures on the same server and in the same Web site directory as the GradeBook application.<br />

GradeBook supports .jpg/.jpeg, .gif and .png image file types. The name of the image file should<br />

be the district student identification number, for example, 89034251.jpg. If your district is<br />

integrated with a student information system, this identification number should be the same<br />

identification number that is exported from the student information system to GradeBook.<br />

Create New Virtual Directory<br />

On the server at the same level where the GradeBook directory is located, create a new virtual<br />

directory in IIS that maps to an existing directory that contains all the districts’ student photographs<br />

on another server.<br />

Create New Virtual Directory Using IIS6<br />

1. Open Internet Information Services (IIS).<br />

2. In the IIS <strong>Manager</strong> under Web Sites, locate <strong>ProgressBook</strong>.<br />

26 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Initial District Setup<br />

3. Right-click on <strong>ProgressBook</strong>, select New and then select Virtual Directory.<br />

4. In the Virtual Directory Creation Wizard, click Next.<br />

5. On the Virtual Directory Creation Wizard in the Alias field, type the name of the directory<br />

that will contain all the student photographs. For example, you could name the directory<br />

Pictures, Photographs or StudentPictures.<br />

6. In the Path field, enter the directory path that contains the district folders with the<br />

students’ pictures.<br />

Note: Do not select the district folders; select the level preceding the district<br />

folders.<br />

7. Click Next.<br />

8. Under Allow the following permissions, check Read.<br />

9. Click Next.<br />

10. Click Finish.<br />

11. If the students’ pictures are on multiple servers, repeat step 1 through step 10.<br />

12. In IIS <strong>Manager</strong> in the left pane, select the new virtual directory, and in the right pane,<br />

verify that the appropriate files appear.<br />

13. Open Microsoft SQL Server 2005/2008.<br />

14. In Microsoft SQL Server 2005/2008 in the PB_Master database, find the DistrictLogin<br />

table.<br />

15. Right-click on the DistrictLogin table, and select Edit Top 200 Rows.<br />

Create New Virtual Directory Using IIS7<br />

Locate <strong>ProgressBook</strong> in IIS6<br />

<strong>Manager</strong><br />

1. Open Internet Information Services (IIS).<br />

2. In IIS <strong>Manager</strong> under Default Web Site, locate <strong>ProgressBook</strong>.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 27


Initial District Setup<br />

Locate <strong>ProgressBook</strong> in IIS7<br />

<strong>Manager</strong><br />

3. Right-click on <strong>ProgressBook</strong>, and select Add Virtual Directory.<br />

4. On the Add Virtual Directory screen in the Alias field, type the name of the directory that<br />

will contain all the student photographs. For example, you could name the directory<br />

Pictures, Photographs or StudentPictures.<br />

5. In the Physical path field, type the directory path that contains the district folders with the<br />

students’ pictures.<br />

Note: Do not select the district folders; select the level preceding the district<br />

folders.<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

7. If the students’ pictures are on multiple servers, repeat step 1 through step 6.<br />

8. In IIS <strong>Manager</strong> in the left pane, select the new virtual directory, and in the right pane,<br />

verify that the appropriate files appear.<br />

9. Open Microsoft SQL Server 2005/2008.<br />

10. In Microsoft SQL Server 2005/2008 in the PB_Master database, find the DistrictLogin<br />

table.<br />

11. Right-click on the DistrictLogin table, and select Edit Top 200 Rows.<br />

Create New Directory<br />

If you want to maintain student photographs on the same server and in the same Web site<br />

directory as your GradeBook application, you can simply create a new directory. If you are<br />

maintaining student photographs for multiple school districts, it is recommended to create a<br />

separate subdirectory for each district. In this case, for example, the directory path may be<br />

C:\Inetpub\wwwroot\Pictures\Lakeview, where Lakeview represents the name of the district.<br />

Continue to create as many subdirectories as there are districts.<br />

28 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Add Directory to GradeBook<br />

Initial District Setup<br />

To indicate to GradeBook where to look for the pictures directory, the directory information must<br />

be added to the DistrictLogin table in the pb_master database.<br />

1. In SQL Server Enterprise <strong>Manager</strong> or SQL Server Management Studio, expand the<br />

Databases directory.<br />

2. Open the pb_master database.<br />

3. In the Tables directory, view the contents of the DistrictLogin table.<br />

4. In the DistrictLogin table, locate the district for which you want to add pictures in the<br />

District_DBID column, and then in the PicFolder column, type ../ followed by the name of<br />

the new directory you just created. For example, ../Pictures/Lakeview, where Pictures<br />

represents the name of the directory and Lakeview represents the name of district<br />

subdirectory.<br />

5. If you are adding photographs for multiple districts, repeat step 4 as many times as the<br />

number of districts for which you are adding photographs.<br />

6. Close the DistrictLogin table.<br />

7. Close the pb_master database.<br />

Audit User Activity<br />

The GradeBook network or server administrator can track user session information as well as<br />

changes made to assignment marks and report card grades in GradeBook. GradeBook audits this<br />

information in different ways. The user session information is recorded in the Audit.UserSession<br />

table in the District database and cannot be disabled. Assignment marks and report card grades<br />

that have been inserted, changed or deleted are recorded in the PBAudit log, which displays in<br />

the Microsoft Event Viewer. The PBAudit log can be enabled and disabled for individual district<br />

databases at any time.<br />

View User Login/Logout Activity<br />

User login and logout activity is recorded in the following fields in the Audit.UserSession table:<br />

• Staff_DBID<br />

• CreateDateTime<br />

• SessionId<br />

• EventType<br />

• IPAddress<br />

• DistrictStaffId<br />

• LastName<br />

• FirstName<br />

• LoginName<br />

A logout record is recorded in the Audit.UserSession table only if a user clicks the Logout link to<br />

log out of GradeBook.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 29


Initial District Setup<br />

Install GradeBook Audit Logs<br />

You must install the audit logs to enable tracking changes made to assignment marks and report<br />

card grades in GradeBook. If you have already installed PBAudit log and configured the settings<br />

during a software upgrade, see “Enable Audit Log.”<br />

1. On the SQL Server, create a new subdirectory called Event Log in C:\Program<br />

Files\Software Answers if you are running a 32-bit version of Windows Server or<br />

C:\Program Files (x86)\Software Answers if you are running a 64-bit version of Windows<br />

Server.<br />

2. Download Event Log.zip to the new Event Log subdirectory, and extract the files.<br />

3. To create the audit log, double-click EventLogMaintenance.exe.<br />

4. On the Create/Validate <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Event Log window, highlight <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Event<br />

Logs.<br />

5. Next to the Resource File location field, click to browse for PBMessages.dll.<br />

6. In the Open window in the File Name list, select PBMessages.dll, and click Open.<br />

PBMessages.dll displays in the Resource File location field.<br />

Create/Validate <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Event Log<br />

Window<br />

Note: Make sure that the location where you choose to install audit log has ample<br />

space to allow the log file to increase in size. If you leave this field blank, the<br />

PBAudit log will be installed by default on the same system drive where the other<br />

system event logs are located. It is recommended to move the PBAudit log to a<br />

drive that has adequate space.<br />

30 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Initial District Setup<br />

7. If you are running Windows Server 2003, click next to the PBAudit event log location<br />

field to select a location to store the PBAudit log. If you are running Windows Server 2008,<br />

leave the event log location blank for now. You can modify this setting later. See “Modify<br />

Audit Log Settings in Windows Server 2008.”<br />

8. On the Create/Validate <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Event Log window, click Create Event Log.<br />

The message, “All Done” displays when the <strong>ProgressBook</strong> and PBAudit event logs have<br />

been installed.<br />

9. Close Create/Validate <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Event Log window.<br />

10. Open the Event Viewer, and notice that the <strong>ProgressBook</strong> and PBAudit logs display in<br />

the left pane.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> and PBAudit logs in the Event Viewer<br />

Note: Modifying PBAudit log settings and enabling the PBAudit log is optional.<br />

Estimate Amount of Drive Space Required to Maintain Audit Log<br />

Records<br />

Before you begin to modify PBAudit log settings, you will need to determine the total number of<br />

current ClassAssignmentMark and StudentReportMark records for all districts at your site. Use<br />

this record count and the number of remaining grading periods to estimate the amount of drive<br />

space needed to maintain a large number of records in the PBAudit log that may accumulate<br />

through the end of the school year.<br />

1. Open SQL Server Management Studio, and run the FindMarkTotals.sql script, which<br />

is located in the Event Log subdirectory.<br />

The script returns one record that represents the total number of current<br />

ClassAssignmentMark and StudentReportMark records for all districts at your site.<br />

2. With this number of current records, use the following guideline to calculate how much<br />

drive space is needed to maintain PBAudit log:<br />

3.5 million mark records = 1,000,000 KB of drive space<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 31


Initial District Setup<br />

Note: For example, if it is the end of the second grading period and you have<br />

determined that your site will have 7 million mark records in your system by the<br />

end of the school year, you may want to set the maximum log size to 2,000,000<br />

KB if you want to maintain the log file through the end of the school year.<br />

Modify Audit Log Settings in Windows Server 2003<br />

If GradeBook is running on Windows Server 2003, modify PBAudit log settings, as desired.<br />

1. In the Event Viewer, right-click on PBAudit, and select Properties.<br />

2. On the PBAudit Properties window in the Maximum log size (KB) list, select a value that<br />

represents the maximum size the file can be.<br />

The default value is 16,384.<br />

3. On the PBAudit Properties window in the When maximum event log size is reached<br />

section, select one of the following options:<br />

• Overwrite events as needed<br />

• Overwrite events older than – If you select this option, be sure to select a value in<br />

the days list.<br />

• Do not overwrite events (clear log manually) – This is the recommended option.<br />

Note: You may maintain the records in PBAudit as long as desired. There is no<br />

minimum or maximum time requirement. However, if you set a maximum log size<br />

limit and the log file reaches that size, no more records will be written to the log.<br />

4. Click OK.<br />

Windows Server 2003 PBAudit Properties<br />

Window<br />

32 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Modify Audit Log Settings in Windows Server 2008<br />

Initial District Setup<br />

If GradeBook is running on Windows Server 2008, modify PBAudit log settings, as desired.<br />

1. In the Event Viewer, expand the Applications and Services Logs node.<br />

2. Right-click on PBAudit, and select Properties.<br />

3. On the Log Properties - PBAudit window, if you want to store the log file on a different drive<br />

than the default location, C:\Program Files (x86)\Software Answers\Event Log, then type<br />

the location in the Log path field.<br />

4. In the Maximum log size (KB) list, select a value that represents the maximum size the file<br />

can be.<br />

The default value is 1,028.<br />

5. In the When maximum event log size is reached section, select one of the following<br />

options:<br />

• Overwrite events as needed (oldest events firsts)<br />

• Archive the log when full, do not overwrite events – This is the recommended<br />

option. When the log file reaches the maximum file size limit, it stops writing records<br />

in that file and creates a new log file.<br />

• Do not overwrite events (Clear logs manually)<br />

Note: You may select different maximum event log size options at different sites,<br />

as needed.<br />

Windows Server 2008 LogProperties – PBAudit<br />

Window<br />

6. Click Apply, and then OK.<br />

The Log Properties - PBAudit window closes.<br />

7. Close the Event Viewer.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 33


Initial District Setup<br />

Enable Audit Log<br />

You can enable the PBAudit log for any district database at any time.<br />

1. In the Event Log subdirectory, double-click EventLogging.sql to open the script in SQL<br />

Server Management Studio.<br />

2. Log in to the appropriate database.<br />

3. Click Execute to run the script.<br />

EventLogging Script<br />

4. From the Event Log subdirectory to the Batch subdirectory where PBCompare is installed,<br />

copy Create_audit_triggers.sql.<br />

The default location is C:\Program Files\Software Answers\PBCompare if you are running<br />

a 32-bit version of Windows Server or C:\Program Files (x86)\Software<br />

Answers\PBCompare if you are running a 64-bit version of Windows Server.<br />

5. Open PBCompare, and log in to the appropriate server using pbadmin as the username<br />

and password.<br />

6. Select the Script tab, and then in the Script to execute list, select<br />

Create_audit_triggers.sql.<br />

Note: Running this script enables triggers in the selected database that will log<br />

activity against the StudentReportMark and ClassAssignmentMark tables.<br />

7. Select the databases for which you want to enable auditing.<br />

Note: DO NOT select the pb_dataintegration and pb_Master databases.<br />

34 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Initial District Setup<br />

Select the Appropriate Databases in PBCompare to Enable<br />

Auditing<br />

8. Click Start.<br />

9. Verify that the status of the selected databases changes to “Done.”<br />

10. Close PBCompare.<br />

View Changes Made in GradeBook in Audit Log<br />

You can monitor added, changed or deleted assignment marks or report card grades in<br />

GradeBook in the PBAudit log.<br />

1. Open the Event Viewer, and refresh PBAudit.<br />

2. To open the Event Properties window, double-click on a record.<br />

3. In the Event Properties window, click the up or down arrows to scroll through the records.<br />

Notice that the staff, student, class and assignment identification numbers are different as<br />

you scroll through the records.<br />

4. Close the Event Properties window.<br />

5. Close the Event Viewer.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 35


Initial District Setup<br />

View Records in the Event Properties Window<br />

Disable Audit Log<br />

You can disable the PBAudit log for any district database at any time using either SQL Server<br />

Management Studio or PBCompare.<br />

1. In SQL Server Management Studio, open Disable_audit_triggers.sql.<br />

2. Select the database for which you want to disable auditing.<br />

3. Click Execute to run the script.<br />

Disable Audit Log in PBCompare<br />

To disable multiple district databases at once, perform the following procedure.<br />

1. Open PBCompare, and log in to the appropriate server using pbadmin as the username<br />

and password.<br />

2. Select the Script tab, and then in the Script to execute list, select<br />

Disable_audit_triggers.sql.<br />

3. Select the databases for which you want to disable auditing.<br />

4. Click Start.<br />

5. Verify that the status of the selected databases changes to “Done.”<br />

6. Close PBCompare.<br />

36 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Grading Setup<br />

This chapter will explain how to set up the GradeBook system for your district’s reporting practices.<br />

GradeBook provides complete flexibility for each school district to define their reporting periods<br />

and when report card grades can be entered by the teachers. In addition you must define the types<br />

of marks that are used for grading and the grading scales used by the district. Defining these<br />

options in the system will affect what teachers have access to in their grade books.<br />

Add Reporting Periods<br />

At the beginning of each school year, it is necessary to set up reporting periods for all terms in<br />

which grades will be given for each school. During initial implementation of GradeBook, the<br />

reporting periods must be created, and each subsequent year the date ranges for each reporting<br />

period must be adjusted appropriately. When setting up reporting periods, the Gradebook Range<br />

option is used to indicate which reporting periods define an actual date range for the grade book.<br />

When this option is selected, the reporting period will be available in teachers’ grade books and<br />

used to determine the reporting period in which an assignment should be calculated. The system<br />

will use the due date on assignments compared with start and end dates on the reporting periods<br />

to make this determination. Check the Gradebook Range option only for reporting periods that<br />

define where assignments should fall, such as quarters or trimesters and not on exam or final<br />

grade reporting periods.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Grading Setup, click Reporting Periods.<br />

2. On the Reporting Periods screen in the Name column, click in an empty field, and enter<br />

the new reporting period name.<br />

3. In the Short Name column, enter an abbreviation for the reporting period name.<br />

For example, a short name for Quarter 1 could be Q1.<br />

4. In the Gradebook Range? column, select the check box, if appropriate.<br />

Note: When Gradebook Range is selected, Progress Book uses the<br />

corresponding Term Begin and Term End dates for displaying assignments on the<br />

Class Dashboard and calculating student averages for that reporting period.<br />

Note: You need to perform step a through step c only if you selected the check<br />

box in the Gradebook Range? column in step 4.<br />

a. In the Term Begin column, enter the date that the reporting period begins.<br />

b. In the Interim End column, enter the date that the Interim period ends.<br />

c. In the Term End column, enter the date that the reporting period ends.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> Gradebook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 37


Grading Setup<br />

Reporting Periods Screen<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

6. To complete the process, in the Entry Dates column, click the Edit link to enter report card<br />

entry dates.<br />

Note: The All Year Long reporting period is used for report card assessments<br />

that could be marked as completed at any time during the school year, such as<br />

letter and sound recognition boxes for kindergarten standards-based report cards.<br />

Enter Report Card Entry Dates<br />

You must set up specific dates in which teachers can enter interim and report card grades for each<br />

building in the school district. You can save time by using the copy option at the bottom of the<br />

screen if the entry dates are the same for multiple buildings in your district.<br />

1. On the Reporting Periods screen in the Entry Dates column, click the Edit link in the row<br />

of the reporting period you are adding.<br />

2. On the Report Card Entry Dates by School screen in the Entry Start Date field, enter the<br />

appropriate date and time for the building for which you are setting up.<br />

3. In the Entry End Date field, enter the appropriate date and time.<br />

Note: If you do not specify a time, the system uses 12:00 AM as the beginning<br />

and ending time.<br />

Note: You can save time by using the copy defaults option to enter entry start and<br />

end dates for all buildings and then modify the dates and times for individual<br />

buildings, if necessary.<br />

4. If your school district uses Classic or Beta ParentAccess, in the Publish Date column,<br />

enter the date and time that you want report card or interim grades to appear on Classic<br />

or Beta ParentAccess.<br />

Note: For school districts that keep report card grade entry periods open all<br />

school year, the current grading period that displays in Classic or Beta<br />

ParentAccess is determined by the report card publish date and not the report<br />

card entry end date. However, if the report card publish date is blank, the report<br />

card entry end date will be used.<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

38 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Gradebook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Grading Setup<br />

Report Card Entry Dates by School Screen<br />

Note: If teachers need additional time to enter report card data, then you can<br />

extend the Report Card Entry End Date as needed. If the report card is using<br />

batch integration with the student information system for report card grades, it will<br />

be necessary to deselect the check box in the C column for that school to allow<br />

the grades to be updated again in the student information system.<br />

Note: For school districts that use the batch report card integration, the Export<br />

Grades link displays. Click the link to open the Report Card Grade Export screen<br />

to export only the interims and report cards grades entered for reporting periods in<br />

which entry end dates have passed.<br />

Edit Reporting Periods<br />

Once a reporting period has been saved, you can change the text and/or dates.<br />

1. On the Reporting Periods screen, change the reporting period name, short name and<br />

term beginning and ending dates, as needed.<br />

2. Click Save.<br />

Delete Reporting Periods<br />

Note: You cannot delete a reporting period if it is attached to a report card or a<br />

class.<br />

1. On the Reporting Periods screen in the Del? column, select the check box for the<br />

reporting period you want to delete.<br />

2. Click Save.<br />

Export Report Card Grades on Demand for Districts that Run<br />

Batch Integration<br />

For school districts that integrate with certain student information systems, the Export Grades link<br />

displays at the bottom of the Report Card Entry Dates by School screen. This option is used to<br />

manually create the batch export file for report card grades, which is then imported into the student<br />

information system. You can export interim and report card grades in the form of a text file (.txt)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> Gradebook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 39


Grading Setup<br />

to your student information system at any time in addition to the normally scheduled batch<br />

integration procedure, as needed. The C column on the Report Card Entry Dates by School<br />

screen indicates the final grade extract for each school for that reporting period. Once this check<br />

box is selected, the corresponding grades will not be included in the grade extract files. This option<br />

will automatically be selected after an extract file is created and the Entry End Date has passed.<br />

If it is necessary to rerun the extract manually after the C column has been selected, you can use<br />

the following procedure.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page, click Reporting Periods.<br />

2. On the Reporting Periods screen in the Entry Dates column, click the Edit link in the row<br />

of the reporting period in which you want to export grades.<br />

3. On the Report Card Entry Dates by School screen in the C column, deselect the check<br />

box for the school whose report card grades you want to export.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

5. To export report card grades for multiple reporting periods in multiple schools, in the<br />

Reporting Period list, select the appropriate reporting period, and then repeat step 3 and<br />

step 4.<br />

6. Click the Export Grades link.<br />

C Column on the Report Card Entry Dates by School Screen<br />

7. On the Report Card Grade Export screen, click Export Grades.<br />

40 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Gradebook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Grading Setup<br />

Report Card Grade Export Screen<br />

The following message displays, “Grade export complete.”<br />

8. Click the Home link to return to the Administrator Home Page.<br />

9. Return to the Report Card Entry Dates by School screen, and in the C column, notice<br />

that the check box for the school whose report card grades you exported have been<br />

automatically reselected.<br />

The report card grades have been exported to the directory specified in the Lookup Descr<br />

field for the record with the value of Extract Path in the LookupCode field in the<br />

MasterLookupCodes table in the pb_master database. Only the <strong>System</strong> Administrator has<br />

access to this database.<br />

Set Up Cross References for Reporting Periods<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system, you must associate reporting<br />

periods to the corresponding terms and reporting periods in your student information system. It is<br />

imperative to enter the appropriate cross reference codes correctly to ensure that the correct<br />

grades are transferred to the student information system. Only GradeBook system managers with<br />

master privileges can make these changes.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Grading Setup, click Cross Reference.<br />

2. On the Period Cross Reference screen in the School list, select the appropriate school.<br />

3. In the appropriate Term/Period columns, select the appropriate term/period code for<br />

each reporting period that has a mark to transfer to the student information system.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

5. To continue associating reporting periods to the corresponding terms and reporting<br />

periods for each school building in the district, repeat step 2 through step 4.<br />

Note: Depending on your district’s student information system, additional rows or<br />

multiple Term/Period columns may display on this screen.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> Gradebook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 41


Grading Setup<br />

Period Cross Reference Screen<br />

Mark Types<br />

Mark types must be set up to specify the information that can and should be entered in the<br />

teacher’s grade book and on report cards. The following default mark types are automatically set<br />

up in GradeBook and cannot be deleted:<br />

• A-F – A common, letter–based grade type used at thee secondary level and some<br />

primary grades.<br />

• Checkmarks for Report Cards – Prints a check mark on elementary standards-based<br />

report cards. Commonly used as the mark type with report card templates for letters and<br />

sight words.<br />

• Comment – User can type upper case, lower case or mixed case alphanumeric text up to<br />

2,000 characters.<br />

• Pass/fail – Pass or fail option as a mark.<br />

• Percent – Enables the user to enter percent values when entering marks for<br />

assignments.<br />

• Points – Enables the user to enter numeric point values when entering marks for<br />

assignments. Points are also used for total counts when entering lunch counts, total<br />

periods absent, etc.<br />

• Yes/No – Enables the user to choose a yes or no option as a mark. If used an<br />

assignments, it will display as a check box on the Grade Book Grid. When the user clicks<br />

in the check box, a check mark displays meaning yes. If the check box is empty, it means<br />

no.<br />

The period attendance mark type, which enables period attendance to be taken on the Period<br />

Attendance and Seating Chart screens, is automatically set up in GradeBook and can be deleted<br />

if not in use. Valid attendance codes can be edited to meet the district’s needs.<br />

In addition to the default mark types provided by GradeBook, you can create custom mark types<br />

to meet district requirements or import them from certain student information systems during the<br />

data integration process. Imported mark types include the school short name code in the mark<br />

42 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Gradebook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Grading Setup<br />

type name, such as LVHS_Marks or LVHS_Comments. For imported mark types, all changes<br />

should be made in the student information system and imported into GradeBook through the<br />

nightly integration process. With many student information systems, it is required that report cards<br />

use the imported mark types; otherwise, errors will occur when attempting to enter report card<br />

grades. Although mark types may be imported from the student information system, there are<br />

some options that can be configured in GradeBook. The GUI column allows you to specify what<br />

type of entry control is used on teachers’ screens to enter the grades for that mark type, for<br />

example, reserved for report card mark types only, which is indicated in the name of the option.<br />

To configure report cards to allow grades to be entered as the average percentage but also allow<br />

letter grade overrides in the same field, set the imported mark type.<br />

Add Mark Types<br />

It is necessary to set up any custom mark types that your district will use in GradeBook for grading,<br />

attendance or report card printing. You can make mark types available to all staff or limit to only<br />

users with administrative privileges.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Grading Setup, click Mark Types.<br />

2. On the Mark Types screen in the Name column, click in an empty field, and enter the new<br />

mark type name.<br />

3. In the GUI column from the list, select the desired graphical user interface option.<br />

• Textbox – User can enter upper case, lower case or mixed case alphanumeric text<br />

up to 50 characters. It is recommended to use five characters or less.<br />

• Long Textbox (RptCards Only) – Displays a text box on the Report Card Entry<br />

screen. The user can enter alphanumeric text up to 2,000 characters, but screen size<br />

may limit the ability to view the entire comment.<br />

• Numeric Textbox – User can enter numeric text in decimal format in the text box up<br />

to 50 characters, for example, 999.99. It is recommended to use five characters or<br />

less.<br />

• Numeric with Overrides (RptCards Only) – Displays a text box on the Report Card<br />

Entry screen. The user can enter numeric text in decimal format in the text box up to<br />

50 characters, for example, 999.99, as well as valid alphabetic codes. If the mark is a<br />

number, it is calculated in the semester average. If the mark is a code, it is not<br />

calculated in the semester average.<br />

• List box – Displays a drop-down list of available options in alphanumeric text format<br />

from which the user must choose.<br />

• Comment – Displays a comment icon, which the user can select and then enter<br />

alphanumeric upper case, lower case or mixed case text up to 2,000 characters.<br />

• Combined Comment (RptCards Only) – Provides the option of using either Coded<br />

Comments or Comments. The user can choose one option or the other for each<br />

student; however, they may not use both options for the same student.<br />

• Click List – Displays a box in which the user clicks repeatedly to display valid values<br />

in alphanumeric text format. Each time the user clicks in the box an option displays. It<br />

is recommended to use no more than three options.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> Gradebook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 43


Grading Setup<br />

• Checkbox – Displays a check mark to indicate Yes/No or Complete/Incomplete as<br />

the user clicks in the check box.<br />

• Radio Button – Allows a user to choose one option in a group of two or more options.<br />

Note: The GUI option selected here determines how the Mark field displays<br />

where marks are entered throughout GradeBook.<br />

4. In the Uses List column, select the appropriate option to indicate whether you will provide<br />

the list of valid marks.<br />

• Y – Yes<br />

• N – No<br />

5. In the Admin Only column, select the appropriate option to indicate whether this mark type<br />

should be available only on report cards and interims.<br />

• Y – Yes<br />

• N – No<br />

6. Click Save.<br />

The mark type displays in the Name column.<br />

Mark Types Screen<br />

7. If you selected Y in the Uses List column indicating that you will provide a list of valid<br />

marks, click the View Marks link next to the mark type you just added.<br />

a. On the Mark Lists screen in the Mark column, type in the value or letter for the first<br />

valid mark.<br />

b. In the Description column, enter a description of the mark that can be viewed when<br />

entering marks for assignments and report card grades.<br />

c. In the Points column, enter a number that denotes the value of the mark. For mark<br />

types that do not have a numeric value, such as comment code, enter a number (in<br />

descending order) that denotes the order in which the mark should be displayed.<br />

44 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Gradebook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Grading Setup<br />

d. Leave the ID column blank because it is only used for imported mark types.<br />

e. Click Save.<br />

f. Repeat step a through step e to complete the list of valid marks for this mark type.<br />

g. In the upper left corner of the Web site banner, click the Return to Mark Types link to<br />

return to the Mark Types screen.<br />

Mark Lists Screen<br />

Edit Mark Types<br />

Although you cannot delete default mark types, you can modify them to meet your district’s needs.<br />

You may want to change previously created mark types.<br />

1. On the Mark Types screen, edit the Name, GUI or List option, as needed.<br />

2. Click Save.<br />

3. To edit the list of valid marks, click the View Marks link that is in the same row as the Mark<br />

Type that you want to edit.<br />

4. Change the Mark, Description or Points, as needed.<br />

Note: The marks are sorted in descending order by the number assigned in the<br />

Points field.<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

The edited mark type displays in the list.<br />

6. Click the Return to Mark Types link to return to the Mark Types screen.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> Gradebook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 45


Grading Setup<br />

Delete Mark Types<br />

Mark types that are attached to assignments cannot be deleted. Additionally, mark types denoted<br />

by an asterisk (*) have been imported into GradeBook from the student information system and<br />

cannot be deleted.<br />

1. On the Mark Types screen in the Del? column, click the check box next to the mark type<br />

you want to delete.<br />

2. Click Save.<br />

Del? Column on the Mark Types Screen<br />

Grading Scales<br />

The GradeBook system manager or curriculum director must set up the grading scales used in<br />

your school district. A default grading scale is set up in GradeBook, but you can add as many<br />

grading scales as desired and then customize them to meet district standards. It is recommended<br />

to be descriptive as possible when creating the grading scale name and description, since<br />

teachers can view them on the Grading Scales Setup screen. Grading scales allow teachers to:<br />

• Select the desired grading scale to use.<br />

• Use different grading scales for different classes.<br />

• Use different grading scales within a class, for example, assign different scales to<br />

different students.<br />

• Maintain averages for multiple assessments for an individual student within a class that<br />

follows standards-based education practices.<br />

It is imperative to set up grading scales correctly, so the appropriate marks display when teachers<br />

enter marks for assignments and report cards. The average calculations used in grading scales<br />

are very complex and involve converting percentages to letter grades, letter grades to points and<br />

points back to letter grades. When using percent and point ranges in a grading scale, make sure<br />

to use two decimal places to prevent gaps. For example, a range ending at 89% and the next<br />

range beginning at 90% creates a gap in a calculation of 89.65%. To eliminate this gap, the range<br />

should end at 89.99%, and the next range should begin at 90.00%.<br />

46 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Gradebook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Grading Setup<br />

Keep in mind the following recommendations before adding a grading scale:<br />

• If your district calculates averages using two decimal places, then percent ranges and<br />

point ranges must also use two decimal places. If GradeBook is set up to round to more<br />

than two decimal places, then the grading scale must include at least the same number of<br />

decimal places.<br />

• Verify that percent and point ranges do not have gaps. It is possible for a student’s<br />

average to fall within the gap, and when that happens, GradeBook cannot assign the<br />

appropriate grade.<br />

• Verify that percent ranges do not overlap. When a student’s grade falls within the overlap,<br />

the system cannot assign the appropriate grade.<br />

• Verify that percent ranges are not duplicated. When a student has duplicate grades, the<br />

system cannot assign the appropriate grade.<br />

• The starting number in a percentage or point range should be lower than the ending<br />

number in the range.<br />

• Verify that point ranges are accurate since these ranges are used in translating semester<br />

and final averages to letter grades. Point ranges should use two decimal places.<br />

Duplicate point ranges are acceptable but not advised since GradeBook may assign an<br />

incorrect letter grade.<br />

• Point values are used in calculating averages to letter grades. For example, a point value<br />

for an A would be 4. Duplicate point values are acceptable but not advised since<br />

GradeBook may assign an incorrect letter grade.<br />

• Recalculate grade books whenever you make a change to a grading scale.<br />

• Verify that mark types and grading scales correspond.<br />

Add Grading Scales<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Grading Setup, click Grading Scales.<br />

2. On the Grading Scales screen in the Web site banner, click the Add a Scale link.<br />

3. In the Name field, type the name of the grading scale.<br />

4. In the Description field, type the description of the grading scale.<br />

5. In the Seq# column and the first row with an asterisk (*), type 1, which denotes the first<br />

grading scale range entered.<br />

6. In the Mark column, if desired, type the letter that corresponds to the first range, for<br />

example, A.<br />

7. In the Point Value column, if desired, type in the value that corresponds to the first range,<br />

for example, 4.00.<br />

Note: Make sure to include two decimal places in percent and point ranges to<br />

prevent gaps. It is not necessary to include 0 if it is the second number after the<br />

decimal point. It is necessary to include the 0 before the decimal point in numbers<br />

less than 1. See “Grading Scales.”<br />

8. In the Percentage Range columns in the Starting% column, type the beginning of the<br />

range and in the Ending% column the end of the range.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> Gradebook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 47


Grading Setup<br />

9. In the Point Range columns in the Starting Point column, type the beginning of the range<br />

and in the Ending Point column the end of the range.<br />

10. Click Save.<br />

11. To complete all marks and ranges in the grading scale, repeat step 5 through step 10,<br />

as needed.<br />

Grading Scales Screen<br />

Copy Grading Scales<br />

You can copy an existing grading scale to save time when creating new grading scales.<br />

1. On the Grading Scales screen in the Scale list, select the grading scale you want to copy.<br />

2. Click Copy this scale.<br />

The name of the grading scale displays in the Scale list and Name field with (Copy)<br />

appended to the name.<br />

3. Edit the grading scale name and description, as desired.<br />

4. Make any necessary changes to the grading scale, if applicable.<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

Edit Grading Scales<br />

1. On the Grading Scales screen in the Scale list, select the grading scale you want to edit.<br />

2. Make the necessary changes.<br />

3. Click Save.<br />

48 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Gradebook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Delete Grading Scales<br />

Grading Setup<br />

You can delete a row(s) in a grading scale or delete the entire grading scale. On the Grading<br />

Scales screen, complete one of the following procedures:<br />

To delete a row(s):<br />

1. In the Scale list, select the grading scale you want to modify.<br />

2. On the Grading Scales screen in the Del? column, click in the row(s) you want to delete.<br />

3. Click Save.<br />

To delete an entire grading scale:<br />

1. In the Scale list, select the grading scale you want to delete.<br />

2. Near the bottom of the screen, click the Delete this scale link.<br />

3. Click OK to confirm.<br />

The Confirm Deletion window closes and returns to the Grading Scales screen.<br />

Confirm Deletion Window for a Grading Scale on the<br />

Grading Scales Screen<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> Gradebook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 49


Grading Setup<br />

This page intentionally left blank.<br />

50 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Gradebook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain Staff Accounts<br />

This chapter defines user roles in GradeBook as well as describes how to create and maintain<br />

staff accounts. For school districts that are integrated with certain student information systems,<br />

most staff account records are imported into GradeBook. For staff accounts that are not imported,<br />

you can create them in GradeBook.<br />

GradeBook User Roles<br />

The following user roles are available to assign to GradeBook users.<br />

• Attendance – Access to student daily and period attendance records in the Absence<br />

Queue, an attendance export to send records to the student information system,<br />

attendance reports, homerooms and period/block codes.<br />

• Cafeteria – Access to update lunch choices and lunch count reports.<br />

• Clerk – Access to all attendance options that the Attendance role can access as well as<br />

report cards: view report card and interim grades by student and the Classic and Beta<br />

ParentAccess user account maintenance and extracts.<br />

• Curriculum Director – Access to lesson plans, lesson plan reports, academic standards<br />

maintenance and grading scales.<br />

• Guidance – Access to student progress reports and viewing student progress on Classic<br />

or Beta ParentAccess.<br />

• Master – Access to the GradeBook Administrator Home Page for the entire district with<br />

edit privileges for all aspects of GradeBook.<br />

• Principal – Access to all clerical options that the Attendance and Clerical roles can<br />

access as well as Classic ParentAccess reports, eligibility reports and student progress<br />

reports. This role can also view student progress on Classic and Beta ParentAccess, as<br />

well as teacher grade book information, including Grade Book Grid, 5 Day Planner,<br />

lesson plan and class progress reports.<br />

• School Administrator – Access to the GradeBook Administrator Home Page for one or<br />

more school buildings to which they are assigned with edit privileges for codes,<br />

calendars, staff, reporting periods, courses, classes, academic standards and possibly<br />

report cards.<br />

• Teacher – Access to GradeBook’s grade book features and Special Services (if it is<br />

enabled) for the classes and students to which they are assigned.<br />

• School Support – Access to homerooms, classes, students and staff in the school<br />

buildings to which they are assigned, as well as all Principal role functionality and limited<br />

Classic and Beta ParentAccess administration.<br />

The following are Classic ParentAccess roles that can also be assigned to GradeBook users in<br />

addition to the previous GradeBook roles:<br />

• District Web Author – Maintains school district’s Web Site content.<br />

• School Web Author – Maintains school building’s Web Site content.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 51


Maintain Staff Accounts<br />

Search for Staff<br />

You can search for any staff member account in GradeBook. It is recommended to enter as much<br />

search criteria as possible to narrow the results returned.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Staff.<br />

2. In the School list, select the appropriate school.<br />

3. Perform any of the following optional steps:<br />

• In the Staff ID field, type the staff member’s identification number.<br />

• In the Last Name field, type the last name or partial last name of the staff member<br />

for whom you are searching.<br />

• In the User ID field, type the staff member’s GradeBook user identification number.<br />

4. Click Go.<br />

Staff Screen<br />

Add Staff<br />

For staff accounts that did not import from your student information system, it may be necessary<br />

to add them in GradeBook.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Staff.<br />

2. On the Staff screen in the Web site banner, click Add Staff.<br />

Add Staff Link on the Staff Screen<br />

3. On the Add Staff window in the Last Name field, enter the staff member’s last name.<br />

4. In the First Name field, enter the staff member’s first name.<br />

5. In the Middle Name field, enter the staff member’s middle name, if applicable.<br />

6. In the Staff ID field, enter the staff member’s identification number.<br />

This ID should follow the district’s coding procedure from the student information system.<br />

7. In the Primary School list, select the building where the staff member primarily works.<br />

52 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain Staff Accounts<br />

Note: Homeroom refers to the homeroom assigned to a teacher in the student<br />

information system and is not an option for nonteaching staff accounts.<br />

8. In the <strong>System</strong> Role list, select the appropriate role. For a description of each role, see<br />

“GradeBook User Roles.”<br />

• Attendance<br />

• Cafeteria<br />

• Clerk<br />

• Curriculum Director<br />

• Guidance<br />

• Master<br />

• Principal<br />

• School Administrator<br />

• Teacher<br />

• School Support<br />

9. In the Parent Access Security area, select the check box for appropriate option.<br />

• School Web Author<br />

• District Web Author<br />

Note: If it is necessary to disable the staff member’s GradeBook user account,<br />

select the Account Disabled? option. The staff member’s information is<br />

maintained in GradeBook; however, they cannot access the system.<br />

10. Click Update.<br />

Main Tab on the Add Staff Window<br />

11. Click Assign User.<br />

12. On the Assign User window, in the Assign column, click the plus sign in the row of the<br />

user name to which you want to link the account.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 53


Maintain Staff Accounts<br />

The Assign User window closes.<br />

Assign User Link on the Update Staff Window<br />

Note: If the user name does not appear on the Assign User window, the user<br />

needs to be added into CentralAdmin. Contact your CentralAdmin administrator to<br />

add the user.<br />

Note: For support personnel who support multiple school districts on the same<br />

server, you can click Add to all districts near the bottom of the window to assign<br />

the staff member with a Master role to all the school districts at once.<br />

Note: If the staff member that has been added has a nonteaching role, then the<br />

Schools tab displays. For a staff member with a teacher role, the Schools tab<br />

displays only if the user is granted a Classic ParentAccess Web Author role as<br />

well.<br />

13. Click the Schools tab.<br />

14. Next to the schools to which the staff member should have access, select the check<br />

boxes.<br />

Note: To select all the schools on the tab, click Select all Schools. To deselect all<br />

the schools, click Remove all Schools.<br />

54 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain Staff Accounts<br />

Assign Schools on the Schools tab on the<br />

Update Staff Window<br />

15. Click Update.<br />

16. Close the Add Staff window.<br />

17. Continue to add staff records, as needed.<br />

Assign a Staff Account in GradeBook to a CentralAdmin User<br />

If you have not already assigned the staff account in GradeBook to a user in CentralAdmin, the<br />

staff member cannot log in to GradeBook.<br />

1. On the Update Staff window, click Assign User.<br />

2. On the Assign User window, in the Assign column, click the plus sign in the row of the<br />

user name to which you want to link the account.<br />

Note: If the user name does not appear on the Assign User window, the user<br />

needs to be added into CentralAdmin. Contact your CentralAdmin administrator to<br />

add the user.<br />

The Assign User window closes.<br />

3. Close the Update Staff window.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 55


Maintain Staff Accounts<br />

Link a User Account in GradeBook<br />

Unlink a Staff Account in GradeBook from a CentralAdmin User<br />

1. On the Update Staff window, click Remove User Link.<br />

2. On the Remove staff-user link message, click Ok.<br />

3. Close the Update Staff window.<br />

Note: The staff account in GradeBook is unlinked from the CentralAdmin user.<br />

Unlink a User Account in GradeBook<br />

56 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain Staff Accounts<br />

Update Staff<br />

1. On the Staff screen, search for the staff member whose information you want to update.<br />

(See “Search for Staff.” )<br />

2. In the row of that staff member, click .<br />

The Update Staff window opens.<br />

3. On the Update Staff window, you can perform any of the following tasks:<br />

• In the fields, modify the information, as needed.<br />

• Edit a user account in GradeBook (See “Edit a Staff Account in GradeBook.” )<br />

Note: In order to edit a user account in GradeBook, you must have the proper<br />

administrative rights in CentralAdmin for the Edit User link to appear on the<br />

Update Staff window.<br />

• Assign a staff account in GradeBook to a CentralAdmin user (See “Assign a Staff<br />

Account in GradeBook to a CentralAdmin User.” )<br />

• Remove a user link in GradeBook from a CentralAdmin user (See “Unlink a Staff<br />

Account in GradeBook from a CentralAdmin User.” )<br />

• Reset a password for a <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Authenticated user (See “Reset a Password<br />

for a <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Authenticated User.” )<br />

Note: In order to reset a password in GradeBook, you must have the proper<br />

administrative rights in CentralAdmin for the Reset Password link to appear on the<br />

Update Staff window.<br />

• Modify Classic ParentAccess Web Author access<br />

• Transfer staff member’s activity (See “Reset a Password for a <strong>ProgressBook</strong><br />

Authenticated User.” )<br />

• Delete staff members (See “Delete Staff.” )<br />

Note: If the staff member you want to delete has a master role and has been<br />

assigned access to multiple school buildings, you can click Delete from all districts<br />

near the bottom of the window to delete the staff member from all the school<br />

districts at once.<br />

4. Click Update.<br />

5. Close the Update Staff window.<br />

Edit Staff Icon on the Staff Screen<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 57


Maintain Staff Accounts<br />

Note: To view the changes, refresh the Staff screen.<br />

Edit a Staff Account in GradeBook<br />

Note: In order to edit a staff account in GradeBook, you must have the proper<br />

administrative rights in CentralAdmin for the Edit User link to appear on the<br />

Update Staff window.<br />

1. On the Update Staff window, click Edit User.<br />

2. On the Central Edit Account - “Name of User” screen, enter your changes.<br />

Note: See <strong>ProgressBook</strong> CentralAdmin User <strong>Guide</strong> for more information.<br />

3. Click Save.<br />

4. On the Confirm window, click Yes.<br />

The Update Staff window displays in GradeBook.<br />

5. Close the Update Staff window.<br />

58 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain Staff Accounts<br />

Edit a Staff Account in GradeBook<br />

Reset a Password for a <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Authenticated User<br />

Note: In order to reset an authenticated <strong>ProgressBook</strong> user’s password in<br />

GradeBook, you must have the proper administrative rights in CentralAdmin for<br />

the Reset Password link to appear on the Update Staff window.<br />

1. On the Update Staff window, click Reset Password.<br />

2. On Central’s Reset Password screen, in the New Password field, enter the new password.<br />

3. In the Confirm New Password field, re-enter the new password.<br />

4. For the Force Password Change option, select one of the following:<br />

• Yes - Requires the user to change his/her password after login<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 59


Maintain Staff Accounts<br />

• No - Does not require the user to change his/her password after login<br />

Note: See “<strong>ProgressBook</strong> CentralAdmin User <strong>Guide</strong>” for more information.<br />

5. Click Reset Password.<br />

The Update Staff window displays in GradeBook.<br />

6. Close the Update Staff window.<br />

Reset a Password<br />

Transfer Staff Activity<br />

You can transfer classes, lesson plan banks, assignment banks, homework banks and<br />

SpecialServices banks that are associated with one staff record to another staff record.<br />

Transferring changes ownership of activities to the new staff record. Once the transfer is<br />

complete, the activities are no longer associated with the original staff record.<br />

To delete a staff record that has classes and associated activities, you must transfer the activities<br />

to another staff record first before you delete them. “Warning: Delete requires transfer” displays<br />

on the Update Staff window for a staff record if there are activities in use that must be transferred.<br />

GradeBook checks staff records for the following associated activities:<br />

• Classes<br />

• Assignments<br />

• Assignment types<br />

• Homework<br />

• Lesson plans<br />

• Classic and Beta ParentAccess home pages<br />

• Special Services banks<br />

• Special Services forms<br />

60 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain Staff Accounts<br />

Staff member records with associated SpecialServices forms can be deleted in GradeBook, and<br />

staff member records with associated SpecialServices user banks can also be deleted without first<br />

transferring bank information. The user’s name, date and time are stored in the<br />

SpSStudentFinalizedGroupAudit and StudentFormAudit tables even after a staff record has been<br />

deleted.<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system, it is recommended to transfer<br />

activities in GradeBook before making schedule changes in the student information system.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Staff.<br />

2. On the Staff screen, search for the staff member in which you want to transfer activities.<br />

See “Search for Staff.”<br />

3. In the row of the staff member in which you want to transfer activities, click .<br />

4. On the Update Staff window, click the Transfer Activity link.<br />

5. On the Transfer Staff Activity window in the School list, select the school where the staff<br />

member to whom you are transferring information is located.<br />

6. In the Staff list, select the staff member to whom you are transferring information.<br />

In the Select activity to transfer area, the activity and the number of instances of each type<br />

of activity that is associated with the staff member is highlighted.<br />

7. Under the Select activity to transfer area, select the check boxes of the types of activities<br />

to transfer.<br />

8. Click Transfer.<br />

The message “Transfer of staff activity complete” displays when the transfer of information<br />

is complete.<br />

Transfer Staff Activity Window<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 61


Maintain Staff Accounts<br />

9. Close the Transfer Staff Activity window.<br />

10. On the Update Staff window, proceed to delete the staff member, if necessary.<br />

Delete Staff<br />

Before you delete a staff record, you should transfer any associated activities to another staff<br />

record first. “Warning: Delete requires transfer” displays on the Update Staff window for a staff<br />

record if there is information in use that must be transferred. GradeBook checks staff records for<br />

the following associated information:<br />

• Classes<br />

• Assignments<br />

• Assignment types<br />

• Lesson plans<br />

• Homework<br />

• Classic and Beta ParentAccess home pages<br />

• Special Services banks<br />

• Special Services forms<br />

Staff member records with associated SpecialServices forms can be deleted in GradeBook, and<br />

staff member records with associated SpecialServices user banks can also be deleted without first<br />

transferring bank information. The user’s name, date and time are stored in the<br />

SpSStudentFinalizedGroupAudit and StudentFormAudit tables even after a staff record has been<br />

deleted.<br />

62 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain Staff Accounts<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Staff.<br />

2. On the Staff screen, search for the staff member you want to delete. See “Search for<br />

Staff.”<br />

3. In the row of that staff member you want to delete, click .<br />

4. On the Update Staff window, click the X Delete link.<br />

If there is information such as lesson plans or assignments in use by the staff member, the<br />

following message displays, "This staff member can not be deleted for the following<br />

reasons: Assigned to XX classes, XX assignments in use, XX assignment types in use,<br />

XX lesson plans in use."<br />

5. To close the message window, click OK, and then proceed to transfer the staff activity.<br />

6. If you do not want to transfer activity, click the X Delete link.<br />

The message, “User has been deleted” displays.<br />

Delete Confirmation Message on the Update Staff<br />

Window<br />

Note: For support personnel who support multiple school districts on the same<br />

server, you can click Delete from all districts near the bottom of the window to<br />

delete the staff member with a Master role from all districts at once.<br />

Note: To view the changes, refresh the Staff screen.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 63


Maintain Staff Accounts<br />

Help a Teacher<br />

Users with master, school administrator and school support privileges can access any teacher’s<br />

grade book to help them as needed. When you help a teacher in this manner, you cannot do<br />

certain tasks for the teacher because they are associated with the login that created them. For<br />

example, do not group classes together, edit the class list or create assignment types for the<br />

teacher because these will be associated with your account and not the teacher’s account.<br />

You can assist a teacher with running Report Builder reports from the Teacher Home Page and<br />

Class Dashboard. The Run as list includes the user helping the teacher as well as the user being<br />

helped. On the Teacher Home Page, the default option in the list is the current user. On the Class<br />

Dashboard, the default option in the list is the primary teacher of the class. If there is no primary<br />

teacher for the class, the first additional teacher displays in the list. Once you have selected the<br />

teacher to help in the Run as list, the reports to which the teacher has access display in the list of<br />

reports.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Staff.<br />

2. On the Staff screen, search for the teacher whom you want to help.<br />

a. In the School list, select the appropriate school, and then click Go.<br />

A list of all the staff members in the entire school displays if you do not enter any<br />

information in the Staff ID, Last Name or User ID fields.<br />

b. To narrow the search results, perform any of the following optional steps:<br />

• In the Staff ID field, type the teacher's identification number.<br />

• In the Last Name field, type the full or partial last name of the teacher for whom<br />

you are searching.<br />

• In the User ID field, type the teacher’s GradeBook user ID.<br />

A list of staff members displays matching the search criteria entered.<br />

3. In the Help column, click the check box of the staff member you want to help.<br />

Note: It is not recommended to help more than one teacher at a time. If you do,<br />

you will be in both of the teachers’ grade books simultaneously. Make sure to exit<br />

the current teacher’s grade book before helping another teacher. If you forget the<br />

teacher you are helping, log out of GradeBook and log back in.<br />

Help Column on the Staff Screen<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

5. At the top of the screen, click the Grade Book link.<br />

The teacher’s classes display on the Teacher Home Page.<br />

64 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain Staff Accounts<br />

Grade Book Link on the Web Site Banner<br />

6. Proceed to help the teacher, as needed.<br />

a. To run Report Builder reports, in the Run as list, select the teacher whom you want to<br />

help.<br />

The reports to which the teacher has access display in the list of reports.<br />

b. Select the appropriate report, and then click Run.<br />

Select a Report List on the Teacher<br />

Home Page<br />

7. To exit the teacher’s grade book, at the top of the screen, click the Home link.<br />

8. On the Administrator Home Page, click Staff.<br />

9. Search for the teacher you were helping.<br />

10. In the Help column, deselect the check box of that staff member, so you are no longer<br />

logged into their account.<br />

11. Click Save.<br />

Deselect the Help Column on the Staff Screen<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 65


Maintain Staff Accounts<br />

This page intentionally left blank.<br />

66 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain District<br />

This chapter describes how to enter and maintain your district information in GradeBook, so<br />

homerooms, courses, classes and scheduling are set up properly. If you are integrated with a<br />

student information system, most scheduling is done in that system and imported into GradeBook.<br />

However, there may be cases where you want to create additional courses and classes directly in<br />

GradeBook. In addition, there are additional settings within GradeBook that you may wish to<br />

adjust on imported classes, such as marking study halls as nongraded classes.<br />

Add Rooms<br />

Rooms are used in setting up homerooms and classes.<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system, rooms are imported into<br />

GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you should make them in the student<br />

information system.<br />

If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you must set up room<br />

lists for each school during the initial GradeBook setup.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, select Rooms.<br />

2. On the Rooms screen in the School list, select the appropriate school building.<br />

3. In the Room column, click in an empty field, and enter the room name or number.<br />

4. In the Description field, enter a brief description of the room.<br />

Note: The maximum amount of characters is 50 for the Description field.<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

6. To continue adding rooms, repeat step 2 through step 5.<br />

Rooms Screen<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 67


Maintain District<br />

Delete Rooms<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system, rooms are imported into<br />

GradeBook from that system. Any changes to rooms should be made in the student information<br />

system.<br />

If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you can make changes<br />

to rooms, as needed.<br />

You cannot delete a room if it is associated with a class or homeroom. You must first change the<br />

room references in the class or homeroom before you are able to delete the room in GradeBook.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Grading Setup, click Rooms.<br />

2. On the Rooms screen in the School list, select the appropriate school building.<br />

3. In the Del? column, click the check box of the room you want to delete.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

The room is deleted and does not display on the Rooms screen.<br />

Note: If you try to delete a room that is being used in a class or homeroom, the<br />

following error displays, “Errors occurred during the save.”<br />

Set Up Homerooms<br />

For schools that are not integrated with a student information system, you can set up homerooms<br />

as needed and schedule the teachers and students accordingly.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Homerooms.<br />

2. On the HomeRooms screen in the School list, select the appropriate school building.<br />

3. On the HomeRooms screen, click the Add Homerooms link.<br />

Add Homerooms Link on the HomeRooms Screen<br />

4. On the Room Search window in the Select column, click the check box(es) next to the<br />

homeroom(s) you want to add.<br />

5. Click Add the selected rooms.<br />

68 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain District<br />

Room Search Window<br />

6. Close the Room Search window.<br />

The selected homeroom(s) display on the Homerooms screen.<br />

Add Teachers to Homerooms<br />

1. On the HomeRooms screen in the Add Teachers column, click the Add link for the<br />

homeroom to which you want to add a teacher.<br />

2. On the Staff Search window in the Last Name field, enter the full or partial last name of<br />

the teacher for whom you are searching.<br />

3. Click Go.<br />

A list of teachers that matches the search criteria entered displays.<br />

4. In the Select column, click the check box for the teacher(s) you want to add.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 69


Maintain District<br />

.<br />

Staff Search Window<br />

5. Click Update.<br />

6. Close the Staff Search window.<br />

The teacher(s) you added displays in the Teachers column.<br />

Note: Homerooms are used for daily attendance and lunch count purposes. They<br />

do not display in the class list on the Teacher Home Page but can be selected<br />

when in the Daily Attendance and Lunch Count screens.<br />

Teacher Column on the HomeRooms Screen<br />

Remove Teachers from Homerooms<br />

1. On the HomeRooms screen in the Teachers column, click the Remove link for the<br />

homeroom from which you want to remove a teacher.<br />

2. Click OK on the Confirmation window.<br />

The teacher is removed from the homeroom and does not display in the Teachers column.<br />

70 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Add Students to Homeroom Roster<br />

Maintain District<br />

1. On the HomeRooms screen in the View Students column, click the View link for the<br />

homeroom to which you want to add students.<br />

2. On the Homeroom Roster screen, click the Add Students link.<br />

3. On the Students Search screen, search for the student(s) whom you want to add to the<br />

homeroom roster.<br />

a. In the School list, select the appropriate school building.<br />

b. Click Go.<br />

A list of all the students in the entire school displays if you do not enter any<br />

information in the Grade, HR or Last Name fields.<br />

c. To narrow the search results, perform any of the following optional steps:<br />

• In the Grade list, select the appropriate grade level.<br />

• In the HR list, select the appropriate homeroom.<br />

• In the Last Name field, type the full or partial last name of the student for whom<br />

you are searching.<br />

A list of students that matches the search criteria entered displays.<br />

4. In the Select column, click the check box next to the student(s) you want to add to the<br />

homeroom roster.<br />

Note: You can click Select All to select all the students in the list.<br />

Student Search Window<br />

5. Click Add the selected students to the roster.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 71


Maintain District<br />

6. Close the Students Search screen.<br />

The students added display on the Homeroom Roster screen.<br />

7. On the Homeroom Roster screen in the Web site banner, click the Back to the<br />

Homeroom List link to return to the HomeRooms screen.<br />

Remove Students from Homeroom Roster<br />

1. On the Homerooms screen in the View Students column, click the View link for the<br />

homeroom from which you want to remove students.<br />

2. On the Homeroom Roster screen in the Remove? column, click the check box for the<br />

student(s) whom you want to remove from the homeroom roster.<br />

Remove? Column on the Homeroom Roster Screen<br />

3. Click Remove the selected students from the homeroom.<br />

The students are removed from the homeroom roster and do not display on the Homeroom<br />

Roster screen.<br />

4. On the Homeroom Roster screen in the Web site banner, click the Back to the<br />

Homeroom List link to return to the HomeRooms screen.<br />

Set Required Homerooms for Daily Attendance<br />

Attendance personnel can designate the homerooms and/or classes in which daily attendance<br />

should be taken. This ensures that teachers only take daily or homeroom attendance in the proper<br />

class.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page, click the Principal link in the banner at the top of the<br />

screen.<br />

2. On the Principal Home Page under Attendance, click Set Required Homerooms For<br />

Homeroom Attendance.<br />

3. On the Set Up Required Homerooms screen, search for the homeroom in which daily<br />

attendance should be taken.<br />

a. In the School list, select the appropriate school building.<br />

72 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain District<br />

b. Click Search.<br />

A list of all the homerooms in the entire school displays if you do not enter any<br />

information in the HR or Last Name fields.<br />

c. To narrow the search results, perform any of the following optional steps:<br />

• In the HR field, type the full or partial name of the class.<br />

• In the Last Name field, type the full or partial last name of the teacher assigned<br />

to the homeroom.<br />

d. To designate how the list of results should be sorted, in the Sort By list, select one of<br />

the following options:<br />

• Homeroom<br />

• Last Name<br />

• Period<br />

4. All homerooms and classes are selected by default. You may want to click Deselect All<br />

to clear all the selected classes, and then in the Select column, click the check box for the<br />

specific class in which homeroom attendance should be taken.<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

Set Up Required Homerooms Screen<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 73


Maintain District<br />

Add Courses<br />

In GradeBook, courses are broad subject areas for which classes are taught, such as Language<br />

Arts or Biology. All classes are associated with a course, so you must set up courses before you<br />

can create classes. It may be necessary to create courses and/or classes for some teachers, even<br />

if your school district is integrated with a student information system. For example, you may create<br />

unique classes for special education teachers with the students they are working with in order to<br />

give the teacher access to the student progress reports and the ability to create forms in<br />

SpecialServices. Also, coaches may need classes with their team members in order to monitor<br />

academic eligibility.<br />

Generally, if your school district is integrated with a student information system, courses are<br />

imported into GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you should make them in<br />

that system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information system or scheduling<br />

for your building is not done through your student information system, you can add courses as<br />

needed.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Courses.<br />

2. On the Courses screen, click the Add a Course link.<br />

Add a Course Link on the Courses Screen<br />

3. On the Add a Course window in the School list, select the school building in which this<br />

course is taught, if necessary.<br />

4. In the District Course ID field, enter the unique identification number assigned to the<br />

course.<br />

Note: If your school does not integrate with a student information system, the<br />

District Course ID is optional.<br />

5. In the Course Name field, enter a descriptive name.<br />

6. In the Course Short Name field, enter a shorter name for the course, if desired.<br />

7. In the Course Abbreviation field, enter an abbreviated name, if desired.<br />

74 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain District<br />

Add a Course Window<br />

Note: If your school does not integrate with a student information system, the<br />

Course Short Name and Course Abbreviation fields are optional.<br />

8. If the course is a nongraded course, for example study hall, in the Ungraded? area, click<br />

the check box.<br />

9. If you do not want the course to be displayed on Classic or Beta ParentAccess, in the<br />

Exclude from Parent Access area, click the check box.<br />

Note: Your school may use a course called Study Habits for report card<br />

purposes; however, you may not want to display the course on Classic or Beta<br />

ParentAccess.<br />

10. If teachers are permitted to update the class roster for these courses, in the Allow Teacher<br />

Roster Updates area, click the check box.<br />

Note: If you select this option, the Add Students link displays on the Class Roster<br />

screen.<br />

11. If you created this course within GradeBook and you do not want the course deleted during<br />

rollover, select the option Retain During Rollover?.<br />

12. In the Course Grade Level(s) area, select all check boxes for the grade levels to which<br />

the course is assigned.<br />

13. Click Update.<br />

14. To continue adding courses, click the Add a New Course link, and repeat step 3 through<br />

step 13.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 75


Maintain District<br />

Update Courses<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system, courses are imported into<br />

GradeBook from that system. Any changes to courses should be made in the student information<br />

system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you can make<br />

changes to courses as needed.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Courses.<br />

2. On the Courses screen, search for the course that you want to edit.<br />

a. You must enter information in at least one of the following search fields:<br />

• In the School list, select the appropriate school building.<br />

• In the District Course ID field, type the course district identification number.<br />

• In the Course Name field, type the full name or partial name of the course for<br />

which you are searching.<br />

b. In the banner, select the check box for the Courses With No Classes option, if<br />

desired, to limit search results to only courses that do not have associated classes.<br />

Note: If you do not select this option, search results include both courses with and<br />

without associated classes.<br />

c. Click Go.<br />

A list of courses matching the search criteria entered displays. If no search results are<br />

returned, the message “No Matches Found” displays.<br />

3. Next to the course you want to edit, click .<br />

Courses Screen<br />

4. On the Update Course window, you can change the course name, short name,<br />

abbreviation and grade levels.<br />

5. You can also change any of the following options:<br />

• Ungraded – Course does not use marks or grades as in study hall or lunch.<br />

• Exclude from Parent Access – Prevents the course from appearing on Classic or<br />

Beta ParentAccess.<br />

• Allow Teacher Roster Updates – Provides teacher with the ability to add students to<br />

their class roster for this course only.<br />

• Retain During Rollover – Prevents the course from being deleted during rollover.<br />

76 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Note: If you select the Allow Teacher Roster Updates option, the Add Students<br />

link displays on the Class Roster screen.<br />

6. Click Update.<br />

7. Close the Update Course window.<br />

Maintain District<br />

Update Course Window<br />

Allow Teachers to Update Course Roster<br />

You can allow teachers to update course rosters individually by course.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Courses.<br />

2. On the Courses screen, search for the course.<br />

a. You must enter information in at least one of the following search fields:<br />

• In the School list, select the appropriate school building.<br />

• In the District Course ID field, type the course district identification number.<br />

• In the Course Name field, type the full name or partial name of the course for<br />

which you are searching.<br />

b. To limit search results to only courses that do not have associated classes, in the<br />

banner, select the check box for the Courses With No Classes option, if desired.<br />

If you do not select this option, search results include both courses with and without<br />

associated classes.<br />

c. Click Go.<br />

A list of courses matching the search criteria entered displays. If no search results are<br />

returned, the message “No Matches Found” displays.<br />

3. In the row of the course you want to allow teachers to add students to their rosters, click<br />

.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 77


Maintain District<br />

Edit Course Icon on the Courses Screen<br />

4. On the Update Course window, select the check box to Allow Teacher Roster Updates?<br />

option.<br />

5. Click Update.<br />

6. Close the Update Course window.<br />

Allow Teacher Roster Updates? Option on the<br />

Update Courses Window<br />

Note: The Add Students link displays on the Class Roster screen for any classes<br />

associated with this course.<br />

Delete Courses<br />

You can delete a course only if it does not have classes associated with it.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Courses.<br />

2. On the Courses screen, search for the course that you want to delete.<br />

78 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain District<br />

a. You must enter information in at least one of the following search fields:<br />

• In the School list, select the appropriate school building.<br />

• In the District Course ID field, type the course district identification number.<br />

• In the Course Name field, type the full name or partial name of the course for<br />

which you are searching.<br />

b. To limit search results to only courses that do not have associated classes, in the<br />

banner, select the check box for the Courses With No Classes option, if desired.<br />

If you do not select this option, search results include both courses with and without<br />

associated classes.<br />

c. Click Go.<br />

A list of courses matching the search criteria entered displays. If no search results are<br />

returned, the message “No Matches Found” displays. If courses that do not have<br />

associated classes are returned, check boxes do not display in the Del? column, and<br />

a hover tip describes why the course cannot be deleted. The Save button does not<br />

display on the screen if only courses that cannot be deleted display.<br />

3. In the Del? column, select the check box for the course you want to delete.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

5. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.<br />

Note: To delete all the courses in the list at once, select the check box in the Del?<br />

column header row.<br />

Note: Deleting a course that is associated with a standards-based report card<br />

also deletes it from the report card. The report card does not need to be<br />

recompiled because the course was deleted.<br />

Hover Tip in the Del? Column on the Courses Screen<br />

Add Classes<br />

Classes are associated with courses, so courses must be set up prior to adding classes.<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system, classes are imported into<br />

GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you should make them in that system. If<br />

your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you can add classes as<br />

needed.<br />

It may be necessary to create classes for some teachers, even if your school district is integrated<br />

with a student information system. For example, you may create unique classes for special<br />

education teachers with the students they are working with in order to give the teacher access to<br />

the student progress reports and the ability to create forms in SpecialServices. Also, coaches may<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 79


Maintain District<br />

need classes created with their team members in order to monitor academic eligibility.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Classes.<br />

2. On the Classes screen, click the Add a Class link.<br />

Add a Class Link on the Classes Screen<br />

3. On the Add a Class window, click the Pick a Course link.<br />

Pick a Course Link on the Add a Class Window<br />

4. On the Course Lookup window in the Grade Level list, select the appropriate grade level.<br />

Course Lookup Window<br />

5. Select the Course Name to which the class should be associated.<br />

6. On the Add a Class window in the School list, select the appropriate school building<br />

where the class is held.<br />

7. In the Section field, enter a unique section number for the class, for example, the<br />

teacher's last name.<br />

8. In the District Class ID field, enter a unique district class identification number for the<br />

class.<br />

Note: If your school district is not integrated with a student information system,<br />

the Section and District Class ID fields are optional. A unique class ID number will<br />

80 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


e created by the system if you do not specify one; however, the section field will<br />

remain blank if you do not enter one.<br />

Maintain District<br />

9. Click Update.<br />

The Staff, Rpt Periods and Roster tabs display.<br />

10. Proceed to perform the following tasks:<br />

• Add staff to this class. See “Add Staff to Classes.”<br />

• Schedule this class. See “Update Classes.” See “Schedule Classes.”<br />

• Add students to this class. See “Add Students to Classes.” See “Delete Rooms.”<br />

See “Add Students to Classes.”<br />

Main Tab on Update Class Window<br />

Add Staff to Classes<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system, classes with teachers are<br />

imported into GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you should make them in<br />

that system. Even if your school district is integrated with a student information system, it may be<br />

necessary at times to add or modify the staff members who have access to a class. For example,<br />

special education teachers or substitutes may need access to classes primarily taught by another<br />

teacher. You must assign a staff member to a class, so it appears in the teacher’s grade book.<br />

If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you can add staff as<br />

needed.<br />

1. On the Update Class window, click the Staff tab.<br />

2. On the Staff tab at the bottom of the window, click the Add Staff Members link.<br />

The Staff Search window displays.<br />

3. On the Staff Search window, search for the staff member whom you want to add to the<br />

class.<br />

a. In the School list, select the appropriate school building.<br />

b. In the Last Name field, type the full or partial last name of the staff member for<br />

whom you are searching.<br />

c. Click Go.<br />

A list of staff members displays that matches the search criteria entered.<br />

4. In the Select column, click the check box of the staff member you want to add to this class.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 81


Maintain District<br />

Select the Staff Member on the Staff Search Window<br />

Note: You can click Select All to select all the teachers in the list. Click De-Select<br />

All to clear all the check boxes.<br />

5. Click Update.<br />

6. Close the Staff Search window.<br />

7. On the Update Class window in the Role list, select one of the following options:<br />

• Primary – Main teacher assigned to this class.<br />

• Additional – Able to perform the same tasks as the primary teacher.<br />

• Substitute – Able to perform the same tasks as the Additional role except for creating<br />

recurring assignments, setting up grade book access and updating the class roster.<br />

Note: GradeBook grants access to the grade book for a calendar year. You may<br />

select a different time period, as needed.<br />

8. In the Start field, click to select the date to begin access to your grade book, or in the<br />

Start field, type the date.<br />

9. In the End field, click to select the date to begin access to your grade book, or in the<br />

End field, type the date.<br />

10. Click Update.<br />

82 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain District<br />

Staff Tab on the Update Class Window<br />

11. To add additional staff members, repeat step 2 through step 10, if necessary.<br />

12. Proceed to perform the following tasks:<br />

• Schedule this class.<br />

• Add students to this class. See “Add Students to Classes.” See “Add Students to<br />

Classes.” See “Add Students to Classes.”<br />

Schedule Classes<br />

To schedule a class, you will add the appropriate reporting periods in which the class meets and<br />

then select the appropriate cycle days and periods/blocks. You must set up the schedule for a<br />

class, so the teacher is able to add assignments to the grade book. Also, by selecting the days<br />

the class meets in each reporting period, recurring assignments will only occur on valid meeting<br />

days.<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system, reporting periods are<br />

imported into GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you should make them in<br />

that system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you can add<br />

reporting periods, as needed.<br />

1. On the Update Class window, click the Rpt Periods tab.<br />

2. On the Rprt Periods tab, click the Add Reporting Periods link.<br />

3. On the Reporting Period Search window, click the check box next to each reporting period<br />

in which the class is taught.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 83


Maintain District<br />

4. Click Update.<br />

The selected reporting periods display.<br />

Reporting Period Search Window<br />

Rpt Periods Tab on the Update Class Window<br />

5. In the Meeting Times column, click the Edit link for the reporting period in which you want<br />

to schedule the class.<br />

6. Select or deselect the appropriate cycle day and appropriate period/block in which the<br />

class meets.<br />

84 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain District<br />

Select Block and Cycle Days on the Update Class Window<br />

Note: You can click Apply these settings to all periods to apply the cycle day and<br />

period/block combinations to all the reporting periods at once, if desired.<br />

7. Click Save.<br />

8. Close the Cycle Days and Period/Block window.<br />

9. In the Room list, select the appropriate room in which this class meets for each reporting<br />

period.<br />

10. Click Update.<br />

Meeting Times Column on the Rpt Periods tab on the Update<br />

Class Window<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 85


Maintain District<br />

11. Proceed to perform the following tasks:<br />

• Add staff to this class. See “Add Staff to Classes.”<br />

• Add students to this class.<br />

Add Students to Classes<br />

You must add a student to a class in order for the student to display on the class roster in a<br />

teacher's grade book.<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system, students are imported into<br />

GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you should make them in that system. If<br />

your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you can add students as<br />

needed.<br />

1. On the Update Class window, select the Roster tab.<br />

2. On the Roster tab, click the Add Students link.<br />

Add Students Link on the Roster Tab on the Update Class<br />

Window<br />

3. On the Student Search window, search for the student you want to add.<br />

a. In the School list, select the appropriate school building.<br />

b. Click Go.<br />

A list of all the students in the entire school displays if you do not enter any<br />

information in the Grade, HR or Last Name fields.<br />

c. To narrow the search results, perform any of the following optional steps:<br />

• In the Grade list, select the appropriate grade.<br />

• In the HR list, select the appropriate homeroom.<br />

• In the Last Name field, type the full or partial last name of the student for whom<br />

you are searching.<br />

4. In the Select column, click the check box for the student(s) you want to add.<br />

86 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Note: You can click Select All to select all the students in the list. Click De-Select<br />

All to clear all the check boxes.<br />

5. Click Add the selected students to the roster.<br />

Maintain District<br />

6. Close the Student Search window.<br />

7. Close the Update Class window.<br />

Student Search Window<br />

Update Classes<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system, classes are imported into<br />

GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you should make them in the student<br />

information system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you<br />

can make changes to classes, as needed.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Classes.<br />

2. On the Classes screen, search for the class that you want to update.<br />

a. You must enter information in at least one of the following search fields:<br />

• In the School list, select the appropriate school building.<br />

• In the Teacher Last Name field, type the full or partial last name of the teacher<br />

associated with the class for which you are searching.<br />

• In the Course field, type the full or partial name of the course with which the class<br />

is associated.<br />

b. To limit search results to only classes that do not have students enrolled in the<br />

banner, Select the Classes With No Students option check box, if desired.<br />

If you do not select this option, search results include both classes with and without<br />

students enrolled.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 87


Maintain District<br />

c. Click Go.<br />

A list of classes displays matching the search criteria entered. If no search results are<br />

returned, the message "No Matches Found" displays.<br />

3. Next to the class you want to edit, click .<br />

Edit Class Icon on the Classes Screen<br />

4. On the Update Class screen, you can perform any of the following options:<br />

• Update the main class information.<br />

• Edit the section name.<br />

• To delete the class, click the Delete link, and then on the Confirmation window,<br />

click OK.<br />

Delete Link on the Main Tab on Update Class Window<br />

Note: If you try to delete a class that is being used by the district, the following<br />

error displays, “The data can not be deleted at this time.”<br />

88 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain District<br />

• Modify staff access to the class. See “Add Staff to Classes.”<br />

• Change a teacher's role.<br />

• Change the start or end dates for access to the class.<br />

• To remove a staff member, in the Del? column, click the check box for the staff<br />

member you wish to remove, and then click Update.<br />

• Add new staff to the class.<br />

Role Column on the Staff Tab on the Update Class<br />

Window<br />

• Modify class schedule.<br />

• Add reporting periods.<br />

• Change the meeting days, if necessary, to reflect the days on which the class<br />

meets for each reporting period.<br />

• Assign the room in which the class meets for each reporting period.<br />

• Delete reporting periods.<br />

• Modify students in the class.<br />

• Add students to a class roster.<br />

• Delete students from a class roster.<br />

5. Close the Update Class window.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 89


Maintain District<br />

Modify Class Schedule<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system, class scheduling should be<br />

modified in that system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information system,<br />

proceed to delete reporting periods from classes by performing the following procedure.<br />

If reporting periods are deleted from a class in the student information system but remain in<br />

GradeBook and cannot be deleted on the Update Class window, there may be grades or other<br />

data associated with them in GradeBook. It may be necessary to make the changes directly in the<br />

database tables. If you are not familiar with working with the database tables, contact your<br />

appropriate GradeBook support channel for further assistance.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Classes.<br />

2. On the Classes screen, search for the class for which you want to modify the schedule.<br />

a. In the School list, select the appropriate school building.<br />

b. Click Go.<br />

A list of all the classes in the entire school displays if you do not enter any information<br />

in the Teacher Last Name or Course fields.<br />

c. To narrow the search results, perform any of the following optional steps:<br />

• In the Teacher Last Name field, type the teacher's full or partial last name.<br />

• In the Course field, type the course name.<br />

A list of classes that matches your search criteria displays.<br />

3. Next to the class in which you want to change the schedule, click .<br />

4. On the Update Class window, click the Rpt Periods tab.<br />

5. To modify the class schedule, you can perform any of the following options:<br />

• Modify the class meetings times:<br />

a. In the Meeting Times column, click the Edit link next to the cycle day -<br />

period/block combination you want to modify.<br />

b. Select or deselect the appropriate cycle day and the appropriate block in which<br />

the class meets.<br />

90 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain District<br />

Modify the Block and Cycle Days on the Update Class Window<br />

Note: You can click Apply these settings to all periods to apply the cycle day and<br />

period/block combinations to all the reporting periods at once, if desired.<br />

c. Click Save.<br />

d. Close the Cycle Days and Period/Block window.<br />

• To change the room in which the class meets in the Room list, select a different<br />

room.<br />

• To remove the reporting period from the class schedule in the Del? column, click the<br />

check box of the reporting period(s) you want to remove from the class schedule.<br />

Room Column on the Rpt Periods Tab on the Update Class<br />

Window<br />

6. Click Update.<br />

7. Close the Update Class window.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 91


Maintain District<br />

Delete Students from Class Roster<br />

Deleting a student from a class will remove them from the teacher's class roster. Deleting a<br />

student from this screen will not display a red W in the teacher's class list. Also, if data exists in<br />

the class for the student being removed, they cannot be deleted from the class roster.<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system, classes are imported into<br />

GradeBook from that system. Any changes to classes should be made in the student information<br />

system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you can make<br />

changes to classes, as needed.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Classes.<br />

2. On the Classes screen, search for the class that includes the student you want to remove.<br />

a. You must enter information in at least one of the following search fields:<br />

• In the School list, select the appropriate school building.<br />

• In the Teacher Last Name field, type the teacher’s full or partial last name of the<br />

teacher associated with the class for which you are searching.<br />

• In the Course field, type the full or partial course name with which the class is<br />

associated.<br />

b. Click Go.<br />

3. Next to the class that includes the student you want to remove, click .<br />

4. On the Update Class window, click the Roster tab.<br />

5. In the Del? column, click the check box next to the student(s) you want to remove.<br />

Del? Column on the Roster Tab on the Update Class Window<br />

92 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain District<br />

6. Click the Delete the selected students from the roster link.<br />

The student(s) are deleted and no longer display on the Roster tab.<br />

Note: To quickly remove all students in the class, click Select All, and then click<br />

the Delete the selected students from the roster link to remove the selected<br />

students from the roster.<br />

Delete Classes<br />

You can delete a class only if there is no grade book activity, such as assignments and lesson<br />

plans, etc., associated with it.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Grading Setup, click Classes.<br />

2. On the Classes screen, search for the class that you want to delete.<br />

a. You must enter information in at least one of the following search fields:<br />

• In the School list, select the appropriate school building.<br />

• In the Teacher Last Name field, type the full or partial name of the teacher<br />

associated with the class for which you are searching.<br />

• In the Course field, type the full or partial course name with which the class is<br />

associated.<br />

b. To limit search results to only classes that do not have students enrolled, select<br />

check box for the Classes With No Students option in the banner, if desired.<br />

If you do not select this option, search results include both classes with and without<br />

students enrolled.<br />

c. Click Go.<br />

A list of classes displays matching the search criteria entered. If no search results are<br />

returned, the message “No Matches Found” displays. If classes that do not have<br />

grade book activity are returned, check boxes do not display in the Del? column, and<br />

a hover tip describes why the class cannot be deleted. The Save button does not<br />

display on the screen if only classes that cannot be deleted display.<br />

3. In the Del? column, select the check box for the class you want to delete.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

5. To confirm the deletion, click Yes.<br />

Note: To delete all the classes in the list at once, select the check box in the Del?<br />

column header row.<br />

Hover Tip in the Del? Column on the Classes Screen<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 93


Maintain District<br />

Update Lunch Choices<br />

Lunch choices are general categories that do not change through the year. These categories may<br />

vary by building, depending on what counts are required to be reported. Lunch choices can be<br />

updated by each building by users with Principal or Clerical roles.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, click Lunches.<br />

2. On the Lunch Choices screen in the School list, select the appropriate school building.<br />

3. You can perform any of the following options:<br />

• To add a new lunch item, in the Lunch Choice column, type the name of the item on<br />

the next available row.<br />

• To edit an existing lunch item, change the lunch item, as needed.<br />

• To delete an existing lunch item, in the Del? column, click the check box next to the<br />

item.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

Note: You cannot delete a lunch choice that has a lunch count associated with it.<br />

Lunch Choices Screen<br />

Maintain Period/Block Codes<br />

Period/Block codes represent the periods or blocks that make up a school day and are used in<br />

period attendance and student scheduling. School districts integrated with a student information<br />

system must enter this information. You can modify period/block information, as needed.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Period/Block<br />

Codes.<br />

2. On the Period/Block Codes screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes.<br />

3. You can perform any of the following options:<br />

• Add codes to the list.<br />

• To delete codes from the list, in the Del column, click the check box next to the code<br />

(s) you want to remove from the list, and then click Save.<br />

• Copy the list to a new list.<br />

94 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Note: The class that displays on the Period Attendance screen when it is<br />

accessed from the Teacher Home Page is the class that is meeting based on the<br />

current time of day and appropriately configured period/block code start times and<br />

durations. If both the start times and durations are not set up, the first class listed<br />

on the Teacher Home Page displays by default on the Period Attendance screen<br />

when it is accessed from the Teacher Home Page.<br />

Maintain District<br />

Period/Block Codes Screen<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 95


Maintain District<br />

This page intentionally left blank.<br />

96 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain Students<br />

This chapter describes the setup and maintenance of student-related named codes and how<br />

those named codes are used to set up and maintain student information in your GradeBook<br />

system.<br />

Student-Related Named Codes<br />

GradeBook provides a default list of named codes for you to use that remains in the system<br />

regardless of whether or not your school district is integrated with a student information system.<br />

Once you have set up the lists for the following named codes, they remain in your system from<br />

year to year:<br />

• Admission<br />

• Withdrawal<br />

• Student Status<br />

• Address Types<br />

• Contact Types<br />

Depending on the student information system in which your district is integrated, the codes listed<br />

previously may be imported into GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you<br />

should make them in that student information system; therefore, it is not recommended to create<br />

customized named codes lists in GradeBook.<br />

If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you must set up the<br />

named codes lists during the initial GradeBook setup. You can use the predefined list provided by<br />

GradeBook or you can add a customized list to suit your needs.<br />

Add Admission Codes<br />

Admission codes represent the student’s location prior to entering the school district. These codes<br />

display on the Enrollment tab on the Update Student screen.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Admission<br />

Codes.<br />

2. On the Admission Codes screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes<br />

list.<br />

3. In the Code column, type the new code.<br />

4. In the Description column, type the code’s description.<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

6. To continue adding codes, perform step 3 through step 5.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 97


Maintain Students<br />

Admission Codes Screen<br />

Add Withdrawal Codes<br />

Withdrawal codes represent the reasons a student withdrew from the school district and are used<br />

in maintaining homeroom absences and attendance totaling. These codes display on the<br />

Enrollment tab on the Update Student screen.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Withdrawal<br />

Codes.<br />

2. On the Withdrawal Codes screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes<br />

list.<br />

3. In the Code column, type the new code.<br />

4. In the Description column, type the code’s description.<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

6. To continue adding codes, perform step 3 through step 5.<br />

Withdrawal Codes Screen<br />

98 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain Students<br />

Add Student Status Codes<br />

Student status codes describe the state of the student in the school district and are used in<br />

attendance totaling. These codes display on the Main tab on the Update Student screen.<br />

If you are integrated with certain information systems, the student status codes are imported as<br />

part of the student’s record but do not automatically populate on this screen. You must still enter<br />

student status codes on the Student Status Codes screen. The most commonly used codes are<br />

Active and Inactive.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Student Status<br />

Codes.<br />

2. On the Student Status Codes screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named<br />

codes list.<br />

3. In the Code column, type the new code.<br />

4. In the Description column, type the code’s description.<br />

5. In the Active column, click the check box to denote that the code reflects an active status<br />

in the school district.<br />

6. Click Save.<br />

7. To continue adding codes, perform step 3 through step 6.<br />

Student Status Codes Screen<br />

Add Address Types Codes<br />

Address type codes represent the person’s address with whom the student lives and are used in<br />

student contact information.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Address Type<br />

Codes.<br />

2. On the Student Address Types screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named<br />

codes list.<br />

3. In the Code column, type the new code.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 99


Maintain Students<br />

4. In the Description column, type the code’s description.<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

6. To continue adding codes, perform step 3 through step 5.<br />

Student Address Types Screen<br />

Add Contact Type Codes<br />

Contact type codes represent the type of contacts available for a student and are used in student<br />

contact information for attendance purposes.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Contact Types.<br />

2. On the Contact Types Codes screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes<br />

list.<br />

3. In the Code column, type the new code.<br />

4. In the Description column, type the code’s description.<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

6. To continue adding codes, perform step 3 through step 5.<br />

100 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain Students<br />

Contact Type Codes Screen<br />

Copy Named Codes to New List<br />

You can copy most default named codes lists to create a new list and make modifications to the<br />

new list, as needed.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, select the appropriate<br />

named code.<br />

2. On the Named Code screen in the Name list, select the default named codes list.<br />

3. In the Copy to new list field, type the name of the copied list.<br />

4. Click Go.<br />

The name entered in the Copy to new list field displays in the Name list.<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

Modify Named Codes<br />

You should only modify the named codes in GradeBook if your school district is not integrated with<br />

a student information system. Depending on the student information system in which your school<br />

district may be integrated, the named codes may be imported into GradeBook from that system.<br />

You should make any necessary changes to named codes in the student information system.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, select the appropriate<br />

named code.<br />

2. On the Named Code screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes list.<br />

3. Change the information, as needed.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 101


Maintain Students<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

Delete Individual Named Codes from List<br />

You should only delete individual codes from a named codes list in GradeBook if your school<br />

district is not integrated with a student information system. Depending on the student information<br />

system in which your school district may be integrated, the named codes may be imported into<br />

GradeBook from that system. You should make any necessary changes to named codes in the<br />

student information system.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page, select the appropriate named code under the Named<br />

Codes section.<br />

2. On the Named Code screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes list.<br />

3. In the Delete column, click the check box next to the code(s) you want to remove from the<br />

list.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

Add Students<br />

You must add students to GradeBook if your school district is not integrated with a student<br />

information system. If your school district is integrated with a student information system, students<br />

are imported into GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you should make them<br />

in that system.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Students.<br />

2. On the Students screen, click the Add a Student link.<br />

Add a Student Link on the Students Screen<br />

3. On the Add a Student window in the Last Name field, enter the student’s last name.<br />

4. In the First Name field, enter the student’s first name.<br />

5. In the Middle Name field, enter the student’s middle name.<br />

6. In the Student ID field, enter the student’s unique identification number using your district’s<br />

student ID protocol.<br />

7. From the Student Sex list, select the student’s gender.<br />

8. In the DOB field, enter the student’s date of birth using the format mm/dd/yyyy.<br />

9. From the School list, select the student’s school.<br />

10. From the Homeroom list, select the student’s homeroom, if applicable.<br />

11. From the Student Grade list, select the student’s grade level.<br />

102 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain Students<br />

12. In the Graduation Date field, enter the student’s graduation date using the format mm/dd/<br />

yyyy.<br />

13. From the Student Calendar list, select the student’s school calendar.<br />

The school calendar should already be set up. See “Create School Calendars.”<br />

14. In the Enrollment Status field, enter the student’s enrollment status.<br />

Note: The Enrollment Status field accepts your district’s valid codes located on<br />

the Student Status Codes screen.<br />

15. In the Enrollment Date field, enter the student’s enrollment date in the school using the<br />

format mm/dd/yyyy.<br />

Add a Student Window<br />

16. Click Update.<br />

The Addresses, Enrollment, Contacts and Schedule tabs display.<br />

17. Proceed to perform the following tasks:<br />

• Add address information. See “Add Addresses to Students.”<br />

• Add enrollment entry information. See “Add Enrollment Entry to Students.”<br />

Note: The Contact tab displays contact information imported from the district’s<br />

student information system. If your district is not integrated with a student<br />

information system, this screen will display, “No Contacts Found.”<br />

• The Schedule tab displays the classes in which the student is scheduled. To add<br />

schedule information, see “Update Classes.”<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 103


Maintain Students<br />

Add Contacts to Students<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system, students and contact<br />

information is imported into GradeBook from that system. Any changes to students or contacts<br />

should be made in the student information system.<br />

If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, adding contact<br />

information to students is not possible at this time.<br />

Add Addresses to Students<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system, students are imported into<br />

GradeBook from that system. Any changes to students should be made in the student information<br />

system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you can make<br />

changes to students, as needed.<br />

1. On the Update a Student window, click the Addresses tab.<br />

2. On the Student Addresses window, click the Add Address link.<br />

Add Address Link on Student Addresses Window<br />

3. In the Address Type list, select the appropriate address type.<br />

4. In the Full Name field, type the person’s name whose address type is being entered.<br />

5. In the Address Line 1, Address Line 2, Address Line 3, Apt. No., City, State and Zip fields,<br />

enter the appropriate street or mailing address information.<br />

6. In the Phone Number field, enter the appropriate phone number.<br />

7. If the student resides at this address, in Student Residence field, click the check box.<br />

8. If the student’s report card should be sent to this address in the Send Report Card field,<br />

click the check box.<br />

104 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain Students<br />

Addresses Tab on the Student Addresses Window<br />

9. Click Save.<br />

10. To add additional addresses for this student, in the Name/Phone column, click the Add<br />

Address link, and repeat step 3 through step 9.<br />

11. Proceed to perform the following tasks:<br />

• Add enrollment entry information. See “Add Enrollment Entry to Students.”<br />

• Add schedule information. See “Update Classes.”<br />

Add Enrollment Entry to Students<br />

If your school district is integrated with a student information system, students are imported into<br />

GradeBook from that system. Any changes to students should be made in the student information<br />

system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you can make<br />

changes to students, as needed.<br />

1. On the Update a Student screen, click the Enrollment tab.<br />

2. On the Student Enrollment window in the Date column, click the Add Enrollment Entry<br />

link.<br />

Add Enrollment Entry Link on Student Enrollment<br />

Window<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 105


Maintain Students<br />

3. Next to the Admission Date field, click to select the appropriate date the student was<br />

enrolled, or in the field, type the date.<br />

4. From the Admission Code list, select the appropriate admission code.<br />

5. From the Admission School list, select the appropriate school.<br />

6. From the Admission Grade list, select the appropriate grade.<br />

7. In the Withdraw Date field, click to select the date, or in the field, type the date, if<br />

appropriate.<br />

8. From the Withdrawal Code list, select the appropriate withdrawal code, if appropriate.<br />

9. From the Withdrawal School list, select the appropriate school.<br />

10. From the Withdrawal Grade list, select the appropriate grade.<br />

11. Click Save.<br />

Enrollment Tab on the Student Enrollment Window<br />

12. Close the Student Enrollment window.<br />

Update Students<br />

It may be necessary to update student information such as addresses, schedules or enrollment<br />

status. If your school district is integrated with a student information system, students are imported<br />

into GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you should make them in the student<br />

information system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you<br />

can make changes to students, as needed.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Students.<br />

2. On the Students screen, search for the student that you want to edit.<br />

a. In the School list, select the appropriate school building.<br />

b. Click Go.<br />

A list of all the students in the entire school displays if you do not enter any<br />

information in the Gr, HR, Last Name or ID fields.<br />

106 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Maintain Students<br />

c. To narrow the search results, perform any of the following optional steps:<br />

• In the Gr list, select the student’s grade level.<br />

• In the HR list, select the student’s homeroom.<br />

• In the Last Name field, type the student’s last name.<br />

• In the ID field, type the student’s ID.<br />

3. Next to the student you want to edit, click .<br />

Search Student Records on the Students Screen<br />

4. On the Update a Student screen on the Main tab, change the student’s information, as<br />

needed.<br />

5. Click Update.<br />

6. Proceed to perform any of the following optional tasks:<br />

• Add or change address information. See “Add Addresses to Students.”<br />

• Add or change enrollment information. See “Add Enrollment Entry to Students.”<br />

Update a Student Window<br />

Note: To change the student’s schedule, you must edit the class roster. See<br />

“Update Classes.”<br />

7. Close the Update a Student window.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 107


Maintain Students<br />

Disable an Individual Student from Classic and Beta ParentAccess<br />

Districts have the ability to disable a student from Classic and Beta ParentAccess. This ensures<br />

that if access to student data has been revoked for some reason, the student’s information will not<br />

display for any account that has access to that student. This is an option on the Students screen.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page, under Annual Setup, click Students.<br />

2. On the Students screen, search for the student(s) whom you wish to disable from Classic<br />

and Beta ParentAccess.<br />

3. In the Disable Parent Access column, select the check box for the appropriate student(s).<br />

Note: This does not disable the account for GradeBook users, such as teachers,<br />

guidance counselors or principals.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

Disable Student(s) Classic and Beta ParentAccess Account(s)<br />

108 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Attendance Setup<br />

This chapter describes the importance of proper setup of attendance-related areas in your<br />

GradeBook system for successful attendance totaling and the impact these areas have on the<br />

appropriate display of attendance totals on report cards.<br />

To ensure that GradeBook automatically calculates attendance totals correctly and displays them<br />

appropriately on report cards and interims, it is imperative to properly set up the following named<br />

codes and report card assessments in your GradeBook system at the start of the school year:<br />

• Absence Types Codes<br />

• Absence Totals Codes<br />

• Attendance Days Codes<br />

• School Calendars<br />

• Attendance Assessments on Report Cards<br />

If your district is integrated with a student information system, it is necessary to complete these<br />

tasks at the beginning of the school year to enable attendance to be exported to the student<br />

information system to allow for proper attendance calculation and to enable teachers to enter<br />

attendance for report cards even if report cards are not printed from GradeBook.<br />

Setting up the Absence Types and Totals codes mentioned previously is explained in detail in this<br />

chapter. Setting up Attendance Days codes and School Calendars was covered in detail in<br />

previous sections. See “Add Attendance Day Codes” and “Create School Calendars.”<br />

Once you have set up the attendance-related codes required for the attendance calculations, you<br />

must appropriately set up the attendance assessments, such as Days Absent or Times Tardy, in<br />

the Report Card Builder in order to display the calculated attendance totals on the report cards, if<br />

you want to print primary report cards from GradeBook. These procedures are described in detail<br />

later in this chapter. See “Add Attendance Assessments to Report Cards.”<br />

Attendance-Related Named Codes<br />

GradeBook provides a default list of named codes for you to use that remains in the system<br />

regardless of whether or not your school district is integrated with a student information system.<br />

Once you have set up the lists for the following named codes, they remain in your system from<br />

year to year.<br />

• Absence Types<br />

• Absence Totals Calculations<br />

• Absence Reason<br />

• Attendance Day<br />

• Attendance Note<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 109


Attendance Setup<br />

Depending on the student information system in which your district is integrated, some of the<br />

codes listed previously may be imported into GradeBook from that system. If changes are<br />

necessary, you should make them in that student information system. Therefore, it is not<br />

recommended to create customized named codes lists in GradeBook.<br />

If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you must set up the<br />

named codes lists during the initial GradeBook setup. You can use the predefined list provided by<br />

GradeBook, or you can add a customized list to suit your needs.<br />

Add Absence Types Codes<br />

Absence type named codes represent the types of absences used in available attendance totaling<br />

calculations. These codes must be set up before designating Absence Totals codes to ensure that<br />

attendance totals calculate properly for report cards and interims.<br />

You can choose to make some absence types codes available only to attendance staff and others<br />

available to teachers. Absence types codes must be active in your system to enable teachers to<br />

take daily and period attendance. Of the absence types codes you make available to teachers,<br />

you must designate at least one code as active, so the codes are available for use on the Daily<br />

Attendance and Period Attendance screens. The absence type codes designated as Admin Only<br />

can only be entered by attendance staff, and if they are entered, they will display only on the<br />

Period Attendance and Seating Chart screens and the Grade Book Grid. Teachers cannot enter<br />

or overwrite Admin Only codes.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Absence Types.<br />

2. On the Absence Types screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes list.<br />

3. In the Code column, type the new code.<br />

Note: Do not enter any characters except letters and numbers in the Code<br />

column. Using special characters on this screen results in an error.<br />

4. In the Description column, type the description of the code.<br />

5. In the Value list, select the value that represents the code.<br />

Note: The value is the number, such as 1 for a full day or 0.5 for a half day, used<br />

in calculating attendance totals.<br />

6. In the Type column, select one of the following attendance options:<br />

• HR – Homeroom attendance<br />

• PE – Period attendance<br />

7. In the Active column, click the check box to denote that the code is active in the school<br />

district.<br />

8. Click Save.<br />

110 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Attendance Setup<br />

Absence Types Codes on the Absence Types Screen<br />

9. To continue adding codes to the list, perform step 3 through step 8.<br />

10. You can perform any of the following optional steps:<br />

• To denote that the code represents an excused absence, in the Excused column,<br />

click the check box, if appropriate.<br />

• To make that code available only to GradeBook users with attendance, administrator<br />

or master privileges, in the Admin Only column, click the check box.<br />

Note: To make codes available to teachers when they take homeroom and period<br />

attendance, do not select the check box in the Admin Only column.<br />

• To delete the code if it is not being used, in the Delete column, click the check box.<br />

The scenario may occur where an absence type code may be duplicated in a named<br />

codes list used in another school. If the code is not being used, it can be deleted.<br />

Add Absence Totals Codes<br />

Absence totals named codes are used to instruct GradeBook which calculations to use in<br />

attendance totaling. These calculations in turn use the absence types named codes previously<br />

defined. You must set up the Absence types named codes before the absence totals codes. The<br />

absence types codes used in the absence totals attendance calculations are used to display the<br />

total number of absences on the Report Card Entry screen when attendance is automatically<br />

calculated.<br />

If the Absences Types and Absence Totals named codes lists selected on the School Named<br />

Codes screen do not match, the following message displays at the bottom of the screen, “The<br />

Absence Types defined in the Absence Totals used for attendance totaling do not match the<br />

selected Absence Types. This may cause incorrect attendance totaling. Check the following<br />

Absence Totals calculation(s): lists the affected Absence Types.”<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Absence Totals.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 111


Attendance Setup<br />

2. On the Absence Totals screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes list.<br />

3. In the Use? column, click the check box next to the Available Calculations you want to<br />

use in attendance totaling.<br />

Note: If you want to include Days Present in absence totaling on report cards and<br />

interims, you must also select Days Possible.<br />

Note: The absence types codes in the Available Calculations column designated<br />

by an asterisk (*) display on the Report Card Entry screen in the Assessment<br />

column when attendance is automatically calculated.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

The Edit link displays in the Included Codes column.<br />

Note: You can select multiple available calculations and then click Save.<br />

5. In the Included Codes column, click the Edit link for the available calculation you want to<br />

edit.<br />

A window displays.<br />

6. In the Choose a Code List option, select the appropriate named codes list.<br />

7. In the Check the Attendance Codes to use in the Calculation option, select the check<br />

box(es) next to the absence type codes to use.<br />

8. Click Save.<br />

Times Tardy Window<br />

112 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Note: To ensure that the attendance calculations are correct for each building,<br />

make sure you are working with the code list that is associated with the school<br />

being set up. See “Associate Named Codes Lists with Schools.”<br />

Attendance Setup<br />

The absence type codes selected display in the Included Codes column on the Absence<br />

Totals screen.<br />

9. To continue selecting calculations used in attendance totaling, repeat step 3 through<br />

step 8.<br />

Add Absence Reason Codes<br />

Absence reason codes represent the reasons for student absences. These codes display on the<br />

Absence Queue, Attendance by Student List and Update Absence Info screens for attendance<br />

staff to reconcile absence records.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Absence<br />

Reason.<br />

2. On the Absence Reason screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes list.<br />

3. In the Code column, type the new code.<br />

4. In the Description column, type the code’s description.<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

6. To continue adding codes, perform step 3 through step 5.<br />

Absence Reason Codes on the Absence Reason Screen<br />

Attendance Day Codes<br />

Attendance Days codes were covered in detail in the Initial District Setup chapter when setting up<br />

the school calendars. See “Add Attendance Day Codes.” These codes represent the types of<br />

days that school is in session. Each day type, such as full day, half day or holiday, is assigned a<br />

value. In addition to using the Attendance Day Codes to set up the calendars, the value of the type<br />

of each day is used in calculating attendance totals. For example, if a student is marked absent<br />

on a day that is designated on the school calendar as a Half Day, the attendance calculation would<br />

use the multiplier defined on the Attendance Day Codes screen.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 113


Attendance Setup<br />

Attendance Day Codes Screen<br />

Add Attendance Note Codes<br />

Attendance note codes represent the types of notes accepted for student absences and are used<br />

for school attendance records purposes.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Attendance<br />

Note.<br />

2. On the Attendance Note screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes list.<br />

3. In the Code column, type the new code.<br />

4. In the Description column, type the code’s description.<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

6. To continue adding codes, perform step 3 through step 5.<br />

Attendance Note Screen<br />

114 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Attendance Setup<br />

Copy Named Codes to New List<br />

You can copy most default named codes lists to create a new list and make modifications to the<br />

new list, as needed.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, select the appropriate<br />

named code.<br />

2. On the Named Code screen in the Name list, select the default named codes list.<br />

3. In the Copy to new list field, type the name of the copied list.<br />

4. Click Go.<br />

The name entered in the Copy to new list field displays in the Name list.<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

Copy to new list Field on the Attendance Note Screen<br />

Modify Named Codes<br />

You should only modify the named codes in GradeBook if your school district is not integrated with<br />

a student information system. Depending on the student information system in which your school<br />

district may be integrated, the named codes may be imported into GradeBook from that system.<br />

You should make any necessary changes to named codes in the student information system.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, select the appropriate<br />

named code.<br />

2. On the Named Code screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes list.<br />

3. Change the information, as needed.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 115


Attendance Setup<br />

Delete Individual Named Codes from List<br />

You should only delete individual codes from a named codes list in GradeBook if your school<br />

district is not integrated with a student information system. Depending on the student information<br />

system in which your school district may be integrated, the named codes may be imported into<br />

GradeBook from that system. You should make any necessary changes to named codes in the<br />

student information system.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, select the appropriate<br />

named code.<br />

2. On the Named Code screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes list.<br />

3. In the Delete column, click the check box next to the code(s) you want to remove from the<br />

list.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

Note: You cannot delete the named codes lists discussed in this chapter if a code<br />

in one of the lists has been assigned to a student. For example, if a student has<br />

been marked Tardy, which is a code in the Absence Types named codes list, the<br />

Absence Types named codes list cannot be deleted.<br />

Add Attendance Assessments to Report Cards<br />

Once you have set up all of the attendance codes and defined the calculations, the final step is to<br />

set up the report cards. If you are creating primary report cards to print out of GradeBook and want<br />

attendance totals to display on the report card, you must create an attendance assessment for<br />

each type of attendance record that you use. These attendance assessments must be included<br />

in one of the courses that display on the report card. You can either create a separate course that<br />

includes only attendance assessments or you can include the attendance assessments in an<br />

existing course. You must create the attendance assessments in the Report Card Builder to<br />

ensure that they display appropriately on the report card whether or not your school district is<br />

integrated with a student information system.<br />

This procedure only provides information specific to setting up attendance assessments. For<br />

complete details on setting up report cards in GradeBook, see “Report Cards and Interims.”<br />

1. On the Administrators Home Page under Grading Setup, select Report Card Builder.<br />

2. On the Report Cards screen, select the report card in which you want to set up<br />

attendance assessments.<br />

If you are creating traditional report cards, proceed to step 4.<br />

3. If you are creating standards-based report cards, on the Assessments tab in the Course<br />

list, select the course name for which you want to enter attendance assessments.<br />

4. In the Assessment column, type Days Absent or whatever text your district wishes to use<br />

as labels on the report card for attendance.<br />

5. In the Seq# column, type a number that represents the order in which the assessment<br />

displays on the printed report card and Report Card Entry screen.<br />

116 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Attendance Setup<br />

Note: Use numbers in increments of 5 or 10, so you can add assessments later, if<br />

needed.<br />

6. In the Mark Type column, select the Points option.<br />

Note: You do not have to select a default grading scale for attendance<br />

assessments to calculate properly.<br />

7. If you are creating standards-based report cards and you selected Use Basic Calculations<br />

on the General tab, select Average in the Default Calculation list. See “Add Assessments<br />

to Report Cards” for a detailed description of calculation methods.<br />

Note: If your school district does not want GradeBook to automatically calculate<br />

attendance assessments but instead wants teachers to manually enter<br />

attendance assessments on the Report Card Entry screen, you must select None<br />

in the Default Calculation list. This same condition applies in traditional report<br />

cards, but you must select No in the Calc Mark? list.<br />

8. If you are creating traditional report cards and you selected Use Basic Calculations as the<br />

Average Calculation Method on the General tab, select Y in the Calc Mark? column. If you<br />

selected Use Advanced Calculations on the General tab, the Calc Mark? Column does not<br />

display.<br />

• Yes – The mark type selected is a calculated mark type, such as grading scales,<br />

points and percentages.<br />

• No – The mark type selected is not a calculated mark type.<br />

9. In the Value Req? Column, select one of the following options.<br />

• Yes – Displays teachers on the Report Card Verification Report who have not entered<br />

marks for assessments.<br />

• No – Does not display teachers on the Report Card Verification Report who have not<br />

entered marks for assessments.<br />

External Reference Column on the Assessments T ab on the Report Card Screen<br />

Note: If your school district is not integrated with a student information system,<br />

the External Reference column does not display.<br />

10. In the External Reference column, select the appropriate option(s) to instruct the student<br />

information system of the appropriate place to put the assessment during data integration.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 117


Attendance Setup<br />

Note: The External Reference options listed vary depending on the student<br />

information system with which your school district is integrated. Only the options<br />

display for which you want to export a code to the student information system.<br />

Note: If you do not select at least one option in the External Reference column for<br />

an assessment, a warning displays when you compile the report card if you<br />

selected Live or Batch as the data integration method on the General tab.<br />

11. If you are creating standards-based report cards in the Group these assessments under<br />

Special Subjects? option, select No.<br />

• Yes – Group subjects such as Art, Music and Physical Education together.<br />

• No – Default option.<br />

12. Click Save.<br />

13. To continue adding attendance assessments, such as Days Present or Times Tardy,<br />

repeat step 4 through step 12.<br />

Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods<br />

To make sure attendance assessment totals display in the correct reporting periods on the report<br />

card, you must assign them to the reporting periods in which they will be calculated.<br />

1. On the Administrators Home Page under Grading Setup, select Report Card Builder.<br />

2. On the Report Cards screen, select the report card in which you want to associate<br />

assessments with reporting periods.<br />

3. On the Requirements tab, select the grading period(s) in which each assessment is<br />

evaluated.<br />

Note: If you do not select a grading period in which the assessment is used, the<br />

assessment appears shaded on the Report Card Entry screen, but grades cannot<br />

be entered for that assessment.<br />

Note: To quickly select all the assessments in the list, click Select All.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

Report Period Columns on the Requirements Tab<br />

118 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Attendance Setup<br />

Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting<br />

Periods<br />

If you are printing standards-based report cards or interims from GradeBook, to instruct the<br />

system on the appropriate place to put calculated attendance assessments on the report card, you<br />

must associate the specific attendance assessment with a mapping identifier for each reporting<br />

period. The mapping identifier is a code in the report card template that places the assessment in<br />

the appropriate template piece on the report card.<br />

1. On the Administrators Home Page under Grading Setup, select Report Card Builder.<br />

2. On the Report Cards screen, select the report card in which you want to associate<br />

assessments with mapping identifiers in reporting periods.<br />

If you are creating traditional report cards, proceed to step 4.<br />

3. If you are creating standards-based report cards, on the Mappings tab in the Course list,<br />

select the appropriate course that includes the attendance assessments to be mapped.<br />

4. In the Quarter/Reporting Period list for each attendance assessment, select the<br />

appropriate attendance assessment mapping identifier.<br />

For example, select #Absent1# for the Absent assessment in the Quarter 1 list, #Absent2#<br />

in the Quarter 2 list, etc., for all the reporting periods that the assessment displays on the<br />

report card.<br />

Note: Mapping identifier options vary depending on the template being used.<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

Mappings Tab on the Report Card Screen<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 119


Attendance Setup<br />

Update Attendance Totals During Data Integration<br />

GradeBook updates attendance totals when the nightly procedure is run on the server. The<br />

attendance calculations appear on the Report Card Entry screen during the report card grade<br />

entry time frame. The next time that the data integration procedure runs after the report card grade<br />

entry time frame closes, final attendance totals are calculated, and these final attendance totals<br />

are displayed on report cards.<br />

120 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Report Cards and Interims<br />

This chapter describes the process of creating standards-based and traditional report cards and<br />

interims in the Report Card Builder. Depending on the style of report card you choose when you<br />

begin creating the report card, the availability of different tabs allow you to customize courses,<br />

assessments, grade calculations and attendance data integration with your student information<br />

system.<br />

GradeBook provides numerous, custom-designed template pieces in various sizes for printing<br />

report cards. However, even if you do not want to print report cards and interims from GradeBook<br />

but instead print them from your student information system, you must still create report cards in<br />

GradeBook.<br />

Once you have selected all of the necessary options and previewed the report card to ensure it<br />

meets your layout requirements, you must compile the final report card and make it active in your<br />

system for teachers to use.<br />

To ensure consistent grade book configurations for all teachers' grade books, if your district uses<br />

standards-based report cards you can set up grade books to automatically apply the Grading<br />

Scale Custom Setup 2 option.<br />

Report Cards Screen<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 121


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Create Report Cards/Interims<br />

Creating report cards/interims is a multiple-step process that provides numerous options for<br />

entering report card/interim content and formatting the printed report card/interim. It is imperative<br />

to create report cards/interims in GradeBook at the beginning of the school year to enable<br />

teachers to enter grades, to allow for proper grade calculation and attendance totaling and to<br />

enable grades to be exported to the student information system.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Grading Setup, click Report Card Builder.<br />

2. On the Report Cards screen near the bottom of the screen, click the Add a Report Card<br />

link.<br />

The General tab is highlighted in the Web site banner.<br />

General Tab for Creating a New Report Card<br />

3. In the Enter a name for the report card field, type a name for the report card/interim.<br />

Note: This name should easily identify the report card/interim and display in the<br />

list on the Report Cards screen, Interims and Report Card Entry screens and<br />

Classic and Beta ParentAccess.<br />

4. In the Choose the type that will be produced option, select one of the following report card<br />

types:<br />

• Report Card<br />

• Interim Report<br />

Note: The formats refer to style of report card/interim, as in traditional or<br />

standards-based, and not grade level.<br />

122 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Report Cards and Interims<br />

5. In the Select a format for the report option, select one of the following formats:<br />

• Elementary – Recommended if using different assessments in each course<br />

(standards-based report cards/interims) and for school districts that want to print<br />

report cards/interims. Individual courses within one grade may have different sets of<br />

assessments.<br />

• Secondary – Recommended if the same assessments are used for all courses<br />

(traditional report cards/interims). Since GradeBook does not calculate cumulative<br />

grade point averages, it is recommended to print secondary report cards/interims<br />

from your student information system. However, you must still create report<br />

cards/interims in GradeBook.<br />

6. If you are printing report cards/interims from GradeBook, in the Select the template for<br />

printing list, select one of the following paper size and layout options:<br />

• Standard Elementary Report Card (11 * 17 landscape, 2 columns)<br />

• Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2 * 11 portrait)<br />

• Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2 * 11 landscape, 2 columns)<br />

• Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2 * 14 portrait)<br />

• Standard Elementary Report Card (Legal tri-fold)<br />

7. From Which Average Calculation Method would you like to use? list, select one of the<br />

following calculation methods:<br />

Note: The primary difference between Basic and Advanced Calculations depends<br />

on how grades used in system calculations are entered into GradeBook. If all of<br />

the grades used are entered on the same Assessment row, Basic Calculations<br />

can be used. If the grades used are entered on various Assessment rows,<br />

Advanced Calculations must be used.<br />

• Use Basic Calculations – To determine how grades will be calculated only for the<br />

reporting periods that are not set up as a grade book range on the Reporting Periods<br />

screen. Often, this option is used if creating standards-based report cards/interims.<br />

Basic Calculations is recommended for school districts that are not integrated with a<br />

student information system and for school districts that are integrated with some<br />

student information systems.<br />

Report Card Entry Setup Using Basic Calculations<br />

• Use Advanced Calculations – To assign report card/interim grade entry methods for<br />

all assessments and reporting periods and then set up how grades will be calculated<br />

for those designated as system calculations. Use this option if creating traditional<br />

report cards/interims. Advanced Calculations is recommended for school districts that<br />

are integrated with most student information systems.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 123


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Report Card Entry Setup Using Advanced Calculations<br />

Once you save the report card/interim, the Web site banner will display different<br />

calculation tabs depending on your selection of either Basic or Advanced Calculations.<br />

These Web site banner links are system calculation steps used for defining how semester<br />

and final grades are calculated. With Basic Calculations, Average Calcs is the only link to<br />

complete on the Web site banner.<br />

Basic Calculations Web Site Banner Link<br />

However, Advanced Calc and <strong>System</strong> Calcs are the links to complete on the Web site<br />

banner for Advanced Calculations.<br />

Advanced Calculations Web Site Banner Links<br />

In addition to system calculation steps, the Basic or Advanced Calculations option<br />

determines whether certain options display on the Assessments link. With Basic<br />

Calculations, the Pull Mark? column displays for elementary style report cards.<br />

Pull Mark? Column on the Assessments Tab<br />

The Calc Mark? column displays for secondary style report cards.<br />

124 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Calc Mark? Column on the Assessments Tab<br />

However, for both elementary and secondary style report cards with Advanced<br />

Calculations, these columns are unnecessary because the Advanced Calc link designates<br />

how grades are entered on the report card.<br />

Advanced Calc Tab on the Report Card Screen<br />

Note: The selection of the values for the following rounding precision options<br />

determines the number of decimal places you want to display after the decimal<br />

point on the report card/interim when GradeBook calculates student grades using<br />

percentage averages or letter grade point equivalent averages. The default value<br />

is 2 for each option.<br />

8. In the Select the rounding precision to use when averaging numeric grades list, select one<br />

of the following values that represents the number of decimal places you want to display<br />

after the decimal point:<br />

• 0 – Rounds up or down to the nearest whole number, such as 90.<br />

• 1 – Rounds up or down to the nearest tenth and displays one place after the decimal<br />

point, such as 89.7.<br />

• 2 – Rounds up or down to the nearest hundredth and displays two places after the<br />

decimal point, such as 89.76.<br />

• 3 – Rounds up or down to the nearest thousandth and displays three places after the<br />

decimal point, such as 89.765.<br />

• 4 – Rounds up or down to the nearest ten thousandth and displays four places after<br />

the decimal point, such as 89.7658.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 125


Report Cards and Interims<br />

9. In the Select the rounding precision to use when averaging from letter grades list, select<br />

one of the following values that represents the number of decimal places you want to<br />

display after the decimal point:<br />

• 0 – Rounds up to the nearest whole number, such as 90.<br />

• 1 – Rounds up or down to the nearest tenth and displays one place after the decimal<br />

point, such as 89.7.<br />

• 2 – Rounds up or down to the nearest hundredth and displays two places after the<br />

decimal point, such as 89.76.<br />

• 3 – Rounds up or down to the nearest thousandth and displays three places after the<br />

decimal point, such as 89.765.<br />

• 4 – Rounds up or down to the nearest ten thousandth and displays four places after<br />

the decimal point, such as 89.7658.<br />

Note: Do not select a value to display more decimal places than the number of<br />

decimal places defined in the ranges set up in the grading scale.<br />

10. In the Select the report card mode options, ensure that Testing is selected.<br />

The following modes are available at various stages of the report card/interim building<br />

process:<br />

• Active – The report card/interim must be made Active after it has been compiled and<br />

does not contain critical or severe errors. Once the report card/interim has been made<br />

active, teachers can update report card/interim grades on the Report Card Entry<br />

screen. Most changes made to the report card/interim while it is in Active mode and in<br />

use causes errors.<br />

• Inactive – Disables the report card/interim, so it cannot be accessed by teachers.<br />

• Testing – Default option. Allows changes to be made to the report card/interim setup,<br />

and allows report card/interim grades to be viewed by teachers on the Report Card<br />

Entry screen.<br />

Note: An error message displays if you try to make changes to the report<br />

card/interim while it is in Active mode.You must change the mode to Inactive or<br />

Testing before you make changes.<br />

Note: If your school district is not integrated with a student information system,<br />

select None in the following data integration steps.<br />

11. In the Choose the data integration method list, select one of the following options:<br />

• Batch – Student marks are exported from GradeBook to the student information<br />

system in an automated data integration process that runs after the report<br />

card/interim grade entry time frame has passed. Marks exported from the batch data<br />

integration process overwrite existing marks in the student information system with<br />

the exception of those marks designated in the Protected Marks screen.<br />

• Live – Student marks are saved in GradeBook and are automatically updated in the<br />

student information system in real time.<br />

• None – Recommended for school districts that are not integrated with a student<br />

information system or create elementary style report cards/interims that do not export<br />

marks to the student information system.<br />

126 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Report Cards and Interims<br />

12. If you selected the Batch or Live data integration method in the step 11, then in the Choose<br />

the data integration source list, select the student information system in which your<br />

district is integrated. If you selected None in step 11, in the Choose the data integration<br />

source list, select None.<br />

13. In the Allow school administrators to update this report card setup option, select one of the<br />

following access options:<br />

• Yes – Allows users assigned the school administrator role to update report<br />

card/interim settings.<br />

• No – Allows users assigned the school administrator role to view but not update<br />

report card/interim settings.<br />

14. In the Post on Parent Access option, select one of the following options:<br />

• Yes – Displays report card/interim data on Classic and Beta ParentAccess.<br />

• No – Does not display report card/interim data on Classic and Beta ParentAccess.<br />

15. If you are creating interims, in the Pull grades for previous marking periods from option,<br />

select one of the following options:<br />

• Report Card – Pulls report card grades for previous reporting periods when printing<br />

the interim, which must use the same assessments and/or mark types as the interim.<br />

• Interim Report – Pulls interim report grades for previous reporting periods, which is<br />

the default option.<br />

Note: If you pull grades from report cards for the previous marking periods,<br />

ensure that the report card uses the same assessments and/or mark types as the<br />

interim.<br />

16. Click Save.<br />

The Grade Levels tab is highlighted in the Web site banner.<br />

17. Proceed to assign grade levels to schools that use the report card/interim.<br />

Assign Grade Levels to Schools<br />

You must assign the appropriate grade levels to each school that uses the report card to make<br />

the report card available to teachers when they enter grades on the Report Card Entry screen.<br />

1. On the Grade Levels tab in the appropriate Grade Levels column, click the check box for<br />

each grade in each school that uses the report card.<br />

2. Click Save.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 127


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Grade Levels Tab on the Report Card Screen<br />

3. In the Web site banner, click Periods to proceed to define the order in which the reporting<br />

periods display on the report card.<br />

Assign Order to Reporting Periods<br />

You must assign a sequence to a reporting period, so it displays in the proper order on the report<br />

card. It is important to use the numerals 1 through 10 and not numbers in increments of five or 10<br />

as you can on the Assessments tab. The numeral you enter in the Seq# column should represent<br />

the number of the order in which the column displays in the template piece in the report card<br />

template. For example, for the first quarter grade to display properly in the first column in the<br />

Marks template piece in the template, you must enter 1 in the Seq# column next to Quarter 1. For<br />

the second quarter grade to display properly on the report card template, you must enter 2 in the<br />

Seq# column next to Quarter 2.<br />

1. On the Periods tab in the Seq# column, type a number next to each reporting period that<br />

represents the order in which the reporting period displays on the Report Card Entry<br />

screen and printed report card.<br />

2. Click Save.<br />

3. If you selected Elementary report format on the General tab, in the Web site banner, click<br />

Courses to proceed to add courses to report cards. If you selected Secondary report<br />

format on the General tab, in the Web site banner, click Assessments to proceed to add<br />

assessments to report cards. See “Add Assessments to Report Cards.”<br />

Seq# Column on the Periods Tab on the Report Card Screen<br />

128 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Add Courses to Report Cards<br />

Report Cards and Interims<br />

You must enter the course names to display on the report card and associate them with the<br />

courses in which students are being evaluated. You must add courses whether or not your school<br />

district is integrated with a student information system. The course name that displays on the<br />

report card can be associated with multiple classes.<br />

1. On the Courses tab in the Seq# column, type a number that represents the order in which<br />

the course name displays on the Report Card Entry screen.<br />

2. In the Course Name (for Rpt Card) column, type the course’s name.<br />

Note: Course naming decisions should be made by school district administrators.<br />

You can use a general course name like Math or Mathematics to display on the<br />

report card that may include several Mathematics classes, such as Advanced<br />

Mathematics and Applied Mathematics.<br />

3. For all the courses that display on the report card, continue to enter course names and<br />

sequence numbers.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

Notice that the Add Courses link displays in the Action column next to each course name<br />

entered.<br />

Add Courses Link in the Action Column on the Courses Tab<br />

5. In the Action column, click the Add Courses link next to the first course name listed.<br />

6. On the Course Search window, search for the courses in which the student’s grades<br />

display on the report card.<br />

Note: The course name that displays in the Course Name field on the Course<br />

Search window comes from course names entered in the Course Name (for Rpt<br />

Card) column on the Courses tab.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 129


Report Cards and Interims<br />

a. On the Course Search window, click Go.<br />

A list of all the courses that contain the exact course name displayed in the Course<br />

Name field for all grade levels in all the schools in the district displays.<br />

b. To narrow the search results, perform any of the following search options:<br />

• In the School list, select the school for which the report card is being created.<br />

• In the Grade list, select the grade level in which the course is being used.<br />

• In the Course ID field, type the course’s identification number.<br />

The courses that meet the search requirements you entered display.<br />

7. In the Select column, click the check box next to each course you want to include.<br />

Course Search Window<br />

8. Click Add the selected courses.<br />

The selected courses display in the Included Courses column on the Courses tab.<br />

9. Click Save.<br />

Included Courses Column on the Courses Tab<br />

10. To continue adding courses, perform step 6 through step 9 for each course name that<br />

displays on the report card.<br />

130 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Note: To delete an entire course name or multiple courses included in a course<br />

name, see “Delete Courses from Report Cards.”<br />

Delete Courses from Report Cards<br />

You can delete an entire course from a report card or remove individual included course(s) from<br />

a course.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page, click Report Card Builder.<br />

2. On the Report Cards screen, select the appropriate standards-based report card.<br />

3. Click the Courses tab.<br />

To delete an entire course from the report card:<br />

4. On the Courses tab in the Del column, select the check box next to the Course Name (for<br />

Rpt Card) you want to delete.<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

The entire Course Name (for Rpt Card) is deleted from the report card.<br />

To remove an included course from a report card course:<br />

6. On the Courses tab in the Remove column, select the check box for the Included<br />

Course(s) that you want to remove from the course.<br />

7. Click Save.<br />

The Course Name (for Rpt Card) is still in the report card, but the selected Included<br />

Course(s) is no longer associated with the report card.<br />

Remove Column on the Courses Tab on the Report Card Screen<br />

Add Assessments to Report Cards<br />

You must enter assessments for each course that displays on the report card, determine the mark<br />

type and default grading scale and calculation method used. You must do this whether or not your<br />

school district is integrated with a student information system.<br />

If you are creating standards-based or traditional report cards and want attendance totals to<br />

display on the report card, in one of the courses you must create an assessment for each type of<br />

attendance record. For example, you may create Days Absent and Tardy assessments in a<br />

course called Attendance. For attendance totals to calculate in GradeBook properly if you are<br />

creating standards-based report cards, you must select Points as the Mark Type for each<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 131


Report Cards and Interims<br />

assessment, and if you selected Use Basic Calculations on the General tab, select any of the<br />

calculation methods except None in the Default Calculation list. For more specific details on<br />

setting up attendance, see “Add Attendance Assessments to Report Cards.”<br />

To quickly add assessments, you can copy assessments from existing report cards that use<br />

similar assessments, and then modify them as needed. See “Copy Assessments.”<br />

1. On the Assessments tab, if you are creating traditional report cards, proceed to step 2. If<br />

you are creating standards-based report cards in the Course list, select the course name<br />

for which you want to enter assessments.<br />

2. In the Assessment column, type an assessment.<br />

3. In the Seq# column, type a number that represents the order in which the assessment<br />

displays on the printed report card and on the Report Card Entry screen. Use numbers in<br />

increments of 5 or 10, so you can add assessments later, if needed.<br />

4. In the Mark Type column, select the mark type.<br />

Note: If your school district is integrated with certain student information systems,<br />

you must use the mark type from that student information system. Mark types<br />

should already be set up. If mark types do not display in the Mark Type list, see<br />

“Add Mark Types.”<br />

Note: You can select an unlimited number of different mark types for a teacher to<br />

enter on a student’s report card or interim, but the system may perform slowly if<br />

numerous different mark types are entered.<br />

5. In the Default Grading Scale list, select the appropriate default grading scale.<br />

Note: Grading scales should already be set up. If grading scales do not display in<br />

the Default Grading Scale list, see “Add Grading Scales.”<br />

Note: You must select a default grading scale for any mark type that is calculated<br />

except for attendance assessments.<br />

6. If you are creating a standards-based report card in the Default Calculation list, select one<br />

of the following options:<br />

• None – Grade or mark is not calculated by the grade book. Teachers must enter the<br />

appropriate mark manually.<br />

• Average – Calculates average using points or percentages for assignments in the<br />

current grading period. If letter grades are used for assignments, the average is<br />

calculated based on the point value associated with each letter grade. For example, if<br />

A = 4 and B = 3, etc., these point values will be used to calculate the average.<br />

• Power Law – Industry-standard algorithm that applies less weight for assignment<br />

marks given earlier in the reporting period than for assignment marks given later in<br />

the reporting period.<br />

This calculation method can be used with numeric as well as alphabetical mark types<br />

and must meet the following conditions:<br />

• At least three assignments must be associated with the assessment.<br />

• All the assignments associated with the assessment must have the same point<br />

value.<br />

132 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Report Cards and Interims<br />

• All the assignments associated with the assessment must have a weight of 1.<br />

• Does not include missing assignments.<br />

• Does not include excluded assignment marks.<br />

Power Law Calculation Method<br />

Power Law Formula (Method of<br />

Mounting Evidence)<br />

• Highest Achieved – The highest mark achieved on an assignment in the current<br />

grading period. If points are used as the mark type, GradeBook translates the point<br />

value into a percentage for each assignment to determine the highest mark. If letter<br />

grades are used as the mark type, the letter grade with the highest point value is<br />

used. Missing assignments will not be included.<br />

• Last Achieved – The last mark achieved on an assignment based on the assignment<br />

due date, not including missing assignments, in the current grading period. If points<br />

are used as the mark type, GradeBook translates the last mark achieved point value<br />

into a percentage to display as the student's grade.<br />

• YTD Average – Calculates average using points or percentages for assignments<br />

from the beginning of the school year to the end of the current grading period. If letter<br />

grades are used for assignments, the average is calculated based on the point value<br />

associated with each letter grade. For example, if A = 4 and B = 3, etc., these point<br />

values will be used to calculate the average.<br />

• YTD Power Law – Industry-standard algorithm that applies less weight for<br />

assignment marks given earlier in the school year than for assignment marks given<br />

through the end of the current grading period of the school year. The same conditions<br />

must be met as for Power Law.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 133


Report Cards and Interims<br />

• YTD Highest Achieved – The highest mark achieved on an assignment from the<br />

beginning of the school year to the end of the current grading period. If points are<br />

used as the mark type, GradeBook translates the point value into a percentage for<br />

each assignment to determine the highest mark. If letter grades are used as the mark<br />

type, the letter grade with the highest point value will be used. Missing assignments<br />

will not be included.<br />

• YTD Last Achieved – The last mark achieved on an assignment based on the<br />

assignment due date, not including missing assignments, from the beginning of the<br />

school year to the end of the current grading period. If points are used as the mark<br />

type, GradeBook translates the last mark achieved point value into a percentage to<br />

display as the student's grade.<br />

Note: If you are creating standards-based report cards and your school district<br />

does not want GradeBook to automatically calculate grades but instead wants<br />

teachers to manually enter grades on the Report Card Entry screen, you must<br />

select None in the Default Calculation list. This also applies for attendance<br />

assessments. This same condition applies in traditional report cards, but you<br />

must select No in the Calc Mark? list.<br />

Default Calculation and Pull Mark? Columns on the Assessments Tab<br />

7. If you are creating a standards-based report card and you previously selected Use Basic<br />

Calculations on the General tab in the Pull Mark? list, select one of the following options.<br />

If you previously selected Use Advanced Calculations on the General tab, the Pull Mark?<br />

column does not display.<br />

• Yes – The assessment mark is automatically populated when grades are<br />

automatically calculated on the Report Card Entry screen. This mark is based on<br />

assignment marks entered on the Assignment Marks screen, Grade Book Grid and<br />

Standards Based Grid.<br />

• No – The assessment mark is not automatically populated when grades are<br />

automatically calculated on the Report Card Entry screen. Teachers will have to enter<br />

assessment marks manually.<br />

Or, if you are creating traditional report cards and you previously selected Use Basic<br />

Calculations on the General tab in the Calc Mark? column, select one of the following<br />

options. If you previously selected Use Advanced Calculations on the General tab, the<br />

Calc Mark? Column does not display.<br />

• Yes – The mark type selected is a calculated mark type, such as grading scales,<br />

points and percentages.<br />

• No – The mark type selected is not a calculated mark type.<br />

134 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Calc Mark? Column on the Assessments Tab<br />

8. If you previously selected a template for printing on the General tab in the Print Mark? list,<br />

select one of the following options:<br />

• Yes – Displays assessment marks on the printed report card.<br />

• No – Does not display assessment marks on the printed report card. However, they<br />

do display on the Report Card Entry screen and the Report Card section of Classic<br />

and Beta ParentAccess.<br />

Print Mark? Column on the Assessments Tab<br />

9. In the Value Req? list, select one of the following options:<br />

• Yes – Displays teachers on the Report Card Verification Report who have not entered<br />

marks for assessments.<br />

• No – Does not display teachers on the Report Card Verification Report who have not<br />

entered marks for assessments.<br />

Note: If your school district is not integrated with a student information system,<br />

the External Reference column does not display.<br />

10. Select the appropriate option(s) in the External Reference column to instruct the student<br />

information system of the appropriate place to put the assessment during data integration.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 135


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Note: The External Reference options listed vary depending on the student<br />

information system with which your school district is integrated.<br />

Note: If you do not select at least one option in the External Reference column for<br />

an assessment, a warning displays when you compile the report card if you<br />

selected Live or Batch as the data integration method on the General tab.<br />

11. If you are creating standards-based report cards, in the Group these assessments under<br />

Special Subjects? options, select one of the following:<br />

• Yes – Group subjects such as Art, Music and Physical Education together.<br />

• No – Default option.<br />

12. Click Save.<br />

13. To continue adding assessments to the same course, repeat step 2 through step 11.<br />

14. If you are creating standards-based report cards, continue adding assessments to the<br />

remaining courses until you have added assessments for all the courses that display on<br />

the report card.<br />

15. Click Requirements in the Web site banner to proceed to associate assessments with<br />

reporting periods. See “Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods.”<br />

Set a Default Assessment for the GradeBook Configuration Utility for<br />

Standards-Based Report Cards<br />

1. On the Assessments tab near the bottom of the screen, select a default assessment in the<br />

drop-down list to be used when running the GradeBook Configuration Utility.<br />

Note: The assessments that appear in the drop-down list are the assessments<br />

that were selected on the Requirements tab.<br />

2. Click Save.<br />

136 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Items selected<br />

as requirements.<br />

Default<br />

assessment<br />

selected for<br />

teacher’s<br />

grading<br />

scale.<br />

Copy Assessments<br />

Default Assessment for the GradeBook Configuration Utility<br />

1. On the Assessments tab in the Copy the requirements from list, select the appropriate<br />

report card to copy assessments.<br />

2. Select the appropriate course in the next field.<br />

3. Click Copy.<br />

The copied assessments display on the Assessments tab.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 137


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Copy the requirements from List on the Assessments Tab<br />

Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods<br />

You must designate the reporting periods in which each assessment will be used. If you want to<br />

include attendance totals for the attendance assessments you have created, make sure to select<br />

the reporting periods in which the attendance assessments are calculated.<br />

You can create assessments that do not receive a mark that display only as subject headings on<br />

the report card. Do not select a reporting period for these assessments, so they do not display on<br />

the Grading Scale Setup, Assignment Details, Progress By Student and Standards Based Grid<br />

screens.<br />

1. On the Requirements tab, select the grading period in which each assessment is<br />

evaluated.<br />

Note: If you do not select a grading period in which the assessment is used, the<br />

assessment displays on the Report Card Entry screen, but grades cannot be<br />

entered for that assessment.<br />

Note: To quickly select all the assessments in the list, click Select All.<br />

2. Click Save.<br />

138 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Reporting Period Columns on the Requirements Tab<br />

3. In the Web site banner, click Protected Marks to proceed to prevent marks from being<br />

overridden.<br />

Determine Protected Marks<br />

You can designate the marks that will not be overridden when GradeBook exports report card<br />

grades to your district’s student information system. If your school district is not integrated with a<br />

student information system, you can still select a protected marks option; however, do not select<br />

the first option, Do Not Override Any Marks.<br />

1. On the Protected Marks tab, select one of the following mark override options:<br />

• Do Not Override Any Marks – Does not override existing marks in the student<br />

information system. Once teachers have saved report card grades, they cannot be<br />

changed.<br />

• Override All Marks – Overrides all existing marks in the student information system<br />

each time teachers save report card grades.<br />

• Override all Marks Except for the Following – Overrides all existing marks in the<br />

student information system except for the marks listed. Once teachers have saved<br />

report card grades that are listed as exceptions, they cannot be changed.<br />

2. If you selected Override all Marks Except for the Following in step 1, in the Mark column,<br />

enter the marks that should not be overridden.<br />

3. Click Save.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 139


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Protected Marks Tab<br />

4. If you selected Use Basic Calculations on the General tab, in the Web site banner, click<br />

the Average Calcs tab to proceed to set up average calculations methods. If you selected<br />

Use Advanced Calculations on the General tab, in the Web site banner, click Advanced<br />

Calc to proceed to assign the grade entry method to assessments and reporting periods.<br />

See “Assign Grade Entry Method to Assessments and Reporting Periods.”<br />

<strong>System</strong> Calculations<br />

<strong>System</strong> Calculations are used to define how certain report card grades, such as semester or final<br />

grades, should be calculated. When defining system calculations, you will be able to designate<br />

which grades are included in the calculation, the weight of each grade used, whether the<br />

calculation should be based on grade book averages or report card grades and also the grading<br />

scale to be used. Each of these options can tremendously impact the outcome of the calculation,<br />

so it is important to understand the selections made.<br />

Set Up Average Calculation Method<br />

If you are building standards-based or traditional report cards and on the General tab, you<br />

selected Use Basic Calculations as the Average Calculation Method, Average Calcs displays in<br />

the Web site banner. The reporting periods that display in the Reporting Period list are only those<br />

that have a sequence number on the Periods tab in the Seq# column for this report card and are<br />

not designated on the Reporting Periods screen as a Gradebook Range. In the Period column,<br />

the options available will be the reporting periods associated with the report card. Reporting<br />

periods set up as a gradebook range on the Reporting Periods screen will automatically calculate<br />

from teachers’ grade books. For more details, see “Add Reporting Periods.”<br />

1. On the Average Calcs tab in the Reporting Period list, select the appropriate option to be<br />

calculated.<br />

2. In the Period column, select the appropriate option.<br />

3. In the Weight field, type a number that represents the significance of the option selected<br />

in the Period column in relationship to the whole average.<br />

140 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Note: Weights for exams and finals may be predetermined by your school<br />

district.<br />

Report Cards and Interims<br />

4. In the Select the Calculation Method list, select one of the following calculation methods:<br />

• Use Averages (from Gradebook) – Uses the calculated average in the teacher’s<br />

grade book at the time the calculation is done for reporting periods that are set up as<br />

a grade book range (Q1, Q2, T1, MP1, etc.). For reporting period grades that are<br />

entered manually on the Report Card Entry screen, the calculation will use the report<br />

card grade; however, this grade must be entered in numeric average format. With this<br />

option, the system calculation will reflect any changes made to assignment marks in<br />

the teachers’ grade books since report card grades were entered for previous<br />

reporting periods.<br />

• Use Letter Grades (from Report Card) – Uses the saved grades on the report card<br />

for all reporting periods included in the system calculation. If grades have been saved<br />

in letter grade format, then it uses the point value of the letter grades, and if grades<br />

have been saved in numeric average format, it uses the numeric average. Grade<br />

formats should be consistent to ensure accurate calculation of the grades. With this<br />

option, the system calculation will not reflect any changes made to assignment marks<br />

in the teachers’ grade books since report card grades were entered for previous<br />

reporting periods.<br />

Note: You must select the same calculation method for all options being<br />

calculated.<br />

Note: If you select Use Averages and an exam is set up to use a letter grade mark<br />

type, the system will not accept the letter grade and instead will require a numeric<br />

value. It is not recommended to set up a system calculation to include a<br />

combination of letter grades and numeric values, such as reporting periods using<br />

letter grades and exams as averages.<br />

5. In the Select the Grading Scale list, select one of the following grading scale selection<br />

methods:<br />

• Use the Report Card Grading Scale – Uses the grading scale selected for the<br />

assessment on the Assessment tab.<br />

• Use the Grade Book Grading Scale – Uses the grading scale selected by the<br />

teacher on the Grading Scale Setup screen.<br />

Note: The default option is blank. When blank is selected, GradeBook uses the<br />

grading scale specified by the teacher on the Grading Setup screen, if one is<br />

specified. If a grading scale is not specified, then GradeBook uses the grading<br />

scale specified on the Assessment tab.<br />

6. Click Save.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 141


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Reporting Period List on the Average Calcs Tab<br />

7. To continue setting up average calculations, repeat step 2 through step 6.<br />

Note: If you are building traditional report cards, the average calculations defined<br />

on this screen will be available when setting up the Year to Date calculation<br />

method.<br />

Note: To delete a reporting period from an average calculation, click the check<br />

box in the Del? column for the reporting period you want to delete.<br />

Note: Any reporting period or exam grades included in the system calculation<br />

that do not have a mark entered will not be included in final calculations. For<br />

example, if the calculation is set up to include Q1, Q2 and SemEx with weights of<br />

2, 2 and 1, respectively, and the teacher enters an 88.5 for Q1 and 77.25 for Q2<br />

but enters nothing for SemEx, the calculation will be as follows: (88.5*2) +<br />

(77.25*2) / (2+2) = 82.88%. The empty grade along with its weight value are<br />

ignored.<br />

Assign Grade Entry Method to Assessments and Reporting Periods<br />

If you are building traditional or standard-based report cards and selected Use Advanced<br />

Calculations as the Calculation Method on the General tab, Advanced Calc displays in the Web<br />

site banner. On the Advanced Calc tab, you can designate how grades will be entered for each<br />

assessment and reporting period used in the report card. All grades designated as <strong>System</strong><br />

Calculation on the Advanced Calc tab will be available in the Calculation list on the <strong>System</strong> Calcs<br />

tab.<br />

Depending on the student information system in which your district is integrated, performing the<br />

following procedure may be optional or required.<br />

142 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Report Cards and Interims<br />

1. On the Advanced Calc tab, select one of the following methods in the list to assign marks<br />

for each assessment in each reporting period on the report card:<br />

• Manual Entry – Use marks entered manually by teachers on the Report Card Entry<br />

screen. This option can be used for class assessments, comments, reporting period<br />

and semester exams.<br />

• <strong>System</strong> Calculation – Use calculations that will be set up on the <strong>System</strong> Calcs tab in<br />

the Report Card Builder. This option can be used for semester averages, year-end<br />

final averages, year-to-date or semester attendance totals.<br />

• Pull from Gradebook – Use grading period averages entered in the grade book. This<br />

option is generally used for reporting period grades that are calculated from<br />

assignments in the teachers’ grade books.<br />

• The following attendance-related options are used for attendance assessments and<br />

use attendance totals from each reporting period defined in Absence Totals<br />

calculations in GradeBook. See “Add Absence Totals Codes.”<br />

• Pull from DaysPoss<br />

• Pull from Present<br />

• Pull from Absent<br />

• Pull from UnExAbsent<br />

• Pull from ExAbsent<br />

• Pull from Tardy<br />

• Pull from UnExTardy<br />

• Pull from ExTardy<br />

• Pull from PerAbsent<br />

• Pull from PerUnExAbsent<br />

• Pull from PerExAbsent<br />

• Pull from PerTardy<br />

• Pull from PerUnExTardy<br />

• Pull from PerExTardy<br />

Note: If you selected an attendance assessment for a report card that will be<br />

printed from GradeBook, you must select the appropriate attendance mapping<br />

identifier on the Mappings tab for each reporting period in which the attendance<br />

assessment is used.<br />

2. Click Save.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 143


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Advanced Calc Tab<br />

3. In the Web site banner, click <strong>System</strong> Calcs to proceed to set up average calculation<br />

methods for those designated as systems calculations.<br />

Set Up Average Calculation Method for <strong>System</strong> Calculations<br />

If you are building traditional report cards and selected Use Advanced Calculations as the<br />

calculation method on the General tab, <strong>System</strong> Calcs displays in the Web site banner. All grades<br />

designated as <strong>System</strong> Calculation on the Advanced Calc tab will be available in the Calculation<br />

list on the <strong>System</strong> Calcs tab. In the Period & Assessment column, you will be able to choose from<br />

the list of available reporting period and grade intersects, such as Q1 Grade and EX2 Grade. You<br />

must assign report card grade entry methods for all assessments and reporting periods and then<br />

set up how grades will be calculated for those designated as <strong>System</strong> Calculation.<br />

1. On the <strong>System</strong> Calcs tab in the Calculation list, select the appropriate option to be<br />

calculated.<br />

Note: The options that display in this list were assigned as <strong>System</strong> Calculation on<br />

the Advanced Calc screen.<br />

2. In the Period & Assessment column, select the appropriate option.<br />

Note: If you selected an attendance assessment, you must select the appropriate<br />

attendance mapping identifier on the Mappings tab for each reporting period in<br />

which the attendance assessment is used.<br />

3. In the Weight column, type a number that represents the significance of the option<br />

selected in the Period & Assessment column in relationship to the whole average.<br />

Note: Weights for exams and finals may be predetermined by your school<br />

district.<br />

144 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Report Cards and Interims<br />

4. In the Select the Calculation Method list, select one of the following calculation methods:<br />

• Use Letter Grades (from Report Card) – Uses the saved grades on the report card<br />

for all reporting periods included in the system calculation. If grades have been saved<br />

in letter grade format, then it uses the point value of the letter grades, and if grades<br />

have been saved in numeric average format, it uses the numeric average. Grade<br />

formats should be consistent to ensure accurate calculation of the grades. With this<br />

option, the system calculation will not reflect any changes made to assignment marks<br />

in the teachers’ grade books since report card grades were entered for previous<br />

reporting periods.<br />

• Use Averages (from Gradebook) – Uses the calculated average in the teacher’s<br />

grade book at the time the calculation is done for reporting periods that are set up as<br />

a grade book range (Q1, Q2, T1, MP1, etc.). For reporting period grades that are<br />

entered manually on the Report Card Entry screen, the calculation will use the report<br />

card grade; however, this grade must be entered in numeric average format. With this<br />

option, the system calculation will reflect any changes made to assignment marks in<br />

the teachers’ grade books since report card grades were entered for previous<br />

reporting periods.<br />

Note: You can select different calculation methods for each option being<br />

calculated.<br />

Note: If you select Use Averages and an exam is set up to use a letter grade mark<br />

type, the system will not accept the letter grade and instead will require a numeric<br />

value.<br />

Note: <strong>System</strong> calculations can be used in defining other system calculations. For<br />

example, the final grade for a full year class could be defined to use the Semester<br />

1 final grade and Semester 2 final grade system calculations. If this configuration<br />

is used, the final grade calculation must use the grades from report cards<br />

calculation method option; otherwise, it will not calculate. (Even if all grades are<br />

being entered on the report card as numeric averages, this calculation will not<br />

work with the use averages from grade book method because the semester<br />

grades are only saved on the report card.)<br />

5. In the Select the Grading Scale list, select one of the following grading scale selection<br />

methods:<br />

• Use the Report Card Grading Scale – Uses the grading scale selected for the<br />

assessment on the Assessment tab.<br />

• Use the Grade Book Grading Scale – Uses the grading scale selected by the<br />

teacher on the Grading Scale Setup screen.<br />

Note: The default option is blank. If the blank option is used, GradeBook uses the<br />

grading scale specified by the teacher on the Grading Setup screen, if one is<br />

specified. If a grading scale is not specified, then GradeBook uses the grading<br />

scale specified on the Assessment tab.<br />

6. Click Save.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 145


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Note: Any reporting period or exam grades included in the system calculation<br />

that do not have a mark entered will not be included in final calculations. For<br />

example, if the calculation is set up to include Q1, Q2 and SemEx with weights of<br />

2, 2 and 1, respectively, and the teacher enters an 88.5 for Q1 and 77.25 for Q2<br />

but enters nothing for SemEx, the calculation will be as follows: (88.5*2) +<br />

(77.25*2) / (2+2) = 82.88%. The empty grade along with its weight value are<br />

ignored.<br />

Calculation List on the <strong>System</strong> Calcs Tab<br />

7. To continue setting up average calculations, repeat step 2 through step 6.<br />

Note: If you are building traditional report cards, these system calculations are<br />

available when setting up the Year to Date calculation method.<br />

Note: To delete a calculation method, click the check box in the Del? column for<br />

the reporting period you want to delete.<br />

8. If you are printing report cards, in the Web site banner, click the Template tab to proceed<br />

to format your report card template. See “Add Messages to Report Cards.” Otherwise,<br />

click Year to Date Calc to proceed to set up the year to date calculation method.<br />

146 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Troubleshooting Tips for <strong>System</strong> Calculations<br />

Report Cards and Interims<br />

“Troubleshoot <strong>System</strong> Calculations” provides examples of system calculation issues and how to<br />

troubleshoot each issue by checking configuration settings.<br />

Issue<br />

Exam is set up to use letter grade mark type, but it will<br />

not accept any letter grades.<br />

<strong>System</strong> calculation uses letter grades, but the calculation<br />

is resulting in the wrong grade.<br />

Semester grade is set up to use a letter grade mark type,<br />

but it will not accept any letter grades.<br />

Troubleshoot <strong>System</strong> Calculations<br />

Configuration Settings to Check<br />

Verify all system calculations use Exam in the<br />

calculation. If the calculation method on any of them is<br />

set to Use Averages (from Gradebook), it will require the<br />

Exam entry as numeric average.<br />

If you use averages in the calculation, the exam must<br />

also be entered this way, and no changes are necessary.<br />

If you want all grades entered as letter grade format,<br />

then the calculation method option must be changed to<br />

Use Letter Grades (from Report Card).<br />

Note(s):Ensure that the rounding precision for letter grades is set to 2 on<br />

the General tab of Report Card Builder for the report card.<br />

Verify rounding precision settings on the General tab of<br />

the Report Card Builder. If the system calculation uses<br />

letter grades, rounding precision for letter grades needs<br />

to match number of decimals used in point ranges on the<br />

grading scale because rounding takes place in the<br />

calculation prior to comparing to the ranges on the<br />

grading scale.<br />

For example, if the grading scale point range defines that<br />

2.76 to 3.75 translates to a B the rounding precision on<br />

the report card for letter grades needs to be set to 2;<br />

otherwise, a 3.54 average would round up to 4 before<br />

being translated into the letter grade on the grading<br />

scale.<br />

Verify all system calculations use the semester grade in<br />

the calculation, such as a final grade calculation. If a<br />

system calculation uses another system calculation, then<br />

it must use the Use Letter Grades (from Report Card)<br />

calculation method.<br />

For example, if the final grade system calculation is set<br />

up to use the semester 1 and semester 2 calculations,<br />

the final grade calculation must be set to use grades<br />

from the report card.<br />

Set Up Year to Date (YTD) Calculation Method<br />

The year to date (YTD) calculation method can be used in traditional report cards to provide an<br />

ongoing calculation toward the students’ final grades. The calculation is based on the way you<br />

define the final grade on the report card to calculate, including reporting period grades, exams and<br />

respective weights. Since this calculation is based on the final grade calculation, it is not<br />

necessarily a true year-to-date average of the assignments in the teacher’s grade book, but rather<br />

a reflection of what the student’s final grade on the report card would be if entered at that time.<br />

YTD calculations are not available for interims or standards-based report cards.<br />

Once enabled, the system will display an ongoing calculation of that final grade in the teachers’<br />

grade books as well as on Classic ParentAccess. Since the YTD calculation is based upon the<br />

designated system calculation, settings in the system calculation directly affect how the grade is<br />

calculated and the format in which it displays. For example, if the system calculation for the final<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 147


Report Cards and Interims<br />

grade is configured to use letter grades from the report card, then the YTD grade will display as a<br />

point average and letter grade.<br />

The YTD calculation is set up in the report card after the system calculations have been defined.<br />

This calculation can be used whether Basic Calculations or Advanced Calculations are used in<br />

the report card, and whether the grades entered on the report cards are numeric averages or letter<br />

grades and will use either the grade book average or the report card grade in the calculation based<br />

on the system calculation. For example, as described in “Year to Date Calculation Scenarios,” if<br />

the final grade system calculation uses averages from the grade book, then the YTD calculation<br />

will also use averages from the grade book. If letter grades are used on the report card and in the<br />

Final grade calculation, then the YTD calculation will be based on the point value equivalent for<br />

each letter grade, and the average will display in terms of a point average.<br />

If Report Card Grade<br />

Type is...<br />

Year to Date Calculation Scenarios<br />

And <strong>System</strong> Calculation<br />

Uses...<br />

Then YTD Calculation Uses...<br />

In Past Reporting<br />

Periods<br />

Letter Report card grades Letter grade on report card<br />

In Current Reporting<br />

Period<br />

Letter grade for current<br />

average in the grade book<br />

Letter Averages Average in grade book Average in grade book<br />

Percentage Report card grades Percentage on report card Average in grade book<br />

Percentage Averages Average in grade book Average in grade book<br />

The following examples illustrate how the YTD grade would be calculated for various scenarios.<br />

The scenarios are demonstrating how the YTD grade is calculated if today’s date is in the midst<br />

of Q3.<br />

Letter Grades on the Report Card and Final Grade Based on Averages from the Grade Book<br />

Q1 Q2 Ex1 Sem1 Q3 Q4 Ex2 Sem2<br />

Grade Book Average<br />

(At Quarter Grade Entry)<br />

Report Card Grade<br />

85.23<br />

B<br />

91.19<br />

A 82.00 B<br />

(Ignored since today is<br />

in Q3)<br />

Grade Book Average<br />

(Today)<br />

85.23 92.43 89.43<br />

Calculation of YTD: 85.23+92.43+82.00+89.43 = 349.09/4 = 87.27<br />

YTD<br />

Grade<br />

87.27<br />

B<br />

Note: In this scenario since the grade is based on averages from the grade book,<br />

the current average in the grade book for Q2 (92.43) is being used in the YTD<br />

calculation.<br />

148 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Letter Grades on the Report Card and Final Grade Based on Report Card Grades<br />

A=4, B=3, C=2, D=1 and F=0<br />

Grade Book Average<br />

(At Quarter Grade Entry)<br />

Q1 Q2 Ex1 Sem1 Q3 Q4 Ex2 Sem2<br />

85.23 91.19<br />

Report Card Grade B A B B<br />

Grade Book Average<br />

(Today)<br />

85.23 92.43<br />

89.43<br />

B<br />

Calculation of YTD: 3+4+3+3 = 13/4 = 3.25<br />

(Ignored since today is<br />

in Q3)<br />

YTD<br />

Grade<br />

3.25<br />

B<br />

Note: In this scenario since the grade is based on report card grades, the current<br />

average in the grade book for Q3 (89.43) is being translated into the letter grade<br />

for the use in the YTD calculation.<br />

Numeric Grades on Report Card and Final Grade Based on Report Card Grades<br />

Grade Book Average<br />

(At Quarter Grade Entry)<br />

Q1 Q2 Ex1 Sem1 Q3 Q4 Ex2 Sem2<br />

85.23 91.19<br />

Report Card Grade 85 91 82 86<br />

Grade Book Average<br />

(Today)<br />

85.23 92.43 89.43<br />

Calculation of YTD: 85+91+82+89 = 347/4 = 86.75<br />

(Ignored since today is<br />

in Q3)<br />

YTD<br />

Grade<br />

87<br />

B<br />

Note: In this scenario since the grade is based on report card grades, the average<br />

saved on the report card for Q2 (91) is being used in the YTD calculation; even<br />

though, changes have been made in the teacher’s grade book.<br />

Note: Since this calculation can be affected in the first half of the school year, you<br />

may choose to wait until the second half of the year to enable it. For example, if a<br />

student gets a 95% for Q1 but misses the first assignment in Q2, the YTD<br />

calculation is now using 95+0 (or with letter grades 4+0) in its calculation resulting<br />

in 47.5% (or with letter grades 2.0) displaying as the YTD grade both in the<br />

teacher’s grade book and Classic ParentAccess.<br />

Once the YTD calculation has been enabled in the report card, grade books must be recalculated<br />

to reflect the YTD average. Upon recalculation, the YTD average displays on the Class<br />

Dashboard and Assignment Marks screen when users hover over student names and on the<br />

Grade Book Grid, Report Card Entry screen and Averages section of the Student tab on Classic<br />

ParentAccess.<br />

If you are building traditional report cards, Year To Date Calc displays in the Web site banner. You<br />

must assign calculations and possibly assessments depending on the calculation method you<br />

selected on the General tab for which you want a cumulative year-to-date average to display in<br />

teachers' grade books. If you selected Advanced Calculations, the calculations set up on the<br />

<strong>System</strong> Calcs tab are available on the Year To Date Calc tab. If you selected Basic Calculations,<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 149


Report Cards and Interims<br />

the reporting periods set up on the Average Calcs tab and the assessments set up on the<br />

Assessments tab are available on the Year To Date Calc tab.<br />

1. If you selected Advanced Calculations as the Average Calculation Method on the General<br />

tab, on the Year To Date Calc tab in the Calculation list, select the appropriate<br />

calculation, and then proceed to step 3.<br />

Note: You can only select one calculation at a time to be used in the YTD<br />

calculation method.<br />

2. If you selected Basic Calculations as the Average Calculation Method on the General tab,<br />

in the first list, select the appropriate calculation and, in the second list, the appropriate<br />

assessment.<br />

3. Next to the Enable Year to Date calculation on teacher gradebooks option, select the<br />

check box.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

The following message displays, “It is recommended that gradebooks that use this report<br />

card be recalculated by clicking here.” See “Recalculate Grade Books.”<br />

Clicking Here Link on the Year To Date Calc Tab<br />

5. To proceed to compile the report card, click the Compile tab. If you are printing report<br />

cards, in the Web site banner, click the Template tab to proceed to format your report card<br />

template. See “Compile Report Cards.”<br />

Format Report Card Templates<br />

You can create a customized template that determines how information displays on your printed<br />

report card. If you do not choose a template size and layout option on the General tab, the<br />

Template tab does not display in the Web site banner.<br />

Numerous template pieces are available to be used with each template size and layout option. For<br />

a complete list of template pieces, see “Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates.” To format<br />

the report card as desired, you must select the appropriate template piece and assign the order<br />

in which you want it to display on the report card.<br />

If your school district requires multiple school buildings to use the same report card, you can save<br />

time by copying the template from an existing report card that uses the same template and then<br />

modifying it, as needed.<br />

1. On the Templates tab in the Option column, select the File Header template piece.<br />

150 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Note: The File Header template piece MUST be the first piece in the list, and at<br />

least, 1 must be entered in the Rows After column.<br />

2. In the Seq# column, type 10 or 100.<br />

Note: It is recommended to use sequence numbers in increments of 10 to allow<br />

new numbers to be inserted between existing numbers.<br />

3. In the Option column, select the template piece that you want to display at the top of the<br />

report card.<br />

Note: The template pieces that display in the Option column vary depending on<br />

the template size and layout option selected on the General tab.<br />

4. In the Seq# column, type a sequence number that represents the order in which the<br />

template piece should display on the report card.<br />

Template Tab on the Report Card Screen<br />

5. In the Course list, select the course to which that template piece applies.<br />

Note: All Classes is the default option. If you select nothing in the Course list it is<br />

the same as if you selected All Classes.<br />

Note: GradeBook prints a Marks template piece for each course name specified<br />

and in the sequence order assigned on the Courses tab if you select All Classes<br />

or blank in the Course list. To ensure courses display in the desired order and<br />

column format on the report card, select an individual course to be used with a<br />

Marks template piece.<br />

6. While formatting the report card template, you may perform any of the following optional<br />

steps:<br />

• To apply the desired font to the text in the Font column, select one of the following<br />

options:<br />

• Arial<br />

• Times<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 151


Report Cards and Interims<br />

• Verdana<br />

• To apply a point size, in the Size column, select a point size option.<br />

Note: The default point size is 10; however, sizes range from 2 to 20 points.<br />

• To apply bold to the text, in the B column, click the check box.<br />

• To apply italic to the text, in the i column, click the check box.<br />

• In the Rows After column, type a number that represents the number of blank lines to<br />

display after each template piece. The default number of rows after is 1.<br />

Note: You may adjust the number of rows between template pieces as you<br />

modify the report card.<br />

Note: It is not recommended to enter 0 in the Rows After column when using any<br />

of the Marks template pieces that span multiple columns or multiple pages.<br />

• To display the teacher’s last name next to the course name, above the Save button,<br />

in the Print Teacher Names option, select the check box.<br />

Seq# Column on the Template Tab<br />

7. To continue building the report card template, repeat step 3 through step 6 to add<br />

template pieces, as needed.<br />

8. Select the Page Break template piece.<br />

Note: The Page Break template piece MUST be the last piece in the list to allow<br />

separation between student’s report cards.<br />

9. Click Save.<br />

10. To view the report card layout, click the Preview link.<br />

11. On the File Download window, click Open to view the template in a separate browser<br />

window, or click Save to save the report card file on your hard drive or server.<br />

Note: A blank page displays in the rtf file in Preview mode but does not actually<br />

print.<br />

12. Review the report card layout, and then close the report card preview window.<br />

152 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Report Card in RTF Format Example – Page 1<br />

Report Card in RTF Format Example – Page 2<br />

13. On the Template tab, make any necessary adjustments to the template, and review the<br />

report card layout as many times as is necessary.<br />

Note: You can preview a report card at any time without opening it from the<br />

Report Cards screen by clicking<br />

in the Actions column.<br />

14. In the Web site banner, click Mappings to proceed to associate assessments with the<br />

appropriate mapping identifiers.<br />

Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting Periods<br />

To instruct GradeBook where the appropriate place is to put calculated attendance assessments,<br />

comments and End of Year Placement assessments on the report card, you must associate the<br />

specific assessment with a mapping identifier for each reporting period. The mapping identifier is<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 153


Report Cards and Interims<br />

a code in the report card template that places the assessment in the appropriate template piece<br />

on the report card. By default, all course assessments are printed in the marks template piece. If<br />

you use letter or word recognition template pieces, you must map the letter/word assessments to<br />

the template pieces.<br />

1. On the Mappings tab, if you are creating traditional report cards, proceed to step 2. If you<br />

are creating standards-based report cards, in the Course list, select the appropriate<br />

course that includes the assessments to be mapped.<br />

2. In the Quarter/Reporting Period list, select the appropriate mapping identifier for each<br />

assessment. For example, you may select #Absent1# for the Days Absent assessment in<br />

the Quarter 1 list, #Absent2# in the Quarter 2 list, etc.<br />

Note: Mapping identifier options vary depending on the template being used.<br />

Note: If you have created multiple comment assessments, you can associate the<br />

same mapping identifier for multiple comment assessments in a class in a<br />

reporting period.<br />

3. Click Save.<br />

Mappings Tab on the Report Card Screen<br />

4. To continue associating assessments with mapping identifiers in the same course, repeat<br />

step 2 through step 3.<br />

5. In the remaining courses, continue associating assessments with mapping identifiers<br />

until you have associated assessments with mapping identifiers for all the courses that<br />

display on the report card.<br />

6. If you are creating standards-based report cards, in the Web site banner, click Messages<br />

to proceed to add messages to your report card.<br />

Add Messages to Report Cards<br />

You may add custom text that appears on all students’ report cards such as an explanation of the<br />

grades used, a message to the parents from the school district or simply the report card title. The<br />

numbered message fields on this screen correspond to the numbered message template pieces<br />

used on the Template tab.<br />

1. On the Messages tab in the Message fields, type your desired descriptions, as needed:<br />

154 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Report Cards and Interims<br />

• Report Card Title – Text entered displays as part of the School Header template<br />

piece.<br />

• Message fields – Text entered displays with the corresponding numbered Message<br />

template piece.<br />

• Additional Mark Explanations – Text entered displays with Index template piece.<br />

Note: To force a line feed or line break at the end of a line of text, enter the .rtf<br />

code { \par}. Ensure to include the opening and closing brackets { } around the<br />

code to prevent errors.<br />

2. Click Save.<br />

Messages Tab on the Report Card Screen<br />

3. In the Web site banner, click the Preview link to ensure the message text entered displays<br />

on the correct area of the report card.<br />

Note: The corresponding Message template piece must be added in the<br />

appropriate order on the Messages tab for the message to appear on the printed<br />

report card.<br />

4. In the Web site banner, click Compile to proceed to compile the report card.<br />

Compile Report Cards<br />

The report card or interim must be compiled successfully before teachers can use it to enter<br />

grades on the Report Card Entry screen. GradeBook runs numerous verifications to ensure the<br />

report card is set up properly. Once the report card has been compiled, each time it is changed,<br />

it must be recompiled. The status displays in the Compile Results column on the Report Cards<br />

screen. You can easily see if the report card contains warnings or errors.<br />

1. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link.<br />

The compiled report card or interim displays in a separate browser window listing any<br />

warnings or errors that were detected during compilation. A reference number displays<br />

next to the description of each warning or error. This reference number is used for<br />

troubleshooting purposes by GradeBook Support personnel. The following warnings<br />

and/or errors may occur:<br />

• Warning – Potential errors were found during compilation, but teachers can use the<br />

report card to enter grades on the Report Card Entry screen. It is recommended to<br />

investigate the warnings and try to correct any issues.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 155


Report Cards and Interims<br />

• Critical error – Errors were found during compilation that prevent the report card<br />

from displaying and teachers from entering grades on the Report Card Entry screen<br />

until they are corrected.<br />

• Severe error – Errors were found during compilation that prevent teachers from<br />

entering grades on the Report Card Entry screen until they are corrected.<br />

If there are no warnings or errors, the following message displays. “Congratulations, no<br />

errors were found! The report card compiled successfully.” Proceed with step 7.<br />

2. If there are any warnings or errors, review the description, and then click the Go link.<br />

Error and Warning Messages after Compile<br />

The screen where the issue occurred that caused the warning or error displays behind the<br />

Compiled Report Card/Interim screen.<br />

3. Troubleshoot the issue(s), as needed.<br />

4. Return to the Compiled Report Card/Interim screen, and then click Refresh.<br />

If the warning or error was corrected, it does not display in the list. Proceed with step 5. If<br />

the warning or error was not corrected, repeat step 2 through step 4 until the issue is<br />

corrected. If you cannot correct the issue, follow your appropriate GradeBook support<br />

channel.<br />

5. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link again.<br />

6. If the report card compiled without critical or severe errors, close the Compile Report<br />

Card/Interim screen.<br />

7. On the Web site banner, click the General tab.<br />

8. In the Select the report card mode option, select Active to make the report card available<br />

to teachers to enter grades.<br />

9. Click Save.<br />

10. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link for the final time.<br />

11. Close the Compile Report Card/Interim screen.<br />

Note: If you have to make changes to a report card in Active mode, you must first<br />

change the report card mode to Testing.<br />

156 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Report Cards and Interims<br />

Note: You can compile a report card without opening it on the Report Cards<br />

screen by clicking the Compile All Active Changed Report Cards link or by clicking<br />

in the Actions column.<br />

Set Up Multiple Grade Books for Standards-Based Report<br />

Cards<br />

If your district uses standards-based report cards, at the beginning of the school year you can set<br />

up teachers' grade books to automatically apply the Grading Scale Custom Setup 2 option. This<br />

can help prevent mistakes in the grading scale process and the problems than can happen as a<br />

result. You can use the Grade Book Configuration Utility to do the following actions:<br />

• Set the Grading Scale Setup option to Custom Setup 2 for all classes that are associated<br />

with the courses attached to the specified report card on the Courses tab. By default, this<br />

utility will only change the setup of classes that have not yet been changed from the<br />

Default Grading Scale Setup option.<br />

• Set the report card option within the Custom Setup 2 configuration for these classes to<br />

the report card for which the utility is run.<br />

• Set the grading scales and default calculations selected on the Assessments tab in the<br />

specified report card for each class based on the course to which it is associated. Also,<br />

you have the option to select near the bottom of the screen the default assessment,<br />

which will be used when running the GradeBook Configuration Utility.<br />

Note: The assessments that appear on the Assessments tab in the Default<br />

Assessment drop-down list are assessments that are selected on the<br />

Requirements tab.<br />

The utility will use all of the following logic to determine which classes it configures to the Custom<br />

Setup 2 grading scale option:<br />

• Standard settings include only classes that remain on the default grading scale option,<br />

meaning the teacher has not yet attempted to the grading scale configuration.<br />

• If the Override option is selected in the utility, it will reset classes that have already been<br />

set up to a grading scale option.<br />

• Only classes associated with the courses that are associated with the course groups for<br />

that report card.<br />

• A course group must have at least one assessment that has a default grading scale set.<br />

The following tips may be useful when using the Grade Book Configuration Utility:<br />

• The utility can be run again with the default settings to set up newly added classes or to<br />

add new report card assessments that were added to the report card after initial<br />

configuration.<br />

• The utility would need to be run with the Override option on if a change was made to an<br />

existing report card assessment and you wanted to update teachers’ grade books.<br />

Although, this would result in resetting any changes teachers may have made to their<br />

grading scales and/or calculation methods.<br />

After the utility has been run to set up teachers’ grade books, it can be run again to set up new<br />

classes that have been added to the system or to add Assessments and their respective grading<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 157


Report Cards and Interims<br />

scales and calculations that were added to the report card. By default, this subsequent use of the<br />

utility will not affect classes that have already been set up.<br />

If the report card is set to not allow school administrators to update the report card setup, then<br />

users with the School Administrator privileges cannot use the Grade Book Configuration Utility.<br />

Make sure the report card is set to Elementary and Active before you begin.<br />

1. On Report Cards screen in the Actions column, click for the report card being<br />

configured.<br />

2. On the Standards Based Grade Book Configuration Utility window, to simply set up<br />

teachers' grade books that were not previously set up to use the Grading Scale Custom<br />

Setup 2 option or to add new assessments to report cards already being used in teacher's<br />

grade books, click Configure Grade Books.<br />

A message displays when the configuration has been completed successfully.<br />

3. To update modified assessments for report cards already being used in teachers' grade<br />

books, select Override the teachers' grade book setup, and then click Configure Grade<br />

Books.<br />

Any grading scales and calculation methods teachers had selected manually will be<br />

overridden.<br />

4. Close the Standards Based Grade Book Configuration Utility window.<br />

Override the teacher’s grade book setup Option on the Grade Book<br />

Configuration Utility Window<br />

Copy Report Cards<br />

If your school district requires multiple school buildings to use the same report card, you can save<br />

time by copying an existing report card and then modifying it as needed.<br />

1. On the Report Card screen in the Actions column, click next to the report card you<br />

want to copy.<br />

The copied report card displays in the next row with (Copy) appended to the name.<br />

158 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Report Cards and Interims<br />

2. Next the copied report card, click to open it.<br />

3. On the General tab in the Enter a name for the report card field, change the name.<br />

4. On the this tab, continue to make any necessary changes to the report card.<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

6. In the Report Card Builder on the other tabs, continue to make any necessary changes.<br />

Delete Report Cards<br />

You may delete a report card if you make a mistake while you are building it or have an unwanted<br />

copy of a report card. If the report card has been used, you must first delete the marks associated<br />

with it in the Student Report Mark table in the GradeBook database. Then you can return to<br />

GradeBook to delete the report card. If you are not familiar with working with the Student Report<br />

Mark table, contact your appropriate GradeBook support channel for further assistance.<br />

1. On the Report Card screen, click next to the report card you want to delete to open it.<br />

2. On the Report Card Screen near the bottom of the screen, click the Delete link.<br />

3. On the Confirmation window, click OK.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 159


Report Cards and Interims<br />

This page intentionally left blank.<br />

160 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


General Maintenance<br />

This chapter will assist you with the set up of your district’s data integration system and associating<br />

district grade levels to state grade levels. In addition, you will learn how to check your district’s<br />

current software version, recalculate grade books, permanently delete students as well as update<br />

your email address and change your password.<br />

Check Software Version<br />

You can view the most current GradeBook software version.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Tools, click Check Software Version.<br />

On the Software Version screen, the first three digits that display under the Website<br />

Version represent the version of the software application that your district is currently<br />

using. For example, 7.1.2 is the current Website Version in “Software Version Screen.”<br />

The subsequent numbers are meaningful only to GradeBook staff.<br />

The Database Upgrade History displays all of the versions and dates that have been<br />

installed to the GradeBook database.<br />

Software Version Screen<br />

2. Review the screen, and to return to the Administrator Home Page, click Home.<br />

Recalculate Grade Books<br />

GradeBook calculates teacher grade books automatically by default. However, it may be<br />

necessary to recalculate teacher grade books manually, if for example, changes are made to<br />

grading scales.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Tools, click Recalculate Gradebooks.<br />

2. On the ReCalculate Gradebooks screen in the School list, select the appropriate school.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 161


General Maintenance<br />

3. In the Period list, select the appropriate reporting period.<br />

4. In the Scale list, select the appropriate grading scale.<br />

ReCalculate Gradebooks Screen<br />

5. Click ReCalculate.<br />

The Gradebook Calculation Progress window displays showing a progress bar of the<br />

percentage complete.<br />

Gradebook Calculation Progress<br />

Window<br />

Note: When the grade books are recalculating, users can navigate to other<br />

screens in GradeBook as long as the progress window remains open; however,<br />

users cannot recalculate another school, scale or period while grade books are<br />

recalculating.<br />

Note: Recalculation could take several minutes depending on the number of<br />

teacher grade books being recalculated and the speed of your network<br />

connection.<br />

Delete Students<br />

The Delete Students option allows you to delete numerous students at once or individually from<br />

GradeBook. This option permanently deletes all data associated with a student, so you must<br />

carefully review the classes, assignment marks, report card marks, forms and homeroom<br />

attendance marks before deleting. Many different search options are available to assist in finding<br />

the correct students to delete.<br />

162 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Delete Students Individually<br />

General Maintenance<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Tools, click Delete Students.<br />

2. On the Delete Students screen, search for the student whom you want to delete.<br />

a. In the School list, select the appropriate school building, and then click Search.<br />

A list of all the students in the entire school displays if you do not enter any<br />

information in the Grade, HR, ID or Last Name fields.<br />

b. To narrow the search results, perform any of the following optional steps:<br />

• In the Grade list, select the grade level of the student for whom you are searching.<br />

• In the HR list, select the homeroom of the student for whom you are searching.<br />

• In the ID list, type the student’s identification number.<br />

• In the Last name field, type the student’s last name or partial last name for whom<br />

you are searching.<br />

A list of students displays that matches the search criteria entered. If the student has<br />

Special Services forms, displays next to the student’s name. You can place your<br />

cursor over the icon to view the number of forms associated with the student.<br />

3. In the Delete? column, click the check box for the student(s) you want to delete.<br />

Note: If you select the Delete option for a student with SpecialServices forms, a<br />

warning icon appears. When you hover over the icon, the “This student has SpS<br />

form(s)” tooltip displays.<br />

Delete? Column on the Delete Students Screen<br />

4. Click Review student activity before deleting.<br />

Note: For students with SpecialServices forms, the “**Warning: The student(s)<br />

you have selected has SpecialServices forms.**” message displays.<br />

5. Review the student’s activity, and then click Delete Students.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 163


General Maintenance<br />

6. On the confirmation window, click OK.<br />

Review Students Before Deleting<br />

Confirmation Message for Deleting Students<br />

Mass Delete Students<br />

You may delete students in GradeBook, but when you do, all the data associated with the students<br />

is also deleted from the system. For example, you can delete all students who have graduated<br />

five years ago.<br />

To return the fewest number of students when searching for students to delete, select as many of<br />

the available options as possible in the Additional Search Criteria and Sorting Options areas.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Tools, click Delete Students.<br />

2. On the Delete Students screen in the Additional Search Criteria area on the left side of the<br />

screen in the Enrollment Status list, select the appropriate code.<br />

3. In one or more of the following lists, select greater than (>), less than (


General Maintenance<br />

• HR<br />

• ID<br />

• Last <strong>System</strong> Update<br />

• Name<br />

• School<br />

• Withdrawal Date<br />

7. Click Search.<br />

A list of students displays that matches the search criteria entered. If the student has<br />

Special Services forms, displays next to the student’s name. You can place your<br />

cursor over the icon to view the number of forms associated with the student.<br />

8. On the Delete Students screen in the Delete? column, click the check box of the<br />

student(s) you want to delete.<br />

Note: If you select the Delete option for a student with SpecialServices forms, a<br />

warning icon appears. When you hover over the icon, the “This student has SpS<br />

form(s)” tooltip displays.<br />

Note: On the Delete Students screen, click the Select All link to select all the<br />

students in the list to delete. Click Unselect All to deselect all the students.<br />

Select All and Unselect All Links on the Delete Students Screen<br />

9. Click Review student activity before deleting.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 165


General Maintenance<br />

Note: For students with SpecialServices forms, the “**Warning: The student(s)<br />

you have selected has SpecialServices forms.**” message displays.<br />

10. Review the student’s activity, and then click Delete Students.<br />

Delete Students Button on the Delete Students Screen<br />

11. On the confirmation window, click OK.<br />

“Students successfully deleted” Message<br />

Associate District Grade Levels with State Grade Levels<br />

Only school districts that use SpecialServices must associate state grade levels with district grade<br />

levels in GradeBook to ensure that correct state grade levels are used by SpecialServices for<br />

state reporting purposes.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, click Grade Levels.<br />

2. On the Grade Levels screen in the Edit column, click for the district grade level you<br />

want to associate.<br />

166 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


General Maintenance<br />

Grade Levels Screen<br />

3. In the Code field, enter the appropriate code.<br />

Note: You can use a two-digit numeric or two-character alphabetic reference that<br />

matches the grade level in the Code field. For example, you could enter a code of<br />

01 for grade 1 and a code of KG for Kindergarten. The codes used in the Code<br />

and Description field can be the same.<br />

4. In the Description field, enter a grade level’s description.<br />

5. In the State Grade list, select the appropriate state grade level that you want to associate<br />

with the district grade level.<br />

Note: The Transition Year refers to a student grade level that moves from one<br />

building to another building. This field is no longer used.<br />

6. Click Save.<br />

Associate District with State Grade Levels<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 167


General Maintenance<br />

7. To continue associating state grade levels with district grade levels, repeat step 2<br />

through step 6.<br />

Note: To delete an existing grade level, click in the Delete column in the<br />

appropriate row. You cannot delete an existing grade level if any data is<br />

associated with it.<br />

Update Email Address<br />

The email address you enter is used mainly for communication purposes. If you are logged into<br />

GradeBook as a teacher, the email address displays on Classic or Beta ParentAccess.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page under Tools, click Update Email Address.<br />

2. On the Update Your Email Address window in the Email Address field, type your email<br />

address.<br />

3. Click Update.<br />

4. Close the Update Your Email Address window.<br />

Update Your Email Address Window<br />

Password Authentication<br />

Your district may use Windows (Active Directory) authentication or <strong>ProgressBook</strong> (Non-Active<br />

Directory) authentication as the method of validating user identity based on a user name and<br />

password. Depending on your district’s policy, a single district may even use different<br />

authentication methods.<br />

If your GradeBook system is integrated with a student information system, the user names are<br />

imported from the student information system regardless of the authentication method used.<br />

To begin using <strong>ProgressBook</strong> authentication in your district, perform the following procedure. (For<br />

more information on password settings, see the <strong>ProgressBook</strong> CentralAdmin User <strong>Guide</strong>.)<br />

168 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Enable <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Authentication<br />

General Maintenance<br />

1. Open SQL Server Management Studio.<br />

2. In the Object Explorer pane, expand the Databases node.<br />

3. Expand the pb_master database.<br />

4. Expand the Tables node, and then open the DistrictLogin table.<br />

5. Locate the district for which you want to use <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Authentication, and type PB<br />

in the LoginMethod field.<br />

Note: If you are using Windows Authentication, type WIN in this field.<br />

DistrictLogin Table<br />

6. Click out of the row to save the changes, and close the DistrictLogin table.<br />

Change Password<br />

If your district has enabled the Staff Password Changes option, the Change Your Password link<br />

displays on your home page. <strong>ProgressBook</strong> applications recognize each user by individual login,<br />

so changing your password in GradeBook changes your password in all <strong>ProgressBook</strong><br />

applications.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page, click Change Your Password.<br />

The CentralAdmin Change Password screen displays.<br />

2. On the Change Password screen, in the Current Password field, enter your current<br />

password.<br />

Note: For <strong>ProgressBook</strong> authenticated accounts, by default, password<br />

requirements are eight characters with at least one uppercase letter, one<br />

lowercase letter, one number and one special character; however, your district<br />

may have different requirements.<br />

3. In the New Password field, enter your new password.<br />

4. In the Confirm New Password field, re-enter your new password.<br />

5. Click Change Password.<br />

The system returns you to the Administrator Home Page.<br />

Note: For <strong>ProgressBook</strong> authenticated users, by default, you must wait 360 days<br />

to reuse a password; however, your district may have different requirements. If<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 169


General Maintenance<br />

you enter a previously used password, the following message displays: “You<br />

cannot set the password to a previously used password.”<br />

Note: For Windows authenticated users, contact your Windows administrator for<br />

reuse requirements.<br />

Note: If you enter your current password as your new password, the following<br />

message displays: “The new password cannot be the same as the old password.”<br />

Change a Password<br />

Use GradeBook Help<br />

GradeBook Help provides overview, procedural and reference information about GradeBook. You<br />

can click the Help link in the upper-right corner on any GradeBook screen to view the help topic<br />

related to the screen you are viewing. GradeBook Help displays in a separate browser window<br />

where you can browse the Table of Contents for specific topic titles, search the Index by using<br />

170 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


General Maintenance<br />

keywords or type a word or phrase in the Search field to return a list of related help topics. You<br />

can print any help topic by clicking<br />

located in the Navigation pane.<br />

Table of Contents and Help Topic in GradeBook Help<br />

Enable Default District ID Setting<br />

The network or server administrator can enable or disable at any time the ability to automatically<br />

populate the District ID field on the Login screen with the last district ID that was entered by a user<br />

when logging into GradeBook.<br />

The application settings configuration file (appSettings.config) contains GradeBook Web site<br />

configuration parameters required by ASP.NET pages including automatic population of the<br />

district ID field setting described as follows. This file is located in the config subdirectory of the root<br />

directory of the GradeBook Web application. Any changes you make to the appSettings.config file<br />

affects all GradeBook user accounts in all districts.<br />

1. On the Web server, in the \config folder, open appSettings.config.<br />

2. To enable automatic population of the District ID field, locate the remember_district_id<br />

property, as shown in the following example, and change the value to yes. The default<br />

value is yes.<br />

<br />

3. Save and close appSettings.config.<br />

4. Restart IIS.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 171


General Maintenance<br />

This page intentionally left blank.<br />

172 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Reports<br />

A variety of Classic and Report Builder reports are available on the Administrator Home Page from<br />

the Run a Report list. Depending on what type of grading scale setup, such as Default, Custom<br />

Setup 1 or Custom Setup 2, is used in teachers’ classes determines if you can use a Classic or<br />

Report Builder report. “Types of Reports and Corresponding Grading Scale Setups” displays the<br />

type of reports that will work with which type of grading scale setup.<br />

Types of Reports and Corresponding Grading Scale Setups<br />

Report<br />

Default and Custom<br />

Setup 1<br />

Classic Reports<br />

Daily <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Attendance Yes Yes<br />

Ineligibility Report Yes Yes<br />

Lunch Counts Yes Yes<br />

Period Attendance Yes Yes<br />

Period Attendance Audit Yes Yes<br />

Parent Access Login Activity Audit Yes Yes<br />

Posted Homework & Marks To Web<br />

Audit<br />

Yes<br />

No<br />

Report Card Verification Yes Yes<br />

Report Cards Yes Yes<br />

Staff Attendance Audit Yes Yes<br />

View Saved Reports Yes Yes<br />

Report Builder Reports<br />

Class Assignment Marks Admin Yes Yes<br />

Homework and Marks Posted to Parent<br />

Access Admin<br />

Yes<br />

Yes<br />

Report Card Marks Admin Yes Yes<br />

Section Info Meeting Times Yes Yes<br />

Student Daily Attendance Yes Yes<br />

Student Demographics Yes Yes<br />

Student Section Enrollment Yes Yes<br />

YTD (Year to Date) Final Grade Admin Yes No<br />

Custom Setup 2<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 173


Reports<br />

Report Builder Reports<br />

This section describes how to generate user-defined Report Builder reports through the selection<br />

of numerous filter options as well as numerous column options for displaying reports results. Once<br />

you have selected the desired settings, you can save the report with those settings and<br />

individualized name to use in the future. For information on managing Report Builder reports and<br />

users’ access to the reports, as well as guidelines on creating custom reports in Microsoft SQL<br />

Server Report Builder 2.0 for use in GradeBook, refer to the <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Report Builder<br />

Management <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

The following Report Builder reports are available to users with master and school administrator<br />

privileges on the Administrator Home Page:<br />

• Class Assignment Marks Admin – For Default and Custom Setup 1 teachers’ classes,<br />

the report displays class assignment mark information for individual or multiple teachers’<br />

classes in individual or multiple reporting periods, and for Custom Setup 2 teachers’<br />

classes, it displays class assignment assessment mark information for individual or<br />

multiple teachers’ classes in individual or multiple reporting periods.<br />

• Homework and Marks Posted to Parent Access Admin – Displays assignments and<br />

assignment types for a school grouped by teacher and class within a date range with an<br />

indication of whether or not marks are posted to Classic and Beta ParentAccess.<br />

• Report Card Marks Admin –Provides numerous options for presenting report card<br />

information for individual or multiple teachers’ class(es). While this report is designed<br />

similarly to secondary report cards, it can also be used to view report card grades for<br />

elementary classes. For example, you can apply specific filter options to create a report<br />

that displays students with grades above or below a grade threshold.<br />

• Section Info Meeting Times – Displays class records for individual or multiple schools in<br />

the Sif tables and in <strong>ProgressBook</strong> tables, if the data exists.<br />

• Student Daily Attendance – Displays student and daily attendance records for<br />

individual or multiple schools in the Sif tables and in <strong>ProgressBook</strong> tables, if the data<br />

exists.<br />

• Student Demographics – Provides numerous options for displaying student<br />

demographic information for individual or multiple teachers’ classes, class groups or<br />

homerooms.<br />

• Student Section Enrollment – Displays students’ class records for individual or multiple<br />

schools in the Sif tables and in <strong>ProgressBook</strong> tables, if the data exists.<br />

• YTD Final Grade Admin – Provides numerous options for displaying year to date grade<br />

information for students in a teacher’s class or class group. The YTD Final Grade Report<br />

can only be used on classes where the YTD Grade calculation has been enabled on the<br />

report card for the class. This report cannot be used on classes using standards-based<br />

grading.<br />

Naming conventions for reporting periods such as Quarter, Period, Marking Period, Grading<br />

Period, etc., on the Report Viewer screen are defined by the school district.<br />

The appearance of this icon<br />

in the top right corner of the banner indicates that the report is<br />

a core report—provided by <strong>ProgressBook</strong>—or a user-defined version of a core report. This icon<br />

does not display for add-on reports—reports that have been customized and then uploaded by<br />

your support staff.<br />

174 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Reports<br />

Once you have generated the report, numerous features are available as shown in “Report Builder<br />

Report Options.”<br />

Feature<br />

Report Builder Report Options<br />

Description<br />

Click this icon to view the report.<br />

Click this icon to view the report.<br />

Click this icon to show report headers, required parameters, optional filters and<br />

columns.<br />

Click this icon to hide report headers, required parameters, optional filters and<br />

columns.<br />

Click this icon to save the report with the selected parameters, filters and<br />

columns, type the unique report name in the New report name field and click<br />

Save.<br />

Click this icon to navigate to a specific student on the report. This icon opens the<br />

Document Map pane where you can choose a student’s name. This feature is<br />

only available when using Internet Explorer.<br />

Click this icon to navigate to the next page in the report.<br />

Click this icon to navigate to the last page in the report.<br />

Click this icon to navigate to the previous page.<br />

Click this icon to navigate to the first page.<br />

Type the page number in the field, and then press .<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 175


Reports<br />

Feature<br />

Report Builder Report Options<br />

Description<br />

Select the desired percentage in the list that represents the display size. This<br />

feature is only available when using Internet Explorer.<br />

Type the word or phrase in the blank field next to Find, and click Find. Click Next<br />

to search for next instance of the word or phrase. This feature is only available<br />

when using Internet Explorer.<br />

Select the desired format in the list, and click Export. When prompted, click either<br />

Open or Save. If you select Open, the report opens in the software application<br />

associated with the file format you selected. You must have the appropriate<br />

application installed on your computer to read and modify the report file. The<br />

following file formats are available:<br />

• XML File with Report Data – Extensible Markup Language file format viewed<br />

in a Web browser with only data; there is no page formatting, headers, footers,<br />

lines or graphic images.<br />

• CSV – Comma-separated values file format in plain text format.<br />

• Acrobat (PDF) File – Portable document file format than can be viewed in<br />

Adobe Reader but not edited.<br />

• MHTML (Web Archive) – Short for MIME HTML file format and also referred to<br />

as MHT. This is a Web page archive format used to bind images, Flash<br />

animations, Java applets, audio files, etc., together with HTML code into a<br />

single file. This file format can be viewed in a Web browser and is supported in<br />

the following browser versions: Internet Explorer 5.5 and later, Firefox 1.5 and<br />

later and Safari 3.0 and later.<br />

• Excel – Format provides full functionality of Microsoft Excel.<br />

• TIFF – Large graphic file format that may take longer to open than other file<br />

types and cannot be edited.<br />

• Word – Format provides full functionality of Microsoft Word.<br />

Click this icon to print the report. If prompted to install SQL Server Reporting<br />

Services 2008 ActiveX control, continue to install it on the computer, so you can<br />

print the report. The print feature is only available when using Internet Explorer. If<br />

you are not able to install the ActiveX control, proceed to export the report to an<br />

acceptable file format, and then print the report from that software application.<br />

Click this icon to sort the columns in ascending or descending order.<br />

Click this icon to delete any report you have customized. Click this icon under the<br />

report name in the Reports list on the Class Dashboard or Teacher Home Page.<br />

176 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Class Assignment Marks Admin Report<br />

Reports<br />

For Default and Custom Setup 1 teachers’ classes, the report displays class assignment mark<br />

information for individual or multiple teachers’ classes in individual or multiple reporting periods,<br />

and for Custom Setup 2 teachers’ classes, it displays class assignment assessment mark<br />

information for individual or multiple teachers’ classes in individual or multiple reporting<br />

periods.This report is available to users with master, school administrator, school support and<br />

principal privileges. Users logged in with School Support privileges, must access the report from<br />

the Principal Home Page.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page in the Run a Report list, select Class Assignment<br />

Marks Admin, and then click Run.<br />

2. On the GradeBook Report Viewer window, enter the name of the report in the Report<br />

Header field. Class Assignment Marks displays by default, but you may change the name,<br />

if desired.<br />

3. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate teacher(s) in the Teacher(s)<br />

list.<br />

Note: For users logged in with school administrator, school support or principal<br />

privileges, only the teachers in the school buildings to which you have access<br />

display in the list. For users logged in with master privileges, all the teachers in all<br />

the school buildings display.<br />

Note: If there are no available choices in which to select, then No teacher<br />

available displays with a red background.<br />

4. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate reporting period(s) in the<br />

Reporting Period(s) list.<br />

Note: If there are no available choices from which to select, then No reporting<br />

period available displays with a red background.<br />

5. Select one of the following Include Hidden Student(s) options:<br />

• Yes – Include students that have been hidden from a teacher's class roster.<br />

• No – Do not include students that have been hidden from a teacher's class roster.<br />

6. In the Set Optional Filters area, select the appropriate option(s) in the Field Name list. See<br />

“Class Assignment Marks Admin Report – Field Name Options” for descriptions of all the<br />

available options.<br />

7. Select one of the following options in the Operation list if it is available. The available<br />

options may vary depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list.<br />

• Is Equal To<br />

• Is Not Equal To<br />

• Is Less Than<br />

• Is Less Than or Equal To<br />

• Is Greater Than<br />

• Is Greater Than or Equal To<br />

• Is Before<br />

• Is Before or On<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 177


Reports<br />

• Is After<br />

• Is After or On<br />

• Begins With<br />

• Does Not Begin With<br />

• Ends With<br />

• Does Not End With<br />

• Contains<br />

• Does Not Contain<br />

• Has A Value<br />

• Does Not Have A Value<br />

8. Type the appropriate value in the Value field.<br />

Note: The available options and acceptable values vary depending on the option<br />

you selected in the Field Name list. You may be able to enter only alphabetical or<br />

only numeric characters depending on the option you selected in the Field Name<br />

list. If you selected an option in the Field Name list that ends in “Indicator,” then<br />

you must select the Yes or No option in the Value field. If you selected an option<br />

in the Field Name list that requires a date, a calendar becomes available in the<br />

Value field. If you selected Has a Value or Does Not Have a Value in the<br />

Operation list, then the Value field is not available.<br />

Class Assignment Marks Admin Report<br />

9. Specific selected columns indicated by a check mark display on the report by default. If<br />

you have selected specific filter options in the Field Name list and you want that<br />

information to display on the report, make sure to select the corresponding column name<br />

in the Columns list. Options in the Field Name list that end in “Indicator” do not have a<br />

corresponding column to display.<br />

10. Click View Report.<br />

The report displays at the bottom of the window.<br />

178 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Reports<br />

Note: The field or list displays red indicating an unacceptable value was entered<br />

or a required field was left blank.<br />

11. To save the report with your selected parameters, filters and columns, click Save<br />

Setup As. On the Save Setup As window in the New report name field, type the unique<br />

report name, and in the New description field, type the description of the report. Then,<br />

click Save.<br />

The following message displays at the bottom of the window, “Report setup saved<br />

successfully.”<br />

Assigned Date<br />

Class Assignment Marks Admin Report – Field Name Options<br />

Option<br />

Description<br />

Assignment Missing Indicator<br />

Assignment Missing Status<br />

Name<br />

Assignment Name<br />

Assignment Past Due Indicator<br />

Assignment Past Due Status<br />

Name<br />

Assignment Type Code<br />

Assignment Type Name<br />

Assignment Type Weight<br />

Assignment Weight<br />

Class Enrollment Status Name<br />

Class Name<br />

Due Date<br />

Exclude Mark from Class<br />

Indicator<br />

Exclude Mark from Class Status<br />

Name<br />

Exclude Mark from Student<br />

Indicator<br />

Exclude Mark from Student<br />

Status Name<br />

Grade Level Name<br />

Date the assignment was assigned.<br />

Indicates whether the assignment is missing. If you select this<br />

option, you must select Yes or No in the Value field.<br />

Indicates whether the assignment is missing. If you select this<br />

option, you must type Missing in the Value field.<br />

Name of the assignment.<br />

Indicates whether the assignment is late. If you select this option,<br />

you must select Yes or No in the Value field.<br />

Indicates whether the assignment is late. If you select this option,<br />

you must type Past Due in the Value field.<br />

Code representing the assignment type associated with the<br />

assignment.<br />

Assignment type associated with the assignment.<br />

Weight of the assignment type associated with the assignment.<br />

Weight of the assignment.<br />

Indicates whether the student is active in the class. If you select<br />

this option, you must type Active, Withdrawn or Future in the<br />

Value field.<br />

Name of class in which the student is enrolled. If no class name<br />

is assigned, then course name and section display.<br />

Date the assignment is due.<br />

Indicates the assignment was excluded from students' averages<br />

for the entire class. If you select this option, you must select Yes<br />

or No in the Value field.<br />

Indicates the assignment was excluded from students' averages<br />

for the entire class. If you select this option, you must type<br />

Exclude in the Value field.<br />

Indicates the assignment was excluded from an individual<br />

student's average. If you select this option, you must select Yes<br />

or No in the Value field.<br />

Indicates the assignment was excluded from an individual<br />

student's average. If you select this option, you must type<br />

Exclude in the Value field.<br />

Grade level in which the student is enrolled.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 179


Reports<br />

HomeRoom ID<br />

Mark Comment<br />

Mark Earned<br />

Mark Letter Grade<br />

Mark Value<br />

Possible Points<br />

Reporting Period Long Name<br />

Reporting Period Short Name<br />

Roster Order<br />

Student Assignment Type<br />

Average<br />

Student Assignment Type Mark<br />

Student Group Name<br />

Student Hidden Indicator<br />

Student Hidden Status Name<br />

Student ID<br />

Student Name<br />

Student Reporting Period<br />

Average<br />

Student Reporting Period Mark<br />

Teacher Names<br />

Class Assignment Marks Admin Report – Field Name Options<br />

Option<br />

Description<br />

Code that identifies the homeroom to which the student is<br />

assigned.<br />

Comment made by the teacher about the assignment.<br />

Mark given by the teacher for the assignment.<br />

Letter grade equivalent to the mark earned on the assignment<br />

based on the grading scale used.<br />

Numeric mark equivalent to the mark earned on the assignment<br />

based on the GUI option of the mark type used by assignment<br />

type for that assignment.<br />

Total value of the assignment.<br />

Name of the reporting period, which is based on the Term Begin<br />

and Term End dates, specified on the Reporting Periods screen.<br />

Short name of the reporting period as specified on the Reporting<br />

Periods screen and used in the Grading Period list on the Class<br />

Dashboard and Report Card Entry screen.<br />

Order in which the class was assigned on the Class Roster<br />

screen.<br />

Average of the assignment type associated with assignment.<br />

Mark equivalent to the average of the assignment type<br />

associated with assignment.<br />

Name of student group within a class.<br />

Indicates the student is hidden in the class. If you select this<br />

option, you must select Yes or No in the Value field.<br />

Indicates the student is hidden in the class. If you select this<br />

option, you must type Hidden in the Value field.<br />

District code that identifies the student.<br />

Full name of the student.<br />

Student's average in the class in the reporting period.<br />

Mark equivalent to the student's average in the class in the<br />

reporting period.<br />

Name of the primary teacher associated with the class.<br />

Homework and Marks Posted to Parent Access Admin Report<br />

The Homework and Marks Posted to Parent Access Admin Report displays assignments and<br />

assignment types for a school grouped by teacher and class within a date range with an indication<br />

of whether or not marks are posted to Classic and Beta ParentAccess.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page in the Run a Report list, select Homework and Marks<br />

Posted to Parent Access Admin, and then click Run.<br />

2. In the Report Header field, enter the name of the report. Homework and Marks Posted to<br />

Parent Access - Administrative displays by default, but you may change the name if<br />

desired.<br />

180 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Reports<br />

3. In the Select Required Parameters area in the School Name list, select the appropriate<br />

school.<br />

Note: Only the schools to which you have access display in list.<br />

Note: If there are no available choices from which to select, then No school<br />

available displays with a red background.<br />

4. Click in the Start Date field, and choose a date from the calendar.<br />

5. Click in the End Date field, and choose a date from the calendar.<br />

6. In the Published Marks to Web option, select one of the following options:<br />

• Yes - Displays assignments in which marks were posted to Classic and Beta<br />

ParentAccess.<br />

• No - Displays assignments in which marks were not posted to Classic and Beta<br />

ParentAccess.<br />

7. In the Published Assignment To Homework option, select one of the following options:<br />

• Yes - Displays only classes in which homework and assignment marks were posted<br />

to Classic and Beta ParentAccess.<br />

• No - Displays only classes in which homework and assignment marks were not<br />

posted to Classic and Beta ParentAccess.<br />

8. In the Set Optional Filters area, select the appropriate option in the Field Name list. See<br />

“Homework and Marks Posted to Parent Access Admin Report – Field Name Options” for<br />

descriptions of all available options.<br />

9. Select one of the following options in the Operation list if it is available. The available<br />

options may vary depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list.<br />

• Is Equal To<br />

• Is Not Equal To<br />

• Is Before<br />

• Is Before Or On<br />

• Is After<br />

• Is After Or On<br />

• Begins With<br />

• Does Not Begin With<br />

• Ends With<br />

• Does Not End With<br />

• Contains<br />

• Does Not Contain<br />

• Has a Value<br />

• Does Not Have a Value<br />

10. Type the appropriate value in the Value field.<br />

Note: The available options and acceptable values vary depending on the option<br />

you selected in the Field Name list. You may be able to enter only alphabetical or<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 181


Reports<br />

only numeric characters depending on the option you selected in the Field Name<br />

list. If you selected an option in the Field Name list that ends in “Indicator,” then<br />

you must select the Yes or No option in the Value field. If you selected an option<br />

in the Field Name list that requires a date, a calendar becomes available in the<br />

Value field. If you selected Has a Value or Does Not Have a Value in the<br />

Operation list, then the Value field is not available.<br />

11. Click View Report.<br />

The report displays at the bottom of the window.<br />

Note: The field or list displays red indicating an unacceptable value was entered<br />

or a required field was left blank.<br />

12. To save the report with your selected parameters, filters and columns, click Save<br />

Setup As. On the Save Setup As window in the New report name field, type the unique<br />

report name, and in the New description field, type the description of the report. Then,<br />

click Save.<br />

13. The following message displays at the bottom of the window, “Report setup saved<br />

successfully.”<br />

Homework and Marks Posted to Parent Access Report Viewer Window<br />

182 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Reports<br />

Homework and Marks Posted to Parent Access Report in PDF Format<br />

Homework and Marks Posted to Parent Access Admin Report – Field Name Options<br />

Option<br />

Description<br />

Assignment Date<br />

Date of the assignment.<br />

Assignment Name<br />

Name of the assignment.<br />

Assignment Type Name<br />

Name of the assignment type.<br />

Class Name<br />

Name of the class.<br />

Due Date<br />

Date the assignment is due.<br />

Floating Indicator<br />

Indicates if this is a floating assignment.<br />

School Name<br />

Name of the school.<br />

Teacher Name<br />

Name of the teacher.<br />

Report Card Marks Admin Report<br />

The Report Card Marks Admin report provides numerous options for displaying report card mark<br />

information for individual or multiple teachers in individual or multiple reporting period(s).<br />

This report is available to users with master, school administrator, school support and principal<br />

privileges. Users logged in with School Support privileges, must access the report from the<br />

Principal Home Page.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page, select Report Card Marks Admin in the Run a Report<br />

list and then click Run.<br />

2. On the GradeBook Report Viewer window, enter the name of the report in the Report<br />

Header field.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 183


Reports<br />

Report Card Marks displays by default, but you may change the name if desired.<br />

3. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate report card in the Report<br />

Card list.<br />

Note: If there are no available choices in which to select, No report card available<br />

displays with a red background.<br />

4. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate teacher(s) in the Teachers<br />

list.<br />

Note: Only the teachers in the schools to which you have access display in the<br />

list.<br />

Note: If there are no available choices from which to select, No teacher available<br />

displays with a red background.<br />

5. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate reporting period(s) in the<br />

Reporting Period(s) list.<br />

Note: If there are no available choices in which to select, No reporting period<br />

available displays with a red background.<br />

6. Select one of the following Include Hidden Student(s) options:<br />

• Yes – Include students that have been hidden from a teacher's class roster.<br />

• No – Do not include students that have been hidden from a teacher's class roster.<br />

7. In the Set Optional Filters area, select the appropriate option(s) in the Field Name list. See<br />

“Report Card Marks Admin Report – Field Name Options” for descriptions of all the<br />

available options.<br />

8. Select one of the following options in the Operation list if it is available. The available<br />

options may vary depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list.<br />

• Is Equal To<br />

• Is Not Equal To<br />

• Is Before<br />

• Is Before or On<br />

• Is After<br />

• Is After or On<br />

• Is Less Than<br />

• Is Less Than or Equal To<br />

• Is Greater Than<br />

• Is Great Than or Equal To<br />

• Begins With<br />

• Does Not Begin With<br />

• Ends With<br />

• Does Not End With<br />

• Contains<br />

184 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Reports<br />

• Does Not Contain<br />

• Has A Value<br />

• Does Not Have A Value<br />

9. Type the appropriate value in the Value field.<br />

Note: The available options and acceptable values in the Value field may vary<br />

depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list. You may be able to<br />

enter only alphabetical or numerical characters depending on the option you<br />

selected in the Field Name list. If you selected an option in the Field Name list that<br />

ends in “Indicator,” then you must select the Yes or No option in the Value field. If<br />

you selected an option in the Field Name list that requires a date, a calendar<br />

becomes available in the Value field. If you selected Has a Value or Does Not<br />

Have a Value in the Operation list, then the Value field is not available.<br />

Note: You cannot select any columns in the Add & Remove Columns area;<br />

however, the Student Name, Course, Assessment and Reporting Period columns<br />

display by default on the report. Options in the Field Name list that end in<br />

“Indicator” do not have a corresponding column to display.<br />

Report Card Marks Admin Report<br />

10. Click View Report.<br />

The report displays at the bottom of the window.<br />

Note: The field or list displays red indicating an unacceptable value was entered<br />

or a required field was left blank.<br />

11. To save the report with your selected parameters, filters and columns, click Save<br />

Setup As. On the Save Setup As window in the New report name field, type the unique<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 185


Reports<br />

report name, and in the New description field, type the description of the report. Then,<br />

click Save.<br />

The following message displays at the bottom of the window, “Report setup saved<br />

successfully.”<br />

Assessment Name<br />

Assessment Order<br />

Birth Date<br />

Report Card Marks Admin Report – Field Name Options<br />

Option<br />

Description<br />

Class Enrollment Status Name<br />

Counselor Name<br />

Course Abbrev Name<br />

Course ID<br />

Course Name<br />

Course Short Name<br />

Course Ungraded Indicator<br />

Enrollment Date<br />

Enrollment Status Code<br />

Exclude from Parent Access<br />

Indicator<br />

Gender Code<br />

Interim End Date<br />

Mark<br />

Mark Point Value<br />

Parent Access Disabled Indicator<br />

Reporting Period Calculation<br />

Code<br />

Reporting Period End Date<br />

Name of assessment as it displays on the report card.<br />

Order in which the assessment is displayed on the report card.<br />

Date of birth of the student.<br />

Indicates whether the student is active in the class. If you select<br />

this option, you must type Active, Withdrawn or Future option in<br />

the Value field.<br />

Name of the guidance counselor assigned to the student.<br />

Abbreviation of course name as specified on the Update Course<br />

window.<br />

District identification code that represents the course.<br />

Name of course as specified on the Update Course window.<br />

Short name of course as specified on the Update Course<br />

window.<br />

Indicates whether the course is ungraded as specified on the<br />

Update Course window. Usually study halls and lunch are<br />

specified as ungraded courses. If you select this option, you<br />

must select Yes or No in the Value field.<br />

Date on which the student enrolled in the school.<br />

Code that represents whether the student is active or inactive in<br />

the school in which the student is enrolled.<br />

Indicates whether or not the report card has been designated to<br />

display in Classic and Beta ParentAccess. If you select this<br />

option, you must select Yes or No in the Value field.<br />

Code that represents whether a student is female or male.<br />

Last date of the interim as specified on the Reporting Periods<br />

screen.<br />

Grade entered for an assessment on the Report Card Entry<br />

screen.<br />

Numeric mark point equivalent to the grade entered for an<br />

assessment on the Report Card Entry screen based on the<br />

grading scale selected for the report card.<br />

Indicates whether the student's information has been disabled<br />

Classic and Beta ParentAccess . If a parent account is<br />

associated with multiple student accounts, the parent account<br />

can still access the other student accounts. If you select this<br />

option, you must select Yes or No in the Value field.<br />

Code that represents the calculation method selected for each<br />

grade calculation method as specified on the <strong>System</strong> Calcs tab<br />

in the Report Card Builder.<br />

Last date of the reporting period as specified on the Reporting<br />

Periods screen.<br />

186 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Reports<br />

Reporting Period Name<br />

Reporting Period Order<br />

Reporting Period Short Name<br />

Reporting Period Start Date<br />

Reporting Period Type Code<br />

Staff ID<br />

Student First Name<br />

Student ID<br />

Student Last Name<br />

Student Middle Name<br />

Student Name<br />

Teacher First Name<br />

Teacher Last Name<br />

Teacher Name<br />

Report Card Marks Admin Report – Field Name Options<br />

Option<br />

Description<br />

Name of the reporting period as specified on the Reporting<br />

Periods screen.<br />

Order in which the reporting periods display on the report card as<br />

specified on the Periods tab in the Report Card Builder.<br />

Short name of the reporting period as specified on the Reporting<br />

Periods screen and used in the Grading Period list on the Class<br />

Dashboard and Report Card Entry screen.<br />

First date of the reporting period as specified on the Reporting<br />

Periods screen.<br />

Code that indicates whether Gradebook Range was selected for<br />

the reporting period as specified on the Reporting Periods<br />

screen. Reporting periods that display in the Grading Period list<br />

on the Class Dashboard are set as Gradebook Range.<br />

District code that identifies the staff user account.<br />

First name of the student.<br />

District code that identifies the student.<br />

Last name of the student.<br />

Middle name of the student.<br />

Full name of student.<br />

First name of the primary teacher associated with the class.<br />

Last name of the primary teacher associated with the class.<br />

Full name of the primary teacher associated with the class.<br />

Section Info Meeting Times Integration Report<br />

Users with master and school administrator privileges can use the Section Info Meeting Times<br />

Integration Report to troubleshoot data discrepancies between class records in the Sif tables,<br />

located in the district database, and in <strong>ProgressBook</strong> tables, if the data exists. This report is<br />

available to districts using any student information systems that use Sif tables in the batch data<br />

integration process.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page, select Section Info Meeting Times in the Run a Report<br />

list and then click Run.<br />

2. On the GradeBook Report Viewer window, enter the name of the report in the Report<br />

Header field. Section Info Meeting Times Integration Report displays by default but you<br />

may change the name if desired.<br />

3. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate school(s) in the Schools list.<br />

Note: Only the schools to which you have access display in the list.<br />

Note: If there are no available choices from which to select, No school available<br />

displays with a red background.<br />

4. Select one of the following Include Null Schools options:<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 187


Reports<br />

• Yes – Include class records in the student information system that do not have<br />

matching records in <strong>ProgressBook</strong> tables.<br />

• No – Do not include class records in the student information system that do not have<br />

matching records in <strong>ProgressBook</strong> tables.<br />

5. In the Set Optional Filters area, the options listed, with the exception of Teacher Names,<br />

use the following naming convention: table name [space] field name. In the option Class<br />

Class DBID, Class DBID refers to the field in the <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Class table. In the Sif<br />

SectionInfo MeetingTime TimetableDay option, TimetableDay refers to the field in the Sif<br />

SectionInfo MeetingTime table. Select any of the appropriate options in the Field Name<br />

list.<br />

• Class Class DBID<br />

• Class DistrictClassID<br />

• Class SectionDescr<br />

• Course CourseName<br />

• Course DistrictCourseID<br />

• School SchoolName<br />

• School SchoolShortName<br />

• Sif SectionInfo MeetingTime TimetableDay<br />

• Sif SectionInfo MeetingTime TimetablePeriod<br />

• Sif SectionInfo ScheduleInfo ScheduleInfo Id<br />

• Sif SectionInfo ScheduleInfo SectionInfo Id<br />

• Sif SectionInfo ScheduleInfo TermInfoRefId – GUID<br />

• Sif SectionInfo SectionInfo RefId<br />

• Sif SectionInfo SectionInfo SchoolCourseInfoRefId – GUID<br />

• Sif TermInfo TermInfo Description<br />

• Sif TermInfo TermInfo EndDate<br />

• Sif TermInfo TermInfo RelativeDuration<br />

• Sif TermInfo TermInfo StartDate<br />

• Sif TermInfo TermInfo TermCode<br />

• Teacher Names<br />

6. Select one of the following options in the Operation list if it is available. The available<br />

options may vary depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list.<br />

• Is Equal To<br />

• Is Not Equal To<br />

• Is Less Than<br />

• Is Less Than or Equal To<br />

• Is Greater Than<br />

• Is Greater Than or Equal To<br />

• Is Before<br />

• Is Before or On<br />

• Is After<br />

188 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Reports<br />

• Is After or On<br />

• Begins With<br />

• Does Not Begin With<br />

• Ends With<br />

• Does Not End With<br />

• Contains<br />

• Does Not Contain<br />

• Has a Value<br />

• Does Not Have a Value<br />

7. Type the appropriate value in the Value field.<br />

Note: For options in the Field Name list that end in “RefId,” you must enter the<br />

GUID in the Value field in the same format as it is in the field in the table. If you<br />

selected Has a Value or Does Not Have a Value in the Operation list, then the<br />

Value field is not available.<br />

.<br />

Section Info Meeting Times Integration Report<br />

8. Specific selected columns indicated by a check mark display on the report by default. If<br />

you have selected specific filter options in the Field Name list and you want that<br />

information to display on the report, make sure to select the corresponding column name<br />

in the Columns list.<br />

9. Click View Report.<br />

The report displays at the bottom of the window.<br />

Note: The field or list displays red indicating an unacceptable value was entered<br />

or a required field was left blank.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 189


Reports<br />

10. To save the report with your selected parameters, filters and columns, click Save<br />

Setup As. On the Save Setup As window in the New report name field, type the unique<br />

report name, and in the New description field, type the description of the report. Then,<br />

click Save.<br />

The following message displays at the bottom of the window, “Report setup saved<br />

successfully.”<br />

Student Daily Attendance Integration Report<br />

Users with master and school administrator privileges can use the Student Daily Attendance<br />

Integration Report to troubleshoot data discrepancies between student and daily attendance<br />

records in the Sif tables, located in the district database, and in <strong>ProgressBook</strong> tables, if the data<br />

exists. This report is available to districts using any student information systems that use Sif tables<br />

in the batch data integration process.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page, select Student Daily Attendance in the Run a Report<br />

list and then click Run.<br />

2. On the GradeBook Report Viewer window, enter the name of the report in the Report<br />

Header field. Student Daily Attendance Integration Report displays by default but you may<br />

change the name if desired.<br />

3. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate school(s) in the Schools list.<br />

Note: Only the schools to which you have access display in the list.<br />

Note: If there are no available choices from which to select, No school available<br />

displays with a red background.<br />

4. Select one of the following Include Null Schools options:<br />

• Yes – Include student or attendance records in the student information system that do<br />

not have matching records in <strong>ProgressBook</strong> tables.<br />

• No – Do not include student or attendance records in the student information system<br />

that do not have matching records in <strong>ProgressBook</strong> tables.<br />

5. In the Set Optional Filters area, the options listed use the following naming convention:<br />

table name [space] field name. In the option AbsenceReason AbsenceReasonCode,<br />

AbsenceReasonCode refers to the field in the <strong>ProgressBook</strong> AbsenceReason table. In the<br />

Sif StudentDailyAttendance DailyAttendanceCode AttendanceCodeInfoRefId option,<br />

AttendanceCodeInfoRefId refers to the field in the Sif StudentDailyAttendance<br />

DailyAttendanceCode table. Select any of the appropriate options in the Field Name list.<br />

• AbsenceReason AbsenceReasonCode<br />

• AbsenceReason Description<br />

• AttendanceNote AttendanceNoteCode<br />

• AttendanceNote Description<br />

• Formatted Attendance Date – Attendance date presented in numerical format, for<br />

example, 04/19/10.<br />

• GradeLevels GradeLevelDescr<br />

• HomeRoom DistrictHRID<br />

190 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Reports<br />

• School SchoolName Att – Att is an extra description that refers to an attendance<br />

record for any students associated with a specific school.<br />

• School SchoolName Student – Student is an extra description that refers to<br />

attendance records for a specific student associated with a specific school.<br />

• School SchoolShortName Att – Att is an extra description that refers to an<br />

attendance record for any students associated with a specific school.<br />

• School SchoolShortName Student – Student is an extra description that refers to<br />

attendance records for a specific student associated with a specific school.<br />

• Sif StudentDailyAttendance DailyAttendanceCode AttendanceCodeInfoRefId –<br />

GUID<br />

• Sif StudentDailyAttendance DailyAttendanceCode DailyAttendanceCode Text<br />

• Sif StudentDailyAttendance SIF ExtendedElement SIF ExtendedElement Text<br />

Absence Level<br />

• Sif StudentDailyAttendance StudentDailyAttendance AttendanceNote<br />

• Sif StudentDailyAttendance StudentDailyAttendance Date<br />

• Sif StudentDailyAttendance StudentDailyAttendance SchoolInfoRefId – GUID<br />

• Sif StudentDailyAttendance StudentDailyAttendance StudentDailyAttendance Id<br />

• Sif StudentDailyAttendance StudentDailyAttendance StudentPersonalRefId –<br />

GUID<br />

• Student DateOfBirth<br />

• Student DistrictStudentID<br />

• Student EnrollmentDate<br />

• Student EnrollmentStatusCd<br />

• Student FirstName<br />

• Student HomeSchoolId<br />

• Student LastName<br />

• Student MidName<br />

• Student Student DBID<br />

6. Select one of the following options in the Operation list if it is available. The available<br />

options may vary depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list.<br />

• Is Equal To<br />

• Is Not Equal To<br />

• Is Less Than<br />

• Is Less Than or Equal To<br />

• Is Greater Than<br />

• Is Greater Than or Equal To<br />

• Is Before<br />

• Is Before or On<br />

• Is After<br />

• Is After or On<br />

• Begins With<br />

• Does Not Begin With<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 191


Reports<br />

• Ends With<br />

• Does Not End With<br />

• Contains<br />

• Does Not Contain<br />

• Has a Value<br />

• Does Not Have a Value<br />

7. Type the appropriate value in the Value field.<br />

Note: For options in the Field Name list that end in “RefId,” you must enter the<br />

GUID in the Value field in the same format as it is in the field in the table. If you<br />

selected Has a Value or Does Not Have a Value in the Operation list, then the<br />

Value field is not available.<br />

Student Daily Attendance Integration Report<br />

8. Specific selected columns indicated by a check mark display on the report by default. If<br />

you have selected specific filter options in the Field Name list and you want that<br />

information to display on the report, make sure to select the corresponding column name<br />

in the Columns list.<br />

9. Click View Report.<br />

The report displays at the bottom of the window.<br />

Note: The field or list displays red indicating an unacceptable value was entered<br />

or a required field was left blank.<br />

10. To save the report with your selected parameters, filters and columns, click Save<br />

Setup As. On the Save Setup As window in the New report name field, type the unique<br />

report name, and in the New description field, type the description of the report. Then,<br />

click Save.<br />

192 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


The following message displays at the bottom of the window, “Report setup saved<br />

successfully.”<br />

Reports<br />

Student Demographics Report<br />

The Student Demographics report provides numerous options for displaying student demographic<br />

information for individual or multiple classes, class groups or homerooms. For example, you can<br />

apply specific filter options to create a report that displays student addresses for specific classes<br />

or schools. Once you save the report with your desired filter options, you can run it as often as you<br />

like.<br />

1. Enter the name of the report in the Report Header field.<br />

Student Demographics displays by default, but you may change the name, if desired.<br />

2. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate school(s) in the Schools list.<br />

Note: Only the schools to which you have access display in the list.<br />

Note: If there are no available choices from which to select, then No school<br />

available displays with a red background.<br />

Note: The field or list displays red indicating an unacceptable value was entered<br />

or a required field was left blank.<br />

3. In the Set Optional Filters area, select the appropriate option(s) in the Field Name list. See<br />

“Student Demographics Report – Field Name Options” for descriptions of all the available<br />

options.<br />

4. Select one of the following options in the Operation list if it is available. The available<br />

options may vary depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list.<br />

• Is Equal To<br />

• Is Not Equal To<br />

• Begins With<br />

• Does Not Begin With<br />

• Ends With<br />

• Does Not End With<br />

• Contains<br />

• Does Not Contain<br />

• Has A Value<br />

• Does Not Have A Value<br />

5. Type the appropriate value in the Value field.<br />

Note: The available options and acceptable values vary depending on the option<br />

you selected in the Field Name list. You may be able to enter only alphabetical or<br />

only numeric characters depending on the option you selected in the Field Name<br />

list. If you selected an option in the Field Name list that ends in “Indicator,” then<br />

you must select the Yes or No option in the Value field. If you selected an option<br />

in the Field Name list that requires a date, a calendar becomes available in the<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 193


Reports<br />

Value field. If you selected Has A Value or Does Not Have A Value in the<br />

Operation list, then the Value field is not available.<br />

6. Specific selected columns indicated by a check mark display on the report by default. If<br />

you have selected specific filter options in the Field Name list and you want that<br />

information to display on the report, make sure to select the corresponding column name<br />

in the Columns list. Options in the Field Name list that end in “Indicator” do not have a<br />

corresponding column to display.<br />

7. Click .<br />

The report displays at the bottom of the window.<br />

8. To save the report with your selected parameters, filters and columns, click Save<br />

Setup As. On the Save Setup As window in the New report name field, type the unique<br />

report name, and in the New description field, type the description of the report. Then,<br />

click Save.<br />

The following message displays at the bottom of the window, “Report setup saved<br />

successfully.”<br />

Customizing the Student Demographics by Class Report<br />

194 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Reports<br />

Disabilities Report<br />

Birth Date<br />

Calendar Name<br />

Class Name<br />

Student Demographics Report – Field Name Options<br />

Option<br />

Counselor Name<br />

Disability Code<br />

Disability Name<br />

Enrollment Date<br />

Enrollment Status Code<br />

Gender Code<br />

Grade Level Code<br />

Grade Level Name<br />

Graduation Date<br />

Home School ID<br />

Homeroom ID<br />

Parent Access Disabled Indicator<br />

Date of birth of the student.<br />

Description<br />

Calendar used by the school in which the student is enrolled.<br />

Name of the class in which the student is enrolled. If no class<br />

name is assigned, then course name and section display.<br />

Name of the guidance counselor assigned to the student.<br />

Code that represents a disability which is included in a list of<br />

disabilities recognized by the state department of education.<br />

These codes are also used in SpecialServices. If you select this<br />

option, you must type 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12,<br />

13, 14, 15 or ** in the Value field.<br />

Full name of a disability which is included in a list of disabilities<br />

recognized by the state department of education. These codes<br />

are also used in SpecialServices. If you select this option, you<br />

must type the full or partial disability name in the Value field.<br />

Date on which the student enrolled in the school.<br />

Code that represents whether the student is active or inactive in<br />

the school in which the student is enrolled.<br />

Code that represents whether a student is female or male.<br />

Code that represents the grade level in which the student is<br />

enrolled.<br />

Name of the grade level in which the student is enrolled.<br />

Date on which the student will graduate from high school.<br />

Code that represents the school building in which the student<br />

was originally enrolled.<br />

Code that identifies the homeroom to which the student is<br />

assigned.<br />

Indicates whether the student's information has been disabled in<br />

Classic and Beta ParentAccess. If a parent account is<br />

associated with multiple student accounts, the parent account<br />

can still access the other student accounts. If you select this<br />

option, you must select Yes or No in the Value field.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 195


Reports<br />

Parent Access Disabled Status<br />

Name<br />

PB School ID<br />

PB Student ID<br />

School Enrollment Status Name<br />

School ID<br />

School Name<br />

Student Address Line 1<br />

Student Address Line 2<br />

Student Address Line 3<br />

Student Address Apt No<br />

Student City<br />

Student Email Address<br />

Student First Name<br />

Student ID<br />

Student Last Name<br />

Student Middle Name<br />

Student Phone Number<br />

Student State<br />

Student Zip Code<br />

Student's Last Parent Access<br />

Login Date<br />

Student Demographics Report – Field Name Options<br />

Option<br />

Indicates whether the student's information has been disabled in<br />

Classic and Beta ParentAccess. If you select this option, you<br />

must type Disabled in the Value field.<br />

GradeBook code that identifies the school in which the student is<br />

enrolled.<br />

GradeBook code that identifies the student.<br />

Indicates whether the student's record is active in GradeBook. If<br />

you select this option, you must type Active or Withdrawn in the<br />

Value field.<br />

Code that identifies the school in which the student is enrolled.<br />

Name of the school in which the student is enrolled.<br />

Street address where the student lives.<br />

Street address where the student lives.<br />

Street address where the student lives.<br />

Apartment number where the student lives.<br />

City where the student lives.<br />

Email address of the student.<br />

First name of the student.<br />

District code that identifies the student.<br />

Last name of the student.<br />

Middle name of the student.<br />

Student's primary phone number.<br />

State where the student lives.<br />

Description<br />

Postal code of the address where the student lives.<br />

Date of the last time the student logged in to Classic<br />

ParentAccess.<br />

Student Section Enrollment Integration Report<br />

Users with master and school administrator privileges can use the Student Section Enrollment<br />

Integration Report to troubleshoot data discrepancies between student and class records in the<br />

Sif tables, located in the district database, and in <strong>ProgressBook</strong> tables, if the data exists. This<br />

report is available to districts using any student information systems that use Sif tables in the batch<br />

data integration process.<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page, select Student Section Enrollment in the Run a<br />

Report list and then click Run.<br />

2. On the GradeBook Report Viewer window, enter the name of the report in the Report<br />

Header field. Student Section Enrollment Integration Report displays by default but you<br />

may change the name if desired.<br />

3. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate school(s) in the Schools list.<br />

Note: Only the schools to which you have access display in the list.<br />

196 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Reports<br />

Note: If there are no available choices from which to select, No school available<br />

displays with a red background.<br />

4. Select one of the following Include Null Schools options:<br />

• Yes – Include student or class records in the student information system that do not<br />

have matching records in <strong>ProgressBook</strong> tables.<br />

• No – Do not include student or class records in the student information system that do<br />

not have matching records in <strong>ProgressBook</strong> tables.<br />

5. In the Set Optional Filters area, the options listed, with the exception of Teacher Names,<br />

use the following naming convention: table name [space] field name. In the option Class<br />

Class DBID, Class DBID refers to the field in the <strong>ProgressBook</strong> Class table. In the Sif<br />

SectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollment EntryDate option, EntryDate refers to the<br />

field in the Sif SectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollment table. Select any of the<br />

appropriate options in the Field Name list.<br />

• Class Class DBID<br />

• Class DistrictClassID<br />

• Class SectionDescr<br />

• Course CourseName<br />

• Course DistrictCourseID<br />

• GradeLevels GradeLevelDescr<br />

• HomeRoom DistrictHRID<br />

• School SchoolName Class<br />

• School SchoolName Student<br />

• School SchoolShortName Class<br />

• School SchoolShortName Student<br />

• Sif SectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollment EntryDate<br />

• Sif SectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollment ExitDate<br />

• Sif SectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollment RefId – GUID<br />

• Sif SectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollment SectionInfoRefId – GUID<br />

• Sif SectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollment StudentPersonalRefId – GUID<br />

• Sif SectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollmentId<br />

• Student DateOfBirth<br />

• Student DistrictStudentID<br />

• Student EnrollmentDate<br />

• Student EnrollmentStatusCd<br />

• Student FirstName<br />

• Student HomeSchoolId<br />

• Student LastName<br />

• Student MidName<br />

• Student Student DBID<br />

• Teacher Names<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 197


Reports<br />

6. Select one of the following options in the Operation list if it is available. The available<br />

options may vary depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list.<br />

• Is Equal To<br />

• Is Not Equal To<br />

• Is Less Than<br />

• Is Less Than or Equal To<br />

• Is Greater Than<br />

• Is Greater Than or Equal To<br />

• Is Before<br />

• Is Before or On<br />

• Is After<br />

• Is After or On<br />

• Begins With<br />

• Does Not Begin With<br />

• Ends With<br />

• Does Not End With<br />

• Contains<br />

• Does Not Contain<br />

• Has a Value<br />

• Does Not Have a Value<br />

7. Type the appropriate value in the Value field.<br />

Note: For options in the Field Name list that end in “RefId,” you must enter the<br />

GUID in the Value field in the same format as it is in the field in the table. If you<br />

selected Has a Value or Does Not Have a Value in the Operation list, then the<br />

Value field is not available.<br />

198 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Reports<br />

Student Section Enrollment Integration Report<br />

8. Specific selected columns indicated by a check mark display on the report by default. If<br />

you have selected specific filter options in the Field Name list and you want that<br />

information to display on the report, make sure to select the corresponding column name<br />

in the Columns list.<br />

9. Click View Report.<br />

The report displays at the bottom of the window.<br />

Note: The field or list displays red indicating an unacceptable value was entered<br />

or a required field was left blank.<br />

10. To save the report with your selected parameters, filters and columns, click Save<br />

Setup As. On the Save Setup As window in the New report name field, type the unique<br />

report name, and in the New description field, type the description of the report. Then,<br />

click Save.<br />

The following message displays at the bottom of the window, “Report setup saved<br />

successfully.”<br />

YTD (Year-to-Date) Final Grade Admin Report<br />

The YTD (Year-to-Date) Final Grade Admin Report provides numerous options for displaying year<br />

to date grade information for students in individual or multiple teachers’ classes or class groups.<br />

This report is available to users with master, school administrator, school support and principal<br />

privileges. Users logged in with School Support privileges, must access the report from the<br />

Principal Home Page. The YTD Final Grade Report can only be used on classes where the YTD<br />

Grade calculation has been enabled on the report card for the class. This report cannot be used<br />

on classes using standards-based grading.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 199


Reports<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page, select YTD Final Grade Admin in the Run a Report list<br />

and then click Run.<br />

2. On the GradeBook Report Viewer window, enter the name of the report in the Report<br />

Header field. YTD Final Grade Admin displays by default, but you may change the name<br />

if desired.<br />

3. In the Select Required Parameters area, select the appropriate teacher(s) in the<br />

Teacher(s) list.<br />

Note: For users logged in with school administrator, school support or principal<br />

privileges, only the teachers in the school buildings to which you have access<br />

display in the list. For users logged in with master privileges, all the teachers in all<br />

the school buildings display.<br />

Note: If there are no available choices in which to select, then No teacher<br />

available displays with a red background.<br />

4. In the Set Optional Filters area, select any of the appropriate option(s) in the Field Name<br />

list. See “YTD (Year to Date) Final Grade Admin Report” for descriptions of all the<br />

available options.<br />

5. Select one of the following options in the Operation list if it is available. The available<br />

options may vary depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list.<br />

• Is Equal To<br />

• Is Not Equal To<br />

• Is Before<br />

• Is Before or On<br />

• Is After<br />

• Is After or On<br />

• Is Less Than<br />

• Is Less Than or Equal To<br />

• Is Greater Than<br />

• Is Greater Than or Equal To<br />

• Begins With<br />

• Does Not Begin With<br />

• Ends With<br />

• Does Not End With<br />

• Contains<br />

• Does Not Contain<br />

• Has A Value<br />

• Does Not Have A Value<br />

6. Type the appropriate value in the Value field.<br />

Note: The available options and acceptable values vary depending on the option<br />

you selected in the Field Name list. If you selected an option in the Field Name list<br />

that requires a date, then a calendar becomes available in the Value field. If you<br />

200 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Reports<br />

selected Has a Value or Does Not Have a Value in the Operation list, then the<br />

Value field is not available.<br />

7. Specific selected columns indicated by a check mark display on the report by default. If<br />

you have selected specific filter options in the Field Name list and you want that<br />

information to display on the report, make sure to select the corresponding column name<br />

in the Columns list.<br />

8. Click View Report.<br />

The report displays at the bottom of the window.<br />

Note: The field or list displays red indicating an unacceptable value was entered<br />

or a required field was left blank.<br />

9. To save the report with your selected parameters, filters and columns, click Save<br />

Setup As. On the Save Setup As window in the New report name field, type the unique<br />

report name, and in the New description field, type the description of the report. Then,<br />

click Save.<br />

The following message displays at the bottom of the window, “Report setup saved<br />

successfully.”<br />

YTD Final Grade Admin Report<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 201


Reports<br />

Average Mark<br />

Birth Date<br />

Options<br />

District Student ID<br />

Enrollment Status Code<br />

Gender Code<br />

Grade Level<br />

Grading Scale<br />

Report Card Name<br />

Reporting Period Short Name<br />

School ID<br />

School Name<br />

Student Email Address<br />

Student Name<br />

Teacher Name<br />

Year To Date<br />

Year To Date Value<br />

YTD (Year to Date) Final Grade Admin Report<br />

Description<br />

Student’s grade for the reporting period. Depending on how the<br />

year to date grade calculation is set up in the report card, the<br />

grades display differently. If the year to date grade calculation is<br />

based on a system calculation that uses grades from the report<br />

card, then the grade is the grade entered on the Report Card<br />

Entry screen. If the year to date grade calculation is based on a<br />

system calculation that uses averages from the grade book, then<br />

the grade is the numeric average from the teacher’s grade book.<br />

Date of birth of the student.<br />

District code that identifies the student.<br />

Code that represents whether the student is active or inactive in<br />

the school in which the student is enrolled.<br />

Code that represents whether a student is female or male.<br />

Grade level in which the student is enrolled.<br />

Grading scale selected on the Grading Scale Setup screen.<br />

Report card being used in the class.<br />

Short name of the reporting period as specified on the Reporting<br />

Periods screen and used in the Grading Period list on the Class<br />

Dashboard and Report Card Entry screen.<br />

Code that identifies the school in which the student is enrolled.<br />

Name of the school in which the student is enrolled.<br />

Email address of the student.<br />

Full name of the student.<br />

Full name of the primary teacher associated with the class.<br />

Student’s class grade if final report cards were given at the current<br />

time. Depending on the marks used in the grading scale<br />

used in the report card, the grades display as percentage averages<br />

or point values and its mark equivalent.<br />

Numeric point value equivalent of the student’s class grade if final<br />

report cards were given at the current time. Depending on how<br />

the year to date grade calculation is set up in the report card, the<br />

grades display differently. If the final grade is based on numeric<br />

averages, then the grade is a percentage average. If the final<br />

grade is based on letter grades, then the grade is a point value<br />

equivalent of the letter grade.<br />

202 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim<br />

Templates<br />

The following sections in this appendix list the template pieces available for use in each report<br />

card/interim template option accompanied by a representation of the template piece.<br />

GradeBook provides several template options and hundreds of template pieces for you to use in<br />

creating your customized report cards/interims. When you select one of the template size and<br />

layout options listed as follows on the General Tab, the template pieces available to use in the<br />

layout of your printed report card/interim display on the Templates tab:<br />

• Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2 x 11 portrait), see “Standard Elementary Report<br />

Card (8 1/2 x 11 portrait).”<br />

• Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2 x 14 portrait), see “Standard Elementary Report<br />

Card (8 1/2x14 portrait).”<br />

• Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2 x 11 landscape, 2 columns), see “Standard<br />

Elementary Report Card (8 1/2x11 landscape, 2 columns).”<br />

• Standard Elementary Report Card (Legal tri-fold), see “Standard Elementary Report Card<br />

(Legal tri-fold).”<br />

• Standard Elementary Report Card (11 x 17 landscape, 2 columns), see “Standard<br />

Elementary Report Card (11x17 landscape, 2 columns).”<br />

Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2 x 11 portrait)<br />

Attendance template pieces displays attendance totals for grading periods. The following<br />

attendance template pieces are available.<br />

Attendance (½ Width, Present, Tardy, Absent)<br />

Attendance (3 Columns, ½ Width, Abs, Tar)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 203


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Attendance (4 Columns - Half Width)<br />

Attendance (5 Columns, ½ w, Pres, Poss, ExAT, UnExAT)<br />

Attendance (5 Column ½ width, Abs, Tar)<br />

Attendance (5 Column, ½ width, Pres, Abs, Tar)<br />

Blank Line template piece inserts a blank line of space. Using this template piece is the same as<br />

specifying 1 in the Rows After column on the Template tab.<br />

Class Comments template pieces display comments about an individual class for the current and<br />

multiple grading periods. Use this template piece paired with a marks template piece and then<br />

map both pieces to the same course to display the comments with the course marks. The following<br />

class comments template pieces are available.<br />

204 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width,<br />

2 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width,<br />

4 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width,<br />

6 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width,<br />

12 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 2 Rows)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 205


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 4 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 8 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Q1-Q4, 1/2 Width,<br />

2 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Q1-Q4, 1/2 Width, 4 Rows)<br />

206 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Class Comments (Q1-Q4, Full Width, 2 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Q1-Q4, Full Width, 4 rows)<br />

Class Comments (T1-T3 Full Width, 2 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (T1-T3 Full Width, 4 Rows)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 207


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Column Break template piece inserts a break between columns.<br />

Current Date template piece displays the current date.<br />

Current Date<br />

File Header template pieces inserts invisible page-size formatting codes. This template piece<br />

MUST be the first template piece in the template.<br />

Geometric Shapes template piece displays marks for recognizing geometric shapes.<br />

Geometric Shapes<br />

Grading Period is template piece typically used for interims that displays the grading period<br />

selected on the Generate Report Cards screen.<br />

Grading Period<br />

Index template pieces display an explanation of marks used on the report card based on the<br />

marks selected on the Assessments tab and descriptions in the Mark Types setup. The amount<br />

of text that displays in each column cannot be adjusted. Use this template piece paired with text<br />

entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field on the Messages tab.<br />

208 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Index<br />

Interim Comments Header provides the heading row for the Interim with 1 Comment and the<br />

Interim with 2 Comments template pieces. This template piece is typically used on traditional<br />

interims.<br />

Interim Comments Header<br />

Interim Mark & Comment Header provides the heading row for the Interim Mark & Comment<br />

template piece. This template piece is typically used for traditional interims.<br />

Interim Mark & Comment Header<br />

Interim Mark & Comment is a template piece for traditional interims that displays each course,<br />

its mark and one comment. Only marks for the current grading period appear on the generated<br />

interim. When using this template piece, on the Assessments tab, make sure the mark is the first<br />

assessment and the comment is the second assessment. If the comment is chosen from a list, the<br />

mark type must be Combined Comment so that the comment text prints instead of the code.<br />

Additionally, you must use the Interim Mark & Comment Header template piece for the heading<br />

row with the this template piece.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 209


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Interim Mark & Comment<br />

Interim with 1 Comment and Interim with 2 Comments are template pieces for traditional<br />

interims that display each course and one or two comments. Only comments for the current<br />

grading period appear on the generated interim. If the comments are chosen from a list, the mark<br />

type must be Combined Comment so that the comment text prints instead of the code.<br />

Additionally, you must use the Interim Comments Header template piece for the heading row<br />

with either of these template pieces.<br />

Interim with 1 Comment<br />

Interim with 2 Comments<br />

Interim with Current Per Assessments (1/2 width) and Interim with Current Per<br />

Assessments (Full Width) are template pieces for standards-based interims that display the<br />

assessments and mark for each course. Only the marks for the current grading period appear on<br />

the generated interim. The difference between the two template pieces is their width on the<br />

generated interim.<br />

Interim with Current Per Assessments<br />

(1/2 width)<br />

Interim with Current Per Assessments (Full Width)<br />

Kindergarten Letters template pieces display marks for recognizing lower and upper case letters<br />

and the letter sound. The following kindergarten letters template pieces are available.<br />

210 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Custom Kindergarten Letter Box - Full Width<br />

Custom K Letter Box (Upper, Lower, Sound)<br />

Letter Recognition template pieces display marks for recognizing upper and lower case letters<br />

by grading period. The following letter recognition template pieces are available.<br />

Letter_LowerCase_4RepPer<br />

Letter_UpperCase_4RepPer<br />

Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer is used specifically for sounds.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 211


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer<br />

Note: When using letter or word template pieces, you must set up the letters<br />

and/or words as assessments in the course on the Assessments tab. Make sure<br />

to use the Checkmark for Report Cards mark type.<br />

Mailing Label template piece displays the student’s mailing address.<br />

Mailing Label<br />

Marks template pieces display grades and/or marks for assessments by subject. The following<br />

marks template pieces are available.<br />

Marks (2 Columns)<br />

Marks (3 Columns)<br />

Marks (3 Columns, 1/2 Width)<br />

Marks (4 Columns)<br />

212 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Marks (4 Columns, 1/2 Width)<br />

Marks (5 Columns)<br />

Marks (5 columns, 1/2 Width)<br />

Marks (6 Columns)<br />

Marks (7 Columns)<br />

Custom Marks S1 and Custom Marks S2 template pieces are specifically designed for districts<br />

whose report cards only show the grades for a single semester. Custom Marks S1 displays the<br />

marks and comments for the first semester; Custom Marks S2, the marks and comments for the<br />

second semester. To use these templates, the following setup is required:<br />

• Create two report cards: one for the first semester using the Custom Marks S1 template<br />

piece and one for the second semester using the Custom Marks S2 template piece.<br />

• For each report card, create two assessments on the Assessment tab: one for the mark<br />

and one for comments. These are the only valid assessments you can use for this<br />

template piece.<br />

• For each report card, map the identifiers to the correct assessment on the Mapping tab.<br />

Custom Marks S1<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 213


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Custom Marks S2<br />

Messages template pieces display custom message text entered on the Messages tab. Message<br />

X (1 through 12) options are available and all display the text entered in the Messages fields in<br />

two size formats: half-page and full-page widths. Each option is available with and without<br />

borders. Text entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field displays with the Index<br />

template piece. Each message field allows up to 6,000 characters of text.<br />

Message 1 (1/2 Width & Border)<br />

Message 1 (Half Width)<br />

Message 1 (Page Width & Border)<br />

Message 1 (Page Width)<br />

One Column Section template piece inserts a one-column section on a page that uses a<br />

two-column format.<br />

Page Break template piece inserts a page break between multiple pages of a report card<br />

indicating the end of one student’s report card. This template piece must be the last sequence<br />

number in the list of template pieces.<br />

Parent Signature template pieces display the possible combination of the student’s name, the<br />

text “Parent Signature” and a blank line, and the text “Conference Requested? Yes No.” The<br />

following parent signature template pieces are available.<br />

Parent Signature Line<br />

214 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Parent Signature Section (Full Width)<br />

Placement Status template pieces display promotion or placement to a succeeding grade or<br />

retention in the current grade. The following placement status template pieces are available.<br />

End of Year Placement<br />

End of Year Placement (Full Width)<br />

End of Year Placement (Promoted, Placed, Retained)<br />

End of Yr Place (Pro, Pla, Ret, Exp) -<br />

1/2 Width<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 215


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

End of Year Placement (Assigned, Retained)<br />

Principal Signature template piece displays the principal’s name and blank line for signature.<br />

Principal Signature Line<br />

School Header template piece displays the school district name, the name of the school and the<br />

report card title on separate lines centered in the column or on the page. The school district name<br />

that displays in this template piece was entered on the District Setup screen. The name of the<br />

school was entered on the Schools Setup screen. The report card title was entered in the Report<br />

Card Title field on the Messages tab. If you do not enter any text in the Report Card Title field on<br />

the Messages tab, a title does not display when using the School Header template piece.<br />

School Header (District, School & Title)<br />

Student Header template piece displays the student’s name and grade, teacher’s name and<br />

school year, and principal’s name.<br />

Student Header with Principal<br />

Student Header (Without Principal)<br />

Teacher & Principal Signatures template piece displays the teacher, date and principal.<br />

Teacher & Principal Signatures<br />

216 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Teacher Comments template piece displays a teacher’s comments for each grading period.<br />

These comments are not associated with individual subjects. The following teacher comment<br />

template pieces are available.<br />

Teacher Comments (1/2 Page)<br />

Teacher Comments (1/2 Page, Semester 1 & 2)<br />

The size of this template piece expands based on the amount of text entered.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 217


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Teacher Comments (Curr Per, Full Width, No Border)<br />

Teacher Comments (Curr Per, 1/2 Width)<br />

218 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Teacher Comments (Full Page)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 219


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Teacher Comments (Full Width)<br />

Teacher Comments (Trimester, Full Width)<br />

Two Column Section template piece inserts a two-column section on a page that uses a<br />

one-column format.<br />

Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2x14 portrait)<br />

Attendance template pieces displays attendance totals for grading periods. The following<br />

attendance template pieces are available.<br />

Attendance (½ Width, Present, Tardy, Absent)<br />

220 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Attendance (3 Columns, ½ Width, Abs, Tar)<br />

Attendance (4 Columns - Half Width)<br />

Attendance (5 Columns, ½ w, Pres, Poss, ExAT,<br />

UnExAT)<br />

Attendance (5 Column ½ Width, Abs, Tar)<br />

Attendance (5 Column, ½ Width, Pres, Abs, Tar)<br />

Blank Line template piece inserts a blank line of space. Using this template piece is the same as<br />

specifying 1 in the Rows After column on the Template tab.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 221


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Class Comments template pieces display comments about an individual class for the current and<br />

multiple grading periods. Use this template piece paired with a marks template piece and then<br />

map both pieces to the same course to display the comments with the course marks. The following<br />

class comments template pieces are available.<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width, 2 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width, 4 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width, 6 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width,<br />

12 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 2 Rows)<br />

222 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 4 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 8 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Q1-Q4, 1/2 Width, 2 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Q1-Q4, 1/2 Width, 4 Rows)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 223


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Class Comments (Q1-Q4, Full Width, 2 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Q1-Q4, Full Width, 4 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (T1-T3 Full Width, 2 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (T1-T3 Full Width, 4 Rows)<br />

Column Break template piece inserts a break between columns.<br />

224 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

File Header template piece inserts invisible page-size formatting codes. This template piece<br />

MUST be the first template piece in the template.<br />

Geometric Shapes template piece displays marks for recognizing geometric shapes.<br />

Geometric Shapes<br />

Grading Period is a template piece typically used for interims that displays the grading period<br />

selected on the Generate Report Cards screen.<br />

Grading Period<br />

Interim Comments Header provides the heading row for the Interim with 1 Comment and the<br />

Interim with 2 Comments template pieces. This template piece is typically used on traditional<br />

interims.<br />

Interim Comments Header<br />

Interim Mark & Comment Header provides the heading row for the Interim Mark & Comment<br />

template piece. This template piece is typically used for traditional interims.<br />

Interim Mark & Comment Header<br />

Interim Mark & Comment is a template piece for traditional interims that displays each course,<br />

its mark and one comment. Only marks for the current grading period appear on the generated<br />

interim. When using this template piece, on the Assessments tab, make sure the mark is the first<br />

assessment and the comment is the second assessment. If the comment is chosen from a list, the<br />

mark type must be Combined Comment so that the comment text prints instead of the code.<br />

Additionally, you must use the Interim Mark & Comment Header template piece for the heading<br />

row with this template piece.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 225


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Interim Mark & Comment<br />

Interim with 1 Comment and Interim with 2 Comments are template pieces for traditional<br />

interims that display each course and one or two comments. Only comments for the current<br />

grading period appear on the generated interim. If the comments are chosen from a list, the mark<br />

type must be Combined Comment so that the comment text prints instead of the code.<br />

Additionally, you must use the Interim Comments Header template piece for the heading row<br />

with either of these template pieces.<br />

Interim with 1 Comment<br />

Interim with 2 Comments<br />

Interim with Current Per Assessments (1/2 width) and Interim with Current Per<br />

Assessments (Full Width) are template pieces for standards-based interims that display the<br />

assessments and mark for each course. Only the marks for the current grading period appear on<br />

the generated interim. The difference between the two template pieces is their width on the<br />

generated interim.<br />

Interim with Current Per Assessments<br />

(1/2 Width)<br />

Interim with Current Per Assessments (Full Width)<br />

Index template piece displays an explanation of marks used on the report card based on the<br />

marks selected on the Assessments tab and descriptions in the Mark Types setup. The amount<br />

of text that displays in each column cannot be adjusted. Use this template piece paired with text<br />

entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field on the Messages tab.<br />

226 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Index<br />

Kindergarten Letters template piece displays marks for recognizing lower and upper case letters<br />

and the letter sound in a one-column width format. The following kindergarten letters template<br />

pieces are available.<br />

Custom Kindergarten Letter Box - Full Width<br />

Custom K Letter Box (Upper, Lower, Sound)<br />

Letter Recognition template pieces display marks for recognizing upper and lower case letters<br />

by grading period. The following letter recognition template pieces are available.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 227


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Letter_LowerCase_4RepPer<br />

Letter_UpperCase_4RepPer<br />

Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer is used specifically for sounds.<br />

Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer<br />

Note: When using letter or word template pieces, you must set up the letters<br />

and/or words as assessments in the course on the Assessments tab. Make sure<br />

to use the Checkmark for Report Cards mark type.<br />

Marks template pieces display grades and/or marks for assessments by subject. The following<br />

marks template pieces are available.<br />

Marks (2 Columns)<br />

228 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Marks (3 Columns)<br />

Marks (3 Columns, 1/2 Width)<br />

Marks (4 Columns)<br />

Marks (4 Columns, 1/2 Width)<br />

Marks (5 Columns)<br />

Marks (5 Columns, 1/2 Width)<br />

Marks (6 Columns)<br />

Marks (7 Columns)<br />

Messages template pieces display custom message text entered on the Messages tab. Message<br />

X (1 through 12) options are available and all display the text entered in the Messages fields in<br />

two size formats: half-page and full-page widths. Each option is available with and without<br />

borders. Text entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field displays with the Index<br />

template piece. Each message field allows up to 6,000 characters of text.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 229


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Message 1 (1/2 Width & Border)<br />

Message 1 (Half Width)<br />

Message 1 (Page Width & Border)<br />

Message 1 (Page Width)<br />

One Column Section template piece inserts a one-column section on a page that uses a<br />

two-column format.<br />

Page Break template piece inserts a page break between multiple pages of a report card<br />

indicating the end of one student’s report card. This template piece must be the last sequence<br />

number in the list of template pieces.<br />

Parent Signature template pieces displays the possible combination of the student’s name, the<br />

text “Parent Signature” and a blank line, and the text “Conference Requested? Yes No.” The<br />

following parent signature template pieces are available.<br />

Parent Signature Line<br />

Parent Signature Section (Full Width)<br />

Placement Status template pieces display promotion or placement to a succeeding grade or<br />

retention in the current grade. The following placement status template pieces are available.<br />

230 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

End of Year Placement<br />

End of Year Placement (Assigned, Retained)<br />

End of Year Placement (Promoted, Placed, Retained)<br />

End of Yr Place (Pro, Pla, Ret, Exp) - 1/2 Width<br />

Principal Signature template piece displays the principal’s name and blank line for signature.<br />

Principal Signature Line<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 231


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

School Header template piece displays the report card title, the school district name and the<br />

name of the school on separate lines centered in the column or on the page. The school district<br />

name that displays in this template piece was entered on the District Setup screen. The name of<br />

the school was entered on the Schools Setup screen. The report card title was entered in the<br />

Report Card Title field on the Messages tab. If you do not enter any text in the Report Card Title<br />

field on the Messages tab, a title does not display when using the School Header template piece.<br />

School Header (District, School &<br />

Title)<br />

Student Header template piece displays the student’s name and grade, teacher’s name and<br />

school year, and principal’s name. The following student header template pieces are available.<br />

Student Header with Principal<br />

Student Header with Principal & Border<br />

Teacher Comments template pieces display a teacher’s comments for each grading period.<br />

These comments are not associated with individual subjects. The following teacher comments<br />

template pieces are available.<br />

232 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Teacher Comments (1/2 Page)<br />

Teacher Comments (1/2 Page, Semester 1 & 2)<br />

The size of this template piece expands based on the amount of text entered.<br />

Teacher Comments (Curr Per, Full Width, No Border)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 233


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Teacher Comments (Curr Per, 1/2 Width)<br />

Teacher Comments (Full Page)<br />

234 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Teacher Comments (Full Width)<br />

Teacher Comments (Trimester, Full Width)<br />

Two Column Section template piece inserts a two-column section on a page that uses a<br />

one-column format.<br />

Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2x11 landscape,<br />

2 columns)<br />

Attendance template pieces displays attendance totals for grading periods. The following<br />

attendance template pieces are available.<br />

Attendance (4 Columns)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 235


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Attendance (4 Columns with Days Present)<br />

Attendance (5 Columns)<br />

Attendance (5 Columns with Days Present)<br />

Attendance (5 Col, Pre, Poss, ExcAT, UnExcAT)<br />

Blank Line template piece inserts a blank line of space. Using this template piece is the same as<br />

specifying 1 in the Rows After column on the Template tab.<br />

Class Comments template pieces display comments about an individual class for the current<br />

grading period. Use this template piece paired with a marks template piece and then map both<br />

pieces to the same course to display the comments with the course marks. The following class<br />

comments template pieces are available.<br />

Class Comments (Current Period, 2 Rows)<br />

236 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Class Comments (Current Period, 4 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Current Period, 6 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Current Period, 12 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Q1-Q4, 2 Rows)<br />

Column Break template piece inserts a break between columns.<br />

File Header template piece inserts invisible page-size formatting codes. This template piece<br />

MUST be the first template piece in the template.<br />

Index template piece displays an explanation of marks used on the report card based on the<br />

marks selected on the Assessments tab and descriptions in the Mark Types setup. The amount<br />

of text that displays in each column cannot be adjusted. Use this template piece paired with text<br />

entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field on the Messages tab.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 237


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Index<br />

Kindergarten Letters template piece displays the possible combination of marks for recognizing<br />

lower and upper case letters, letter sounds and consonants. The following kindergarten letters<br />

template pieces are available.<br />

Custom K Letter Box (Upper, Lower, Sound)<br />

Custom Kindergarten Letters (BA)<br />

238 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Kindergarten Letters 2<br />

Kindergarten Note about Art, Music, etc. template piece displays a message about Art, Music,<br />

and/or Physical Education classes.<br />

Custom BA Kindergarten Note About Art, Music, etc.<br />

Kindergarten Word Recognition template piece displays marks for recognizing words by sight.<br />

The following kindergarten word template pieces are available.<br />

Custom BA Kindergarten Sight Words<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 239


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Custom BA Kindergarten Sight Words - (2007)<br />

Letter Recognition template pieces display marks for recognizing upper and lower case letters<br />

by grading period. The following letter recognition template pieces are available.<br />

Kindergarten Consonants<br />

Letter_LowerCase_4RepPer<br />

Letter_UpperCase_4RepPer<br />

Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer is used specifically for sounds.<br />

240 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer<br />

Note: When using letter or word template pieces, you must set up the letters<br />

and/or words as assessments in the course on the Assessments tab. Make sure<br />

to use the Checkmark for Report Cards mark type.<br />

Marks template pieces display grades and/or marks for assessments by subject. The following<br />

marks template pieces are available.<br />

Marks (2 Columns)<br />

Marks (3 Columns)<br />

Marks (4 column - no wrapping) does not allow more than one line of text in the Assessment area.<br />

Marks (4 Column - No Wrapping)<br />

Marks (4 column - no wrapping, with shading) does not allow more than one line of text in the<br />

Assessment area and applies shading to the grading periods that are not used on the report card.<br />

Marks (4 Column - No Wrapping, with Shading)<br />

Marks (4 Columns)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 241


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Marks (5 Columns)<br />

Marks (6 Columns)<br />

Marks (7 Columns)<br />

Marks (Kindergarten)<br />

Marks Explanation template pieces display an explanation of marks used on the report card. The<br />

following marks explanation template pieces are available.<br />

Custom BA Kindergarten Key<br />

Key - Kindergarten<br />

242 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Messages template pieces displays custom message text entered on the Messages tab.<br />

Message X (1 through 12) options are available and all display in the same layout format: 1/2 page<br />

width with and without borders. Text entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field<br />

displays with the Index template piece.<br />

Message 1<br />

Message 1 (with Border)<br />

Page Break template piece inserts a page break between multiple pages of a report card<br />

indicating the end of one student’s report card. This template piece MUST be the last sequence<br />

number in the list of template pieces.<br />

Parent Comments (1/2 Page) template piece displays an area for parents to submit hand-written<br />

comments.<br />

Parent Comments (1/2 Page)<br />

Parent Signature Line template piece displays the text “Parent Signature” with a blank line for<br />

the signature.<br />

Parent Signature Line<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 243


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Placement Status template piece displays promotion or placement to a succeeding grade or<br />

retention in the current grade. The following placement status template pieces are available.<br />

End of Year Placement<br />

End of Year Placement (Promoted, Placed, Retained)<br />

End of Year Placement (Assigned, Retained)<br />

End of Year Placement - Kindergarten<br />

Principal Signature template piece displays the principal’s name or possibly a blank line for the<br />

principal’s signature. The following principal signature template pieces are available.<br />

Principal Signature (with name)<br />

Principal Signature Line<br />

244 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

School Header template piece displays the report card title, the school district name and the<br />

name of the school on separate lines centered in the column or on the page. The school district<br />

name that displays in this template piece was entered on the District Setup screen. The name of<br />

the school was entered on the Schools Setup screen. The title was entered in the Report Card<br />

Title field on the Messages tab. If you do not enter any text in the Report Card Title field on the<br />

Messages tab, a title does not display when using the School Header template piece.<br />

School Header (Title, District & School)<br />

Student Header template piece displays the possible combination of student’s name, grade,<br />

teacher’s name, school year and principal’s name. The following student header template pieces<br />

are available.<br />

Student Header (No Principal)<br />

Student Header - Kindergarten<br />

Student Header with Principal<br />

Teacher Comments template pieces display a teacher’s comments for each grading period.<br />

These comments are not associated with individual subjects. The following teacher comments<br />

template pieces are available.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 245


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Teacher Comments (1/2 Page)<br />

246 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Teacher Comments (Full Page)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 247


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Teacher Comments - Kindergarten<br />

248 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Standard Elementary Report Card (Legal tri-fold)<br />

Attendance template pieces displays attendance totals for grading periods. The following<br />

attendance template pieces are available.<br />

Attendance (3 Column 1/3 Width)<br />

Attendance (4 Column with Days Present)<br />

Attendance (4 Column)<br />

Attendance (5 Col, Pres, Poss, ExAT, UnExAT)<br />

Attendance (5 Column with Days Present)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 249


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Attendance (5 Column)<br />

AttendanceAtConference_Fall_Spring template piece displays an indication of the teacher’s<br />

desire for the parent to attend the Fall or Spring conference.<br />

AttendanceAtConference_Fall_Spring<br />

Blank Line template piece inserts a blank line of space. Using this template piece is the same as<br />

specifying 1 in the Rows After column on the Template tab.<br />

Column Break template piece inserts a break between columns.<br />

Class Comments template pieces display comments about an individual class in the current and<br />

multiple grading periods. Use this template piece paired with a marks template piece and then<br />

map both pieces to the same course to display the comments with the course marks. The following<br />

class comments template pieces are available.<br />

Course Comment (Current Period, 2 Lines)<br />

Course Comment (Current Period, 4 Lines)<br />

Course Comment (Current Period, 7 Lines)<br />

250 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Course Comment (Current Period, 14 lines)<br />

Course Comment (Q1-Q4)<br />

Course Comment (Q2 & Q4, 2 Lines)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 251


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Course Comment (Q2 & Q4, 3 Lines)<br />

Continuums template pieces displays grade levels as a benchmark on a grading continuum. The<br />

following continuums template pieces are available.<br />

Custom Reading and Writing Continuums<br />

Custom Writing Continuum<br />

File Header template piece inserts invisible page-size formatting codes. This template piece<br />

MUST be the first template piece in the template.<br />

Index template piece displays an explanation of marks used on the report card based on the<br />

marks selected on the Assessments tab and descriptions in the Mark Types setup. The amount<br />

of text that displays in each column cannot be adjusted. Use this template piece paired with text<br />

entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field on the Messages tab.<br />

252 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Index<br />

Intervention Participation template pieces display participation in tutoring or intervention<br />

services for proficiency tests or Title I programs. The following intervention participation template<br />

pieces are available.<br />

Proficiency Test Intervention<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 253


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Participation_RRecovery_TitleIR_Quest<br />

Kindergarten Letters template pieces display marks for recognizing lower and upper case letters<br />

and the letter sound. The following kindergarten letters template pieces are available.<br />

Custom K Letter Box (Upper, Lower, Sound)<br />

Custom Kindergarten Letter Box<br />

Kindergarten Words template piece displays marks for recognizing frequently used words.<br />

Custom Kindergarten Word List<br />

Letter Recognition template pieces displays marks for recognizing upper and lower case letters<br />

by grading period. The following letter recognition template pieces are available.<br />

254 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Letter_LowerCase_4RepPer<br />

Letter_UpperCase_4RepPer<br />

Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer is used specifically for sounds.<br />

Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer<br />

Note: When using letter or word template pieces, you must set up the letters<br />

and/or words as assessments in the course on the Assessments tab. Make sure<br />

to use the Checkmark for Report Cards mark type.<br />

Marks template pieces display grades and/or marks for assessments by subject. The following<br />

marks template pieces are available.<br />

Marks (2 col, 1/3 Width)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 255


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Marks (3 Column, 1/3 Width)<br />

Marks (4 Column, 1/3 Width)<br />

Marks (5 Column, 1/3 Width)<br />

Marks (5 Column, 1/3 Width, Fixed Height)<br />

Marks (6 Column, 1/3 Width)<br />

Marks (7 Columns)<br />

Messages template pieces display custom message text entered on the Messages tab. Message<br />

X (1 through 9) options are available and all display the text entered in the Messages fields in<br />

full-page width with and without borders. Message X (10 through 12) display the text entered in<br />

the Messages fields in full-page width without borders. Text entered in the Additional Mark<br />

Explanation Message field displays with the Index template piece. Each message field allows up<br />

to 6,000 characters of text.<br />

Message 1 (No Border)<br />

Message 1 (with a Border)<br />

256 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Page Break template piece inserts a page break between multiple pages of a report card<br />

indicating the end of one student’s report card. This template piece MUST be the last sequence<br />

number in the list of template pieces.<br />

Parent Signature Line template piece displays the text “Parent Signature” and a blank line for<br />

the signature.<br />

Parent Signature Line<br />

Parent Comments template piece displays an area for parents to submit hand-written comments.<br />

Parent’s Comments<br />

Placement Status template pieces displays promotion or placement to a succeeding grade or<br />

retention in the current grade. The following placement status template pieces are available.<br />

End of Year Placement<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 257


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

End of Year Placement (Assigned, Retained)<br />

End of Year Placement (Promoted, Placed,<br />

Retained)<br />

End of Year Placement - Kindergarten<br />

End of Year Placement - Version 2<br />

Promoted_Placed_Retained<br />

Principal Signature template pieces display the principal’s name or possibly a blank line for the<br />

principal’s signature. The following principal signature template pieces are available.<br />

Principal Signature Line<br />

258 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Principal Signature with Name<br />

Reading Progress template piece displays marks for reading progress.<br />

ReadingProgress_Above_At_Below<br />

School Header template piece displays the report card title, the school district name and the<br />

name of the school on separate lines centered in the column or on the page. The school district<br />

name that displays in this template piece was entered on the District Setup screen. The name of<br />

the school was entered on the Schools Setup screen. The title was entered in the Report Card<br />

Title field on the Messages tab. If you do not enter any text in the Report Card Title field on the<br />

Messages tab, a title does not display when using the School Header template piece.<br />

School Header (Title, District &<br />

School)<br />

Student Header template pieces display the possible combination of the student’s name, grade,<br />

teacher’s name, school year and principal’s name. The following student header template pieces<br />

are available.<br />

Student Header<br />

Student Header with Principal<br />

Teacher Comments template pieces display teacher’s comments. These comments are not<br />

associated with individual subjects. The following teacher comments template pieces are<br />

available.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 259


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Teacher Comments (Full Page Length)<br />

260 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Teacher Comments (Half Page Length)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 261


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Teacher Comments Trimester (Full Page)<br />

Standard Elementary Report Card (11x17 landscape,<br />

2 columns)<br />

Attendance template pieces displays attendance totals for grading periods. The following<br />

attendance template pieces are available.<br />

Attendance (½ width, Present, Tardy, Absent)<br />

262 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Attendance (3 Columns, ½ Width, Abs, Tar)<br />

Attendance (4 Columns - Half Width)<br />

Attendance (5 Columns, ½ w, Pres, Poss, ExAT,<br />

UnExAT)<br />

Attendance (5 Column ½ Width, Abs, Tar)<br />

Attendance (5 Column, ½ Width, Pres, Abs, Tar)<br />

Blank Line template piece inserts a blank line of space. Using this template piece is the same as<br />

specifying 1 in the Rows After column on the Template tab.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 263


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Class Comments template pieces display comments about an individual class in the current and<br />

multiple grading periods. Use this template piece paired with a marks template piece and then<br />

map both pieces to the same course to display the comments with the course marks. The following<br />

class comments template pieces are available.<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width, 2 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width, 4 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width, 6 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width,<br />

12 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 2 Rows)<br />

264 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 4 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 8 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Q1-Q4, 1/2 Width, 2 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (Q1-Q4, 1/2 Width, 4 Rows)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 265


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Class Comments (Q1-Q4, Full Width, 2 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (T1-T3, Full Width, 2 Rows)<br />

Class Comments (T1-T3, Full Width, 4 Rows)<br />

Column Break template piece inserts a break between columns.<br />

Current Date template piece displays the current date.<br />

Current Date<br />

File Header template piece inserts invisible page-size formatting codes. This template piece<br />

MUST be the first template piece in the template.<br />

Geometric Shapes template piece displays marks for recognizing geometric shapes.<br />

266 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Geometric Shapes<br />

Index template piece displays an explanation of marks used on the report card based on the<br />

marks selected on the Assessments tab and descriptions in the Mark Types setup. The amount<br />

of text that displays in each column cannot be adjusted. Use this template piece paired with text<br />

entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field on the Messages tab.<br />

Index<br />

Kindergarten Letters template piece displays marks for recognizing lower and upper case letters<br />

and letter sounds. The following kindergarten letters template pieces are available.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 267


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Custom Kindergarten Letter Box - Full Width<br />

Custom K Letter Box (Upper, Lower, Sound)<br />

Letter Recognition template pieces display marks for recognizing upper and lower case letters<br />

by grading period. The following letter recognition template pieces are available.<br />

Letter_LowerCase_4RepPer<br />

Letter_UpperCase_4RepPer<br />

Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer is used specifically for sounds.<br />

268 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer<br />

Note: When using letter or word template pieces, you must set up the letters<br />

and/or words as assessments in the course on the Assessments tab. Make sure<br />

to use the Checkmark for Report Cards mark type.<br />

Marks template pieces display grades and/or marks for assessments by subject. The following<br />

marks template pieces are available.<br />

Marks (2 Columns)<br />

Marks (3 Columns)<br />

Marks (3 Columns, 1/2 Width)<br />

Marks (4 Columns)<br />

Marks (4 Columns, 1/2 Width)<br />

Marks (5 Columns)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 269


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Marks (5 Columns, 1/2 Width)<br />

Marks (6 Columns)<br />

Marks (7 Columns)<br />

Messages template pieces display custom message text entered on the Messages tab. Message<br />

X (1 through 12) options are available and all display the text entered in the Messages fields in<br />

two size formats: half-page and full-page widths. Each option is available with and without<br />

borders. Text entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field displays with the Index<br />

template piece. Each message field allows up to 6,000 characters of text.<br />

Message 1 (1/2 Width & Border)<br />

Message 1 (Half Width)<br />

Message 1 (Page Width & Border)<br />

Message 1 (Page Width)<br />

One Column Section template piece inserts a one-column section on a page that uses a<br />

two-column format.<br />

Page Break template piece inserts a page break between multiple pages of a report card<br />

indicating the end of one student’s report card. This template piece MUST be the last sequence<br />

number in the list of template pieces.<br />

Parent Signature template pieces display the possible combination of the student’s name, a<br />

blank line for the parent’s signature and the text “Conference Requested? Yes No.” The following<br />

parent signature template pieces are available.<br />

270 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Parent Signature Line<br />

Parent Signature Section (Full Width)<br />

Placement Status template pieces display promotion or placement to a succeeding grade or<br />

retention in the current grade. The following placement status template pieces are available.<br />

End of Year Placement<br />

End of Year Placement (Full Width)<br />

End of Year Placement (Promoted, Placed, Retained)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 271


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

End of Yr Place (Pro, Pla, Ret, Exp) - 1/2 Width<br />

Principal Signature template piece displays the principal’s name and a blank line for a signature.<br />

Principal Signature Line<br />

School Header template piece displays the school district name, the name of the school and<br />

report card title on separate lines centered in the column or on the page. The school district name<br />

that displays in this template piece was entered on the District Setup screen. The name of the<br />

school was entered on the Schools Setup screen. The title was entered in the Report Card Title<br />

field on the Messages tab. If you do not enter any text in the Report Card Title field on the<br />

Messages tab, a title does not display when using the School Header template piece.<br />

School Header (District, School &<br />

Title)<br />

Student Header template piece displays the combination of the student’s name, grade, teacher’s<br />

name, school year, principal’s name and student’s identification number. The following student<br />

header template pieces are available.<br />

Student Header with Principal<br />

Student Header (Teacher, Principal, ID)<br />

272 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Teacher & Principal Signatures template piece displays the teacher, date and principal.<br />

Teacher & Principal Signatures<br />

Teacher Comments template pieces display teacher’s comments. These comments are not<br />

associated with individual subjects. The following teacher comments template pieces are<br />

available.<br />

Teacher Comments (1/2 Page)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 273


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Teacher Comments (1/2 Page, Semester 1 & 2)<br />

The size of this template piece expands based on the amount of text entered.<br />

Teacher Comments (Curr Per, Full Width, No Border)<br />

Teacher Comments (Curr Per, 1/2 Width)<br />

274 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Teacher Comments (Full Page)<br />

Teacher Comments (Full Width)<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 275


Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates<br />

Teacher Comments (Trimester, Full Width)<br />

Two Column Section template piece inserts a two-column section on a page that uses a<br />

one-column format.<br />

276 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix B: Sample Traditional Report<br />

Card<br />

The purpose of this appendix is to provide detailed instructions for creating a sample traditional or<br />

secondary report card that is representative of the type of report card you can create for your<br />

school district. In this report card sample, the school district is integrated with a student<br />

information system and is not printing this report card from GradeBook.<br />

Although secondary report cards are printed from your student information system, it is still<br />

necessary to set up the report card in GradeBook. Following this procedure creates an entry<br />

screen that allow teachers to enter grades from their grade book and ensures that the information<br />

transfers into the proper fields in the student information system.<br />

Traditional Report Card Entry Screen Example<br />

Create Report Cards – General Tab<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page, click the Report Card Builder link under Grading<br />

Setup.<br />

2. On the Report Cards screen click the Add a Report Card link near the bottom of the<br />

screen.<br />

The General link is highlighted in the Web site banner.<br />

3. On the General tab, enter High School Report Card.<br />

4. Select Report Card as the type of report.<br />

5. Select the Secondary format.<br />

Note: You do not need to select a template if you are not printing report cards<br />

from GradeBook.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 277


Assign Grade Levels to Schools – Grade Levels Tab<br />

6. Select Advanced Calculations in the Which Average Calculation Method would you like<br />

to use? list.<br />

7. Select 2 in the Select the rounding precision to use when averaging numeric grades list.<br />

8. Select 2 in the Select the rounding precision to use when averaging from letter grades list.<br />

9. Verify that Testing is selected as the report card mode. This is the default option.<br />

10. Select Live in the data integration method list if your district is integrated with a student<br />

information system.<br />

11. Select the student information system your district is integrated with in the data<br />

integration source list.<br />

Secondary Option on the General Tab<br />

12. Select No to prevent GradeBook users with school administrator access from making<br />

changes to this report card. Yes is the default option and allows GradeBook users with<br />

administrator access to edit the report card.<br />

13. Select Yes to display the report card on Classic or Beta ParentAccess. The default option<br />

is No. Select No if your school district does not use Classic or Beta ParentAccess or does<br />

not want to display the report card on Classic or Beta ParentAccess.<br />

14. Click Save.<br />

The Grade Levels tab displays automatically.<br />

Assign Grade Levels to Schools – Grade Levels Tab<br />

1. On the Grade Levels tab, select the check boxes in the Grade Levels 09, 10, 11, 12<br />

columns for the school that will use this report card.<br />

2. Click Save.<br />

278 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Assign Order to Reporting Periods – Periods Tab<br />

3. Click Periods in the Web site banner.<br />

Grade Levels Tab on the Report Card Screen<br />

Assign Order to Reporting Periods – Periods Tab<br />

1. On the Periods tab, enter 1 in the Seq# column for the 1st Quarter (Q1).<br />

2. Enter 2 in the Seq# column for the 2nd Quarter (Q2).<br />

3. Enter 3 in the Seq# column for the Exam Sem 1 (EX1).<br />

4. Enter 4 in the Seq# column for the Sem 1 Avg (S1).<br />

5. Enter 5 in the Seq# column for the Final 1st (FIN1).<br />

6. Enter 6 in the Seq# column for the 3rd Quarter (Q3).<br />

7. Enter 7 in the Seq# column for the 4th Quarter (Q4).<br />

8. Enter 8 in the Seq# column for the Exam Sem 2 (EX2).<br />

9. Enter 9 in the Seq# column for the Sem 2 Avg (S2).<br />

10. Enter 10 in the Seq# column for the Year Final (YF).<br />

11. Click Save.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 279


Add Assessments – Assessments Tab<br />

Seq# Column on the Periods Tab<br />

12. Click Assessments in the Web site banner.<br />

Add Assessments – Assessments Tab<br />

In this report card sample, since the school district is integrated with a student information system,<br />

we must add the semester exams and semester averages as assessments so the marks are<br />

transferred properly to the student information system.<br />

1. Enter Grade in the first blank row in the Assessment column.<br />

2. Enter 10 in the Seq# column. Use sequence numbers in increments of 10 so that you can<br />

add assessments later if needed between existing sequence numbers.<br />

3. Select Academic-HS in the Mark Type list.<br />

Note: The Mark Type options vary depending on the student information system<br />

with which your school district is integrated. Make sure to select the mark type<br />

that is unique to the school building you are creating the report card for.<br />

4. Select the District Default in the Default Grading Scale list.<br />

5. Select Y in the Value Req? list to identify teachers who have not submitted grades for any<br />

of their students for this particular assessment on the Report Card Verification Report.<br />

6. Select Grading Period in the External Reference list.<br />

Note: The External Reference options vary depending on the student information<br />

system with which your school district is integrated.<br />

7. Continue to enter the following assessments in the appropriate columns, respectively.<br />

280 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods – Requirements Tab<br />

Assessment Seq# Mark Type Default Grading Scale Value Req? External Reference<br />

Comment 20 Comment N/A N Comment 1<br />

Semester Exam 30 Academic-HS N/A N Exam<br />

Semester 1 Average 40 Academic-HS District Default Y Average<br />

Semester 1 Final 50 Academic-HS District Default N Average<br />

Semester 2 Average 60 Academic-HS District Default Y Average<br />

Year Final 70 Academic-HS District Default Y Final<br />

8. Click Save.<br />

Assessments Tab on the Report Card Screen<br />

9. Click Requirements in the Web site banner.<br />

Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods –<br />

Requirements Tab<br />

You must designate the reporting periods in which each assessment will be used.<br />

1. On the Requirements tab, select the Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 reporting periods for the Grade<br />

assessment.<br />

2. Continue to associate the following assessments with the appropriate reporting periods,<br />

respectively.<br />

Assessment<br />

Comment<br />

Semester Exam<br />

Semester 1 Average<br />

Semester 1 Final<br />

Semester 2 Average<br />

Year Final<br />

Reporting Period(s)<br />

Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4<br />

EX1, EX2<br />

S1<br />

FIN1<br />

S2<br />

YF<br />

3. Click Save.<br />

A check box that is not selected denotes that an assessment is not required for the<br />

reporting period and the assessment appears shaded on the Report Card Entry screen.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 281


Determine Protected Marks – Protected Marks Tab<br />

Requirements Tab on the Report Card Tab<br />

4. Click Protected Marks in the Web site banner.<br />

Determine Protected Marks – Protected Marks Tab<br />

For this report card sample, we will designate the marks that will not be overridden when<br />

GradeBook exports report card grades to the student information system.<br />

1. On the Protected Marks tab, select Override All Marks Except for the Following.<br />

2. Type W in the Mark column in the first blank row.<br />

3. Type WD in the next blank row.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

Protected Marks Tab on the Report Card Screen<br />

Note: If your school district is not integrated with a student information system,<br />

you must still select one of the three Protected Marks options or the report card<br />

will not work.<br />

5. Click Advanced Calc in the Web site banner.<br />

282 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Assign Grade Entry Methods to Assessments and Reporting Periods – Advanced Calcs Tab<br />

Assign Grade Entry Methods to Assessments and Reporting<br />

Periods – Advanced Calcs Tab<br />

Since we selected Use Advanced Calculations as the Average Calculation Method on the General<br />

tab, we must now assign report card grade entry methods to all the assessments in all the<br />

reporting periods used on the report card.<br />

1. On the Advanced Calc tab, select Pull from Gradebook in the Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 reporting<br />

periods lists for the Grade assessment.<br />

2. Continue to assign the following grade entry methods to the following assessments in the<br />

appropriate reporting periods, respectively.<br />

Grade Entry Method Assessment Reporting Period<br />

Manual Entry Comment Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4<br />

Manual Entry Semester Exam EX1, EX2<br />

<strong>System</strong> Calculation Semester 1 Average S1<br />

<strong>System</strong> Calculation Semester 1 Final FIN1<br />

<strong>System</strong> Calculation Semester 2 Average S2<br />

<strong>System</strong> Calculation Year Final YF<br />

3. Click Save.<br />

4. Click <strong>System</strong> Calcs in the Web site banner.<br />

Set Up Average Calculation Methods for <strong>System</strong><br />

Calculations – <strong>System</strong> Calcs Tab<br />

Since we have assigned report card grade entry methods to all assessments in the reporting<br />

periods used on the report card, we must now set up how grades will be calculated for the<br />

Semester Averages, Semester Final and Year Final assessments that were designated as<br />

<strong>System</strong> Calculations.<br />

1. On the <strong>System</strong> Calcs tab, select Semester 1 Average in the Calculation list.<br />

Note: The options that display in this list were assigned as <strong>System</strong> Calculation on<br />

the Advanced Calc screen.<br />

2. Select Q1 Grade in the Period & Assessment column.<br />

3. Type 2 in the Weight column. This number represents the significance of the Q1 grade in<br />

relationship to the whole average.<br />

Note: Weights for exams and finals are usually predetermined by your school<br />

district.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 283


Set Up Average Calculation Methods for <strong>System</strong> Calculations – <strong>System</strong> Calcs Tab<br />

<strong>System</strong> Calcs Tab on the Report Card Screen<br />

4. Continue to associate average calculation methods with weights in the following columns,<br />

respectively, for the Semester 1 Average calculation.<br />

Period & Assessment<br />

Q2 Grade 2<br />

EX1 Semester Exam 1<br />

Weight<br />

5. Select Use Averages (from Gradebook) in the Select the Calculation Method list. This<br />

means that the quarterly percentages from the grade book are used when calculating<br />

semester finals and year-end final averages.<br />

Note: You can select different calculation methods for each system calculation<br />

being defined.<br />

6. Select Use the Grade Book Grading Scale in the Select the Grading Scale list. This<br />

means that the grading scale selected by the teacher on the Grading Scale Setup screen<br />

will be used when calculating semester finals and year-end final averages.<br />

7. Click Save.<br />

Note: These system calculations will be available when setting up the Year to<br />

Date calculation method.<br />

8. Select Semester 2 Average in the Calculation list.<br />

9. Continue to associate average calculation methods with weights in the following columns,<br />

respectively, for the Semester 2 Average calculation.<br />

284 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Set Up Average Calculation Methods for <strong>System</strong> Calculations – <strong>System</strong> Calcs Tab<br />

Period & Assessment<br />

Q3 Grade 2<br />

Q4 Grade 2<br />

EX2 Semester Exam 1<br />

Weight<br />

10. Select Use Averages (from Gradebook) in the Select the Calculation Method list.<br />

11. Select Use the Grade Book Grading Scale in the Select the Grading Scale list.<br />

12. Click Save.<br />

13. Select Semester 1 Final in the Calculation list.<br />

14. Continue to associate average calculation methods with weights in the following columns,<br />

respectively, for the Semester 1 Final calculation.<br />

Period & Assessment Weight<br />

Q1 Grade 2<br />

Q2 Grade 2<br />

EX1 Semester Exam 1<br />

15. Select Use Averages (from Gradebook) in the Select the Calculation Method list.<br />

16. Select Use the Grade Book Grading Scale in the Select the Grading Scale list.<br />

17. Click Save.<br />

Period & Assessment and Weight Columns on the <strong>System</strong><br />

Calcs Tab<br />

18. Select Year Final in the Calculation list.<br />

19. Continue to associate average calculation methods with weights in the following columns,<br />

respectively, for the Year Final calculation.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 285


Set Up Year to Date Calculation Method<br />

Period & Assessment Weight<br />

Q1 Grade 2<br />

Q2 Grade 2<br />

EX1 Semester Exam 1<br />

Q3 Grade 2<br />

Q4 Grade 2<br />

EX2 Semester Exam 1<br />

20. Select Use Averages (from Gradebook) in the Select the Calculation Method list.<br />

21. Select Use the Grade Book Grading Scale in the Select the Grading Scale list.<br />

22. Click Save.<br />

Calculation List on the <strong>System</strong> Calcs Tab<br />

Set Up Year to Date Calculation Method<br />

We want to assign a calculation for which we want a cumulative year-to-date grade to display in<br />

teachers' grade books.<br />

1. On the Year To Date Calc tab, select YF Year Final in the Calculation list.<br />

Note: You can only select one calculation at a time to be used in the Year to Date<br />

calculation method.<br />

2. Select the check box next to the Enable Year to Date calculation on teacher gradebooks<br />

option.<br />

3. Click Save.<br />

286 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Compile Report Card<br />

The following message displays, “It is recommended that gradebooks that use this report<br />

card be recalculated by clicking here.<br />

”<br />

Clicking here Ling on the Year To Date Calc<br />

Compile Report Card<br />

The report card or interim must be compiled successfully before teachers can use it to enter<br />

grades on the Report Card Entry screen. GradeBook runs numerous verifications to make sure<br />

the report card is set up properly. Once the report card has been compiled, each time it is<br />

changed, it must be recompiled. The status displays in the Compile Results column on the Report<br />

Cards screen where you can easily see if the report card contains warnings or errors.<br />

1. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link.<br />

The compiled report card or interim displays in a separate browser window listing any<br />

warnings or errors that were detected during compilation. A reference number displays<br />

next to the description of each warning or error. This reference number is used for<br />

troubleshooting purposes by GradeBook Support personnel.<br />

Error and Warning Messages from the Compile Tab<br />

The following warnings and/or errors may occur:<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 287


Compile Report Card<br />

• Warning – Potential errors were found during compilation, but teachers can use the<br />

report card to enter grades on the Report Card Entry screen. It is recommended to<br />

investigate the warnings and try to correct any issues.<br />

• Critical error – Errors were found during compilation that prevent the report card<br />

from displaying and teachers from entering grades on the Report Card Entry screen<br />

until they are corrected.<br />

• Severe error – Errors were found during compilation that prevent teachers from<br />

entering grades on the Report Card Entry screen until they are corrected.<br />

If there are no warnings or errors, the following message displays. “Congratulations, no<br />

errors were found! The report card compiled successfully.” Proceed with step 7.<br />

2. If there are any warnings or errors, review the description, and then click the Go link.<br />

The screen where the issue occurred that caused the warning or error displays behind the<br />

Compiled Report Card/Interim screen.<br />

3. Troubleshoot the issue(s) as needed.<br />

4. Return to the Compiled Report Card/Interim screen, and then click Refresh.<br />

If the warning or error was corrected, it does not display in the list. Proceed with step 5. If<br />

the warning or error was not corrected, repeat step 2 through step 4 until the issue is<br />

corrected. If you cannot correct the issue, follow your appropriate GradeBook support<br />

channel.<br />

5. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link again.<br />

6. If the report card compiled without critical or severe errors, close the Compile Report<br />

Card/Interim screen.<br />

7. On the Web site banner, click the General tab.<br />

8. Select the Active report card mode to make the report card available to teachers to enter<br />

grades.<br />

9. Click Save.<br />

10. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link for the final time.<br />

11. Close the Compile Report Card/Interim screen.<br />

Note: If you have to make changes to a report card in Active mode, you must first<br />

change the report card mode to Testing.<br />

Note: You can compile a report card without opening it on the Report Cards<br />

screen by clicking the Compile All Active Changed Report Cards link or by clicking<br />

in the Actions column.<br />

288 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix B: Sample Traditional Report Card<br />

Report Card Entry Screen<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 289


Appendix B: Sample Traditional Report Card<br />

This page intentionally left blank.<br />

290 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Appendix C: Sample Standards-Based<br />

Report Card<br />

The purpose of this appendix is to provide detailed instructions for creating a sample<br />

standards-based report card that is representative of the type of report card you can create for<br />

your school district. GradeBook provides numerous, custom-designed options for printing report<br />

cards, a few of which are discussed in a later section. This sample details a few of the more<br />

complex template options including letter boxes, using RTF code to enhance the display of your<br />

report card and inserting subject continued subheadings when needed.<br />

You are not limited to the options used in this example when building report cards in GradeBook.<br />

Typically, a district designs the report card and standards assessment language for each subject<br />

in advance. This design phase may include consideration of the template options that GradeBook<br />

offers. See “Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates.” Once the design has been agreed<br />

upon, the GradeBook system manager creates the report card in GradeBook following a similar<br />

procedure as the one included in this chapter.<br />

Upon completion of this chapter, you will have created a report card similar to “Standards-Based<br />

Report Card Example – Page 1.”<br />

Standards-Based Report Card Example – Page 1<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 291


Create Report Cards – General Tab<br />

Standards-Based Report Card Example – Page 2<br />

Create Report Cards – General Tab<br />

1. On the Administrator Home Page, click the Report Card Builder link under Grading<br />

Setup.<br />

2. On the Report Cards screen click the Add a Report Card link near the bottom of the<br />

screen.<br />

The General link is highlighted in the Web site banner.<br />

3. On the General tab, enter 1st Grade Report Card.<br />

4. Select Report Card as the type of report.<br />

5. Select the Elementary format.<br />

6. Select Standard Elementary Report Card (Legal tri-fold) in the template list.<br />

7. Verify that Use Basic Calculations is selected in the Which Average Calculation Method<br />

would you like to use? list. This is the default option.<br />

8. Select 2 in the Select the rounding precision to use when averaging numeric grades list.<br />

9. Select 2 in the Select the rounding precision to use when averaging from letter grades list.<br />

10. Verify that Testing is selected as the report card mode. This is the default option.<br />

11. Select None in the data integration method list if your district is not integrated with a<br />

student information system or if your district is integrated with a student information<br />

system, but you do not export marks to the system.<br />

292 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Assign Grade Levels to Schools – Grade Levels Tab<br />

Elementary Option on the General Tab<br />

12. Select None in the data integration source list if you selected None in step 11.<br />

13. Select No to prevent GradeBook users with school administrator access from making<br />

changes to this report card. Yes is the default option and allows GradeBook users with<br />

administrator access to edit the report card.<br />

14. Select Yes to display the report card on Classic or Beta ParentAccess. The default option<br />

is No. Select No if your school district does not use Classic or Beta ParentAccess or does<br />

not want to display the report card on Classic or Beta ParentAccess.<br />

15. Click Save.<br />

The Grade Levels screen automatically displays.<br />

Assign Grade Levels to Schools – Grade Levels Tab<br />

1. On the Grade Levels tab, select the check boxes in the grade level columns for each<br />

school that will use this report card.<br />

2. Click Save.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 293


Assign Order to Reporting Periods – Periods Tab<br />

3. Click Periods in the Web site banner.<br />

Grade Levels Tab on the Report Card Screen<br />

Assign Order to Reporting Periods – Periods Tab<br />

1. On the Periods tab, enter 1 in the Seq# column for the row that represents the first<br />

reporting period.<br />

2. Enter 2 in the Seq# column for the row that represents the second reporting period.<br />

3. Enter 3 in the Seq# column for the row that represents the third reporting period.<br />

4. Enter 4 in the Seq# column for the row that represents the fourth reporting period.<br />

5. Enter 5 in the Seq# column for the row that represents the final reporting period.<br />

6. Enter 6 in the Seq# column for the row that represents the all-year reporting period.<br />

Note: This step is necessary only if a Kindergarten Letter template piece is used<br />

on the report card.<br />

7. Click Save.<br />

294 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Add Courses – Courses Tab<br />

8. Click Courses in the Web site banner.<br />

Seq# Column on the Periods Tab<br />

Add Courses – Courses Tab<br />

1. On the Courses tab, enter 10 in the first blank row in the Seq# column.<br />

2. Enter Reading in the first blank row in the Course Name (for Rpt Card) column next to<br />

Seq#10.<br />

3. Continue to enter the following numbers in the Seq# column and subject names in the<br />

Course Name (for Rpt Card) column, respectively.<br />

Seq#<br />

Course<br />

20 Writing<br />

30 Mathematics<br />

40 Science<br />

50 Social Studies<br />

60 Art<br />

70 Music<br />

80 Physical Education<br />

90 Work Habits & Skills<br />

100 Attendance<br />

Note: Use sequence numbers in increments of 10 so that you can add subjects<br />

later between existing subjects if needed.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 295


Add Courses – Courses Tab<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

Notice the Add Courses link displays in the Action column next to each subject entered.<br />

Add Courses Link in the Action Column on the Courses Tab<br />

5. Click the Add Courses link in the Action column for the Reading subject.<br />

The Course Search window displays.<br />

Search for Courses<br />

On the Course Search window, Reading displays in the Course Name field because GradeBook<br />

searches for courses that matches the same name that was entered in the Course Name (for Rpt<br />

Card) column on the Courses tab. All courses called Reading or course names that start with the<br />

word Reading display.<br />

1. Click the check box in the Select column for Reading – Gr 01.<br />

296 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Add Courses – Courses Tab<br />

Course Search Window<br />

2. Click Add the selected courses.<br />

3. Close the Course Search window.<br />

Reading – Gr 01 displays in the Included Courses column next to the Reading subject on<br />

the Courses tab. All class sections derived from the Reading – Gr 01 course will be<br />

associated with the Reading subject on this report card.<br />

Included Courses Column on the Courses Tab<br />

It may happen that you are searching for courses that are named differently than the course name<br />

you are using on the report card.<br />

1. On the Courses tab, click the Add Courses link in the Action column for the Physical<br />

Education subject.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 297


Add Courses – Courses Tab<br />

Specific Course Searched on the Course Search Window<br />

2. Delete Physical Education from the Course Name field, and then click Go.<br />

Note: To narrow the search for only first grade Physical Education courses, you<br />

could select 01 in the Grade list.<br />

3. Select Fitness – Gr 01.<br />

4. Click Add the selected course.<br />

5. Close the Course Search window.<br />

Continue to Add Courses<br />

1. On the Courses tab, continue to add courses to subjects until you have added all of the<br />

necessary courses to all the subject names on the report card.<br />

Course Name (for Rpt Card) and Included Courses Columns on the Courses<br />

Tab<br />

Note: In some instances it may be necessary to add more than one course to a<br />

particular subject. For example, if the special education math teacher is<br />

responsible for entering report card grades, associate the special education math<br />

course as well as the regular education math course with the Mathematics course<br />

name on the report card.<br />

Note: If you have associated a course with a course name and it does not<br />

immediately display in the Included Courses column, click Save to refresh the<br />

screen.<br />

298 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Add Assessments – Assessments Tab<br />

2. Enter 15 in the first available blank row in the Seq# column to add another course that was<br />

forgotten.<br />

Note: Using sequence numbers in increments of five allows newly added courses<br />

to be inserted between courses that have already been added. The sequence<br />

numbers control the order in which the courses appear on the Report Card Entry<br />

screen for teachers, but not the printed report card.<br />

3. Enter Letter & Sound Recognition in the first available blank row in the Course Name<br />

(for Rpt Card) column.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

Letter & Sound Recognition displays between Reading and Writing in the appropriate<br />

order in the list of courses.<br />

5. Click the Add Courses link in the Action column next to the Letter & Sound Recognition<br />

subject to search for the appropriate courses to add on the Course Search window. See<br />

“Search for Courses.”<br />

The Course Search window displays.<br />

Letter Courses Searched on the Course Search Window<br />

6. Select Letter R – Gr 01 in the list of search results, and then click Add the selected<br />

courses.<br />

On the Courses tab Letter R – Gr 01 displays in the Included Courses column next to the<br />

Letter & Sound Recognition subject.<br />

7. Click Save.<br />

8. Click Assessments in the Web site banner.<br />

Add Assessments – Assessments Tab<br />

The course names entered on the Courses tab display alphabetically in the Course list on the<br />

Assessments tab.<br />

1. On the Assessments tab, select Mathematics in the Course list.<br />

2. Enter Grade in the first blank row in the Assessment column.<br />

3. Enter 10 in the Seq# column. Use sequence numbers in increments of 10 so that you can<br />

add assessments later if needed between existing sequence numbers.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 299


Add Assessments – Assessments Tab<br />

4. Select A-F in the Mark Type list.<br />

5. Select Lake View Primary School Default in the Default Grading Scale list.<br />

6. Select Highest Achieved in the Default Calculation list to instruct GradeBook which<br />

calculation method to use in calculating students’ marks.<br />

7. Select Y in the Pull Mark? list to instruct GradeBook to automatically populate the<br />

assessment mark when the grade is automatically calculated.<br />

8. Select Y in the Print Mark? list to instruct GradeBook to automatically print the assessment<br />

mark on the report card.<br />

9. Select Y in the Value Req? list to identify teachers who have not submitted grades for any<br />

of their students for this particular assessment on the Report Card Verification Report.<br />

10. Continue to enter the following assessments, sequence numbers, mark types, default<br />

grading scales, default calculations, pull mark, print mark and required value options for<br />

the Mathematics course.<br />

Assessment Seq# Mark<br />

Type<br />

Default<br />

Grading Scale<br />

Default<br />

Calculation<br />

Pull<br />

Mark<br />

Print<br />

Mark<br />

Standardized Test Score 12 Points N/A None Y N Y<br />

Effort 20 1-4<br />

Numeration 30<br />

Applies place value concept 40 1-4<br />

Classifies, compares and orders numbers 50 1-4<br />

Represents fractions 60 1-4<br />

Identifies and counts money 70 1-4<br />

Understands addition and subtraction 80 1-4<br />

Measurement 90<br />

Measures accurately 100 1-4<br />

Applies concepts of time 110 1-4<br />

Geometry 120<br />

Identifies and compares geometric shapes 130 1-4<br />

Recognizes symmetry 140 1-4<br />

Patterns, Functions and Algebra 150<br />

Recognizes, creates and extends patterns 160 1-4<br />

Represents story problems 170 1-4<br />

Rubric Scale<br />

(1-4)<br />

Rubric Scale<br />

(1-4)<br />

Rubric Scale<br />

(1-4)<br />

Rubric Scale<br />

(1-4)<br />

Rubric Scale<br />

(1-4)<br />

Rubric Scale<br />

(1-4)<br />

Rubric Scale<br />

(1-4)<br />

Rubric Scale<br />

(1-4)<br />

Rubric Scale<br />

(1-4)<br />

Rubric Scale<br />

(1-4)<br />

Rubric Scale<br />

(1-4)<br />

Rubric Scale<br />

(1-4)<br />

None N Y<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Value<br />

Req<br />

300 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Add Assessments – Assessments Tab<br />

Assessment Seq# Mark<br />

Type<br />

Default<br />

Grading Scale<br />

Default<br />

Calculation<br />

Pull<br />

Mark<br />

Print<br />

Mark<br />

Value<br />

Req<br />

Data Analysis and Probability 180<br />

Classifies and sorts objects 190 1-4<br />

Rubric Scale<br />

(1-4)<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Evaluates graphs, tables and charts 200 1-4<br />

Rubric Scale<br />

(1-4)<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Creates graphs, tables and charts 210 1-4<br />

Rubric Scale<br />

(1-4)<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Problem Solving and Mathematical<br />

Processes<br />

220<br />

Applies strategies to solve problems 230 1-4<br />

Rubric Scale<br />

(1-4)<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Note: For the standards headings: Numeration, Measurement, Geometry,<br />

Patterns, Functions and Algebra, Data Analysis and Probability and Problem<br />

Solving and Mathematical Processes, you can leave the Mark Type option blank<br />

because they do not receive a mark.<br />

Note: If you do not select an option in the Mark Type list, the default option,<br />

Period Attendance, displays after you save. The default options: N/A, None, Y, Y<br />

and N, respectively, display in the Default Grading Scale, Default Calculation, Pull<br />

Mark?, Print Mark? and Value Req? lists after you save, if you do not select any<br />

options.<br />

11. Click Save.<br />

Course List on the Assessments Tab<br />

12. Continue to enter the following assessments, sequence numbers, mark types, default<br />

grading scales, default calculations, pull mark, print mark and required value options for<br />

the Reading course.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 301


Add Assessments – Assessments Tab<br />

Assessment Seq# Mark<br />

Type<br />

Grade 10 A-F<br />

Default Grading<br />

Scale<br />

Lake View Primary<br />

School Default<br />

Default<br />

Calculation<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Effort 20 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) None N<br />

Basic Reading Skills 30<br />

Recognizes connection between letters<br />

and<br />

40 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Recognizes sight words 50 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Reads fluently 60 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Comprehension Skills 70<br />

Predicts & supports from text 80 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Draws conclusions 90 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Summarizes 100 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Compares & contrasts 110 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Self-monitors reading 120 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Respond to multi-level questions 130 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Acquires Vocabulary 140<br />

Uses context clues 150 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Identifies word parts & meanings 160 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Classifies words into categories 170 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Comprehends Informational Text 180<br />

Applies above skills to non-fiction 190 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Identifies main ideas & details 200 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Comprehends Literary Text 210<br />

Applies above skills to fiction 220 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Identifies setting, characters & events 230 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Pull<br />

Mark<br />

Print<br />

Mark<br />

Y Y Y<br />

Value<br />

Req<br />

13. Continue to enter the following assessments, sequence numbers, mark types, default<br />

grading scales, default calculations, pull mark, print mark and required value options for<br />

the Writing course.<br />

302 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Add Assessments – Assessments Tab<br />

Assessment Seq# Mark<br />

Type<br />

Mark 10 A-F<br />

Default Grading<br />

Scale<br />

Lake View Primary<br />

School Default<br />

Default<br />

Calculation<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Effort 20 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) None N<br />

Writing Processes 30<br />

Uses writing process (drafts, revises,<br />

edits)<br />

Writing Applications 50<br />

40 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Responds to literature 60 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Writes beginning, middle and end 70 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Writes using main idea and supporting<br />

details<br />

80 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Writes friendly letters and invitations 90 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Applies Writing Conventions 100<br />

Prints legibly 110 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Spells grade appropriate words 120 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Uses correct punctuation and<br />

capitalization<br />

130 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Writes with correct grammar 140 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Oral communications 150<br />

Speaks with correct grammar 160 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Stays on topic 170 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Last<br />

Achieved<br />

Pull<br />

Mark<br />

Print<br />

Mark<br />

Y Y Y<br />

Value<br />

Req<br />

14. Continue to enter the following assessments, sequence numbers, mark types, default<br />

grading scales, default calculations, pull mark, print mark and required value options for<br />

the Science course.<br />

Assessment Seq# Mark<br />

Type<br />

Default Grading<br />

Scale<br />

Default<br />

Calculation<br />

Pull<br />

Mark<br />

Print<br />

Mark<br />

Grade 10 A-F<br />

Lake View Primary<br />

School Default<br />

Power Law Y Y Y<br />

Effort 20 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) None N<br />

Earth and Space Science 30<br />

Identifies relationships of Earth's systems 40 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) Power Law<br />

Analyzes weather 50 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) Power Law<br />

Value<br />

Req<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 303


Add Assessments – Assessments Tab<br />

Assessment Seq# Mark<br />

Type<br />

Life Science 60<br />

Recognizes concepts of living things 70 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) Power Law<br />

Physical Science 80<br />

Compares physical characteristics and<br />

changes<br />

90 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) Power Law<br />

Scientific Ways of Knowing 100<br />

Questions and observes for scientific<br />

investigation<br />

110 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) Power Law<br />

Health 120<br />

Understands relationship between<br />

personal behavior and wellness<br />

Default Grading<br />

Scale<br />

Default<br />

Calculation<br />

130 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) Power Law<br />

Pull<br />

Mark<br />

Print<br />

Mark<br />

Value<br />

Req<br />

15. Continue to enter the following assessments, sequence numbers, mark types, default<br />

grading scales, default calculations, pull mark, print mark and required value options for<br />

the Social Studies course.<br />

Assessment Seq# Mark<br />

Type<br />

Default Grading<br />

Scale<br />

Default<br />

Calculation<br />

Pull<br />

Mark<br />

Print<br />

Mark<br />

Grade 10 A-F<br />

Lake View Primary<br />

School Default<br />

Power Law Y Y Y<br />

Effort 20 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) None N<br />

History 30<br />

Recognizes chronological order 40 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) Power Law<br />

Compares past and present day<br />

societies<br />

50 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) Power Law<br />

Recognizes contributions of historical<br />

figures<br />

60 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) Power Law<br />

People and Societies 70<br />

Identifies and compares cultural groups 80 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) Power Law<br />

Geography 90<br />

Identifies and uses map skills 100 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) Power Law<br />

Economics 110 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) Power Law<br />

Identifies wants and needs 120 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) Power Law<br />

Identifies goods and services 130 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) Power Law<br />

Government 140<br />

Identifies organization and purpose 150 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) Power Law<br />

Citizenship RIghts and Responsibilities 160<br />

Describes citizenship responsibilities 170 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) Power Law<br />

Social Studies Skills and Methods 180<br />

Uses variety of sources to obtain<br />

information and make decisions<br />

190 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) Power Law<br />

Value<br />

Req<br />

304 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Add Assessments – Assessments Tab<br />

16. Continue to enter the following assessments, sequence numbers, mark types, default<br />

grading scales, default calculations, pull mark, print mark and required value options for<br />

the Art course.<br />

Assessment Seq# Mark<br />

Type<br />

Grade 10 A-F<br />

Default Grading Scale<br />

Lake View Primary School<br />

Default<br />

Default<br />

Calculation<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Effort 20 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) None N<br />

Uses original ideas 30 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Applies skills 40 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Demonstrates craftsmanship 50 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Pull<br />

Mark<br />

Print<br />

Mark<br />

Y Y Y<br />

Value<br />

Req<br />

17. Continue to enter the following assessments, sequence numbers, mark types, default<br />

grading scales, default calculations, pull mark, print mark and required value options for<br />

the Music course.<br />

Assessment Seq# Mark<br />

Type<br />

Grade 10 A-F<br />

Default Grading<br />

Scale<br />

Lake View<br />

Primary School<br />

Default<br />

Default<br />

Calculation<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Effort 20 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4) None N<br />

Demonstrates rhythmic understanding 30 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Demonstrates melodic recognition 40 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Actively participates in creating &<br />

performing<br />

50 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Demonstrates self-control 60 1-4 Rubric Scale (1-4)<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Highest<br />

Achieved<br />

Pull<br />

Mark<br />

Print<br />

Mark<br />

Y Y Y<br />

Value<br />

Req<br />

18. Continue to enter the following assessments, sequence numbers and mark types for the<br />

Work Habits course.<br />

Y<br />

Assessment Seq# Mark Type<br />

Default<br />

Grading<br />

Scale<br />

Default<br />

Calculation<br />

Pull<br />

Mark<br />

Print<br />

Mark<br />

Value<br />

Req<br />

Uses time wisely 10 Check+, Check, Check-<br />

Works independently 20 Check+, Check, Check-<br />

Stays on task 30 Check+, Check, Check-<br />

Seeks help as appropriate 40 Check+, Check, Check-<br />

Follows written directions 50 Check+, Check, Check-<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 305


Add Assessments – Assessments Tab<br />

Assessment Seq# Mark Type<br />

Default<br />

Grading<br />

Scale<br />

Default<br />

Calculation<br />

Pull<br />

Mark<br />

Print<br />

Mark<br />

Value<br />

Req<br />

Follows oral directions 60 Check+, Check, Check-<br />

Listens attentively 70 Check+, Check, Check-<br />

Completes work carefully and<br />

neatly<br />

Organizes work area and<br />

materials<br />

80 Check+, Check, Check-<br />

90 Check+, Check, Check-<br />

Returns homework 100 Check+, Check, Check-<br />

Attitude and Citizenship 110<br />

Follows rules 120 Check+, Check, Check-<br />

Respects authority 130 Check+, Check, Check-<br />

Interacts appropriately with<br />

peers<br />

140 Check+, Check, Check-<br />

Accepts responsibility 150 Check+, Check, Check-<br />

Demonstrates self-control 160 Check+, Check, Check-<br />

Copy Assessments<br />

You can save time by copying assessments from one subject to another.<br />

1. Select a course in the Course list as the course to which you want to copy assessments.<br />

2. Select a report card in the Copy the requirements from list.<br />

3. Select a course in the next list as the course from which you want to copy assessments.<br />

306 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Add Assessments – Assessments Tab<br />

Copy the requirements from List on the Assessments Tab<br />

4. Click Copy.<br />

The copied assessments display.<br />

5. Adjust the wording of assessments, if necessary.<br />

6. Select Highest Achieved for each assessment in the Default Calculation list.<br />

7. Click Save to save the copied assessments.<br />

Continue to Add Assessments<br />

The Letter & Sound Recognition subject is different than the other subjects to which we have<br />

added assessments. You need to create an individual assessment for each uppercase letter,<br />

lowercase letter, and letter sound for a total of 78 total assessments.<br />

1. On the Assessments tab, select Letter & Sound Recognition in the Course list.<br />

2. You can enter sequence numbers 1 through 78. You do not have to use sequence<br />

numbers in increments of 10 for this subject since there is no possibility of having to insert<br />

additional assessments.<br />

3. For sequence numbers 1 through 78, enter a corresponding assessment that is an<br />

uppercase letter, lowercase letter and letter sound for each letter of the alphabet. For<br />

example, A, a, A sound each as individual assessments.<br />

4. Select Checkmark for Report Cards as the Mark Type unless you want the teachers to<br />

have the ability to create assignments for each of these 78 assessments.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 307


Add Assessments – Assessments Tab<br />

5. You do not have to select any options in the Default Grading Scale, Default Calculation,<br />

Pull Mark, Print Mark and Value Req lists. The default options in each column will display<br />

after you save.<br />

6. Click Save.<br />

Note: If you run out of new rows as you are adding assessments, click Save<br />

occasionally to display new rows.<br />

7. Select Attendance in the Course list.<br />

8. Enter the following assessments, sequence numbers, mark types, default calculations,<br />

pull mark, print mark and required value options for the Attendance course.<br />

Assessment Seq# Mark Type<br />

Note: The default option, N/A, displays in the Default Grading Scale list after you<br />

save if you do not choose an option.<br />

9. Click Save.<br />

Default<br />

Grading Scale<br />

Default<br />

Calculation<br />

Pull<br />

Mark<br />

Print<br />

Mark<br />

Days Present 10 Points Average Y Y Y<br />

Days Absent 20 Points Average Y Y<br />

Times Tardy 30 Points Average Y Y<br />

Comments (do not exceed 495<br />

characters)<br />

Promoted to grade 50<br />

Placed in grade 60<br />

Retained in grade 70<br />

40 Comment Y Y<br />

End-of-Year<br />

Placement<br />

End-of-Year<br />

Placement<br />

End-of-Year<br />

Placement<br />

Note: The Attendance subject is a logical place for the homeroom teacher to add<br />

quarterly comments to the report card. The character count varies depending on<br />

the type/size of the Comments template piece selected on the Template tab.<br />

Y<br />

Y<br />

Y<br />

Value<br />

Req<br />

Attendance Assessments on the Assessments Tab<br />

308 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods – Requirements Tab<br />

10. Click Requirements in the Web site banner.<br />

Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods –<br />

Requirements Tab<br />

1. On the Requirements tab, select the reporting period in which each assessment is<br />

evaluated.<br />

Note: When there are numerous assessments, it may be more efficient to click<br />

Select All to select all the assessments in all the reporting periods, and then<br />

deselect the specific assessments in the reporting periods that are not required.<br />

Requirements Tab on the Report Card Screen<br />

2. Click Save.<br />

3. Deselect all of the check marks for the assessments in the AY (All Year) reporting period<br />

except for the assessments in the Letter & Sound Recognition course.<br />

4. Deselect the check marks for any assessments that are standards headings such as Basic<br />

Reading Skills and Comprehension Skills because they don’t receive marks.<br />

5. Deselect the check marks for YEF for all of the Letter & Sound Recognition assessments<br />

and the Comments assessment for the Attendance course.<br />

6. Deselect Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 for the Promoted, Placed and Retained assessments.<br />

7. Click Save.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 309


Determine Protected Marks – Protected Marks Tab<br />

Reporting Period Columns on the Requirements Tab<br />

8. Click Protected Marks in the Web site banner.<br />

Determine Protected Marks – Protected Marks Tab<br />

1. On the Protected Marks tab, select Override All Marks.<br />

Note: Even though the school district’s report card is not integrated with a student<br />

information system, you must select one of the three Protected Marks options or<br />

the report card will not work.<br />

Override All Marks on the Protected Marks Screen<br />

2. Click Save.<br />

3. Click Average Calcs in the Web site banner.<br />

310 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Set Up Average Calculation Method – Average Calcs Tab<br />

Set Up Average Calculation Method – Average Calcs Tab<br />

Since we selected Use Basic Calculations as the Average Calculation Method on the General tab,<br />

and set up four reporting periods and a year-end final average on the Periods tab, we must now<br />

configure the formula for the year-end final average.<br />

1. On the Average Calcs tab, select Year-End Final in the Reporting Period list.<br />

2. Select 1st QUARTER in the list in the first row of the Period column.<br />

3. Select 2nd QUARTER in the list in the second row of the Period column.<br />

4. Select 3rd QUARTER in the list in the third row of the Period column.<br />

5. Select 4th QUARTER in the list in the fourth row of the Period column.<br />

6. Enter 1 in the Weight column in for each of the four quarters.<br />

Note: The number in the Weight column means that each of the four quarters<br />

represents 1/4 or 25% of the final average.<br />

7. Select Use Averages in the Select the Calculation Method list.<br />

The Use Averages calculation method means that regardless of the letter grade that is<br />

issued for each of the four grading periods, GradeBook uses the averages in the teacher’s<br />

grade book for each of the four quarters to derive the year-end average. If your school<br />

uses letter grade values to determine the year-end average, then select the Use Grades<br />

calculation method. In that case an A has a value of 4, B = 3, C = 2, D = 1 and F = 0.<br />

GradeBook adds each of the four values and divides the total by four. The result maps to<br />

the Point Range of the appropriate grading scale to determine a letter for the year-end<br />

average.<br />

8. Select Use the Grade Book Grading Scale in the Select the Grading Scale list.<br />

9. Click Save.<br />

Average Calcs Tab<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 311


Add Messages – Messages Tab<br />

10. Click Messages in the Web site banner.<br />

Add Messages – Messages Tab<br />

1. On the Messages tab, enter First Grade Progress Report in the Report Card Title field.<br />

Note: You can click Save at any time while entering text in the Message fields.<br />

Whether or not you click Save after entering each message, be sure to click Save<br />

after entering the last message before you leave the screen.<br />

2. To create a message to parents, type Dear Parent/Guardian:{\par} in the Message 1<br />

field. The {\par} is RTF code that generates a line break.<br />

Messages Tab on the Report Card Screen<br />

3. Type the remaining text in the Message 1 field:<br />

Successful academic achievement requires the cooperative effort of the student, the<br />

parent/guardian, and the school. Together, we can work to provide a quality educational<br />

program.{\par}<br />

This progress report is a record of your child’s overall achievement in school. Should<br />

you desire additional information about your child’s progress, you are encouraged to<br />

contact school personnel to arrange a conference.{\par}<br />

Your assistance in helping your child be successful in school is truly appreciated.{\par}<br />

Keith E. Richards{\par}<br />

Superintendent of Schools.<br />

4. Place your cursor in front of the superintendent’s name and press the Spacebar 35 times<br />

to indent the name.<br />

5. Repeat step 4 to indent the Superintendent of Schools title.<br />

312 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Format Templates – Templates Tab<br />

Message 1 Field on the Messages Tab<br />

6. Type Explanation of Marks in the Message 2 field.<br />

7. Type b = Beginning{\par} d = Developing{\par} s = Secure in the Message 3 field.<br />

8. Type 4 = Excellent{\par} 3 = Good{\par} 2 = Needs Improvement{\par} 1 =<br />

Unsatisfactory in the Message 4 field.<br />

9. Click Save.<br />

Necessary {\par} RTF Code for Line Breaks on the Messages Tab<br />

10. Click Template in the Web site banner.<br />

Format Templates – Templates Tab<br />

The Legal tri-fold template is set up to display three columns on the front side of a legal-size piece<br />

of paper and three columns on the back side. We will format the printed report card by adding<br />

numerous template pieces to the template. Do not be overly concerned about making every item<br />

perfect from the beginning of the formatting process. It may be easier to enter all of the template<br />

pieces first and then correct column placement and spacing issues later.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 313


Format Templates – Templates Tab<br />

The template pieces with corresponding sequence numbers 10 through 50 display in only one of<br />

the six columns the report card.<br />

1. On the Template tab, select File Header template piece in the Option column.<br />

Note: The File Header must be the first template piece in a standards-based<br />

report card.<br />

2. Enter 10 in the Seq# column next to File Header.<br />

3. Select Marks (5 column, 1/3 width) in the next three blank rows in the Option column.<br />

4. Select Marks (4 column, 1/3 width) in the fourth blank row in the Option column.<br />

5. Enter 20, 30, 40 and 50, respectively, in the Seq# column next to each Marks template<br />

piece. Use sequence numbers in multiples of 10 to make it easier to insert additional<br />

template pieces later or move existing template pieces to a new location in the list.<br />

6. Select Art, Music, Physical Education and Work Habits and Skills, respectively, in the<br />

Course list next to each Marks template piece.<br />

7. Select Column Break in the next blank row in the Option column to designate the end of<br />

the first column.<br />

8. Enter 100 in the Seq# column next to the column break template piece. You may find it<br />

helpful to use sequence numbers in multiples of 100 for each Column Break template<br />

piece to allow for other template pieces to be inserted between them.<br />

Seq# Column on the Template Tab<br />

9. You do not have to select any options in the Font, Size and Rows After columns. The<br />

default values in each column will display after you save.<br />

10. Click Save.<br />

11. Select the following template pieces in the Option column and enter numbers in the Seq#<br />

column, respectively.<br />

314 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Format Templates – Templates Tab<br />

Seq# Option<br />

110 Teacher Comments (full page length)<br />

200 Column Break<br />

210 School Header (Title, District & School)<br />

220 Student Header with Principal<br />

230 Message 1 (with a border)<br />

240 Message 2 (with a border)<br />

250 Message 3 (with a border)<br />

260 Message 4 (with a border)<br />

270 Attendance (5 column with Days Present)<br />

300 Column Break<br />

310 Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)<br />

320 Custom K Letter Box (Upper, Lower, Sound)<br />

400 Column Break<br />

410 Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)<br />

420 Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)<br />

500 Column Break<br />

510 Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)<br />

520 Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)<br />

12. Click Save.<br />

Note: Whenever you run out of blank rows, click Save. New additional empty<br />

rows display at the bottom of the screen after you save.<br />

13. Select the following courses in the Course list for the following template pieces in the<br />

Option column.<br />

Option<br />

Teacher Comments (full page length)<br />

Attendance (5 column with Days Present)<br />

Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)<br />

Custom K Letter Box (Upper, Lower, Sound)<br />

Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)<br />

Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)<br />

Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)<br />

Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)<br />

Course<br />

Attendance<br />

Attendance<br />

Reading<br />

Letter & Sound<br />

Writing<br />

Science<br />

Social Studies<br />

Mathematics<br />

14. You do not have to select any options in the Font, Size and Rows After columns. The<br />

default values in each column will display after you save.<br />

15. Change the 1 to 0 in the Rows After column for the Marks (5 column, 1/3 width) template<br />

pieces associated with the Art and Music courses.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 315


Preview Report Card<br />

16. Select Page Break in the Option column in the next blank row.<br />

17. Enter 1000 in the Seq# column next to the Page Break template piece.<br />

18. Click Save.<br />

Page Break Entry on the Template Tab<br />

Preview Report Card<br />

1. Click the Preview link to view the printed report card layout.<br />

2. On the File Download window, click Open to view the report card in RTF file format in<br />

Microsoft Word.<br />

3. In the RTF report card file, scroll to the far right of the screen to see the full width of the<br />

outside portion and scroll down to bottom of the screen to see the inside portion.<br />

The report card, as it is currently formatted, is three pages long, but needs to fit on two<br />

pages. Notice that the Art, Music and Physical Education courses display with no spacing<br />

between the courses. That is because on the Template tab, we changed the 1 in the Rows<br />

After column to 0 for the Art and Music courses to eliminate the space.<br />

316 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Preview Report Card<br />

Standards-Based Report Card in RTF Format – Page 1<br />

Also notice that the Mathematics course has continued from the bottom of the second<br />

page to the top of the third page.<br />

Standards-Based Report Card in RTF Format – Page 2<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 317


Preview Report Card<br />

4. Close the RTF report card file.<br />

Standards-Based Report Card in RTF Format – Page 3<br />

Adjust Template to Eliminate Third Page<br />

We will make some adjustments to the template such as reducing the point size of the template<br />

pieces and removing specific column breaks to eliminate the third page.<br />

1. On the Template tab, change the point size in the Size column from 10 to 9 for the template<br />

pieces with sequence numbers 310 through 520.<br />

Note: The default point size is 10; however, point sizes range from 2 to 20 points.<br />

2. Click Save.<br />

3. Click the check box in the Delete column for Seq# 400 Column Break and Seq# 500<br />

Column Break.<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

Deleted Entries on the Template Tab<br />

318 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Preview Report Card<br />

Preview Adjusted Columns<br />

1. Click Preview.<br />

In the RTF report card file, notice that the third page has been eliminated. The Writing<br />

course starts at the bottom of the first column and continues to the top of the second<br />

column. The Social Studies course starts at the bottom of the second column and<br />

continues to the top of the third column.<br />

2. Close the RTF report card file.<br />

Two Page Report Card<br />

Add Subject Continued Assessments<br />

Since the Writing and Social Studies courses begin at the bottom of one column and continue to<br />

the next column, we will create an extra line of text at the top of columns two and three to indicate<br />

that these subjects are continued from the previous column.<br />

1. On the Template tab, click Assessments in the Web site banner.<br />

2. On the Assessments tab, select Writing from the Course list.<br />

3. Enter Writing (cont.) in the first empty row in the Assessment column.<br />

4. Enter 75 in the Seq# column to position the assessment just before the Writes using main<br />

idea and supporting details assessment.<br />

5. Leave the Mark Type option blank since this assessment is a subheading and does not<br />

require a calculated mark.<br />

6. Click Save.<br />

7. Select Social Studies in the Course list.<br />

8. Enter Social Studies (cont.) in the first empty row in the Assessment column.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 319


Preview Report Card<br />

9. Enter 125 in the Seq# column to position the assessment just before the Identifies goods<br />

and services assessment.<br />

10. Click Save.<br />

Note: There is a known issue with assessments that are used as a subheading on<br />

the report card and do not require a mark not displaying properly on the report<br />

card. On the Requirements tab, in the Writing course, make sure to select the<br />

check box in at least one of the reporting periods for the Writing (cont.)<br />

assessment, save, deselect the reporting period, and save again. Repeat this<br />

process for the and Social Studies (cont.) assessment. Use this workaround to<br />

ensure that the Writing (cont.) and Social Studies (cont.) assessments display<br />

properly on the report card.<br />

Preview Subject Continued Assessments<br />

1. Click Preview.<br />

Preview the Report Card<br />

2. Close the RTF report card file.<br />

3. On the Requirements tab, click Template in the Web site banner.<br />

Add End of Year Placement to Template<br />

Since there is room under the Teacher Comments in the second column on the first page of the<br />

report card, we can insert the End of Year Placement template piece.<br />

1. On the Template tab, enter 120 in the first blank row in the Seq# column.<br />

2. Select End of Year Placement (Promoted, Placed, Retained) in the Option list.<br />

3. Select Attendance in the Course list.<br />

4. Enter 0 in the Rows After column.<br />

320 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Preview Report Card<br />

5. Click Save.<br />

End of Year Placement (Promoted, Placed, Retained) Entry on the Template Tab<br />

Preview End of Year Placement<br />

1. Click Preview.<br />

End of Year Placement Template Piece Under the Teacher Comments<br />

2. Close the RTF report card file.<br />

3. On the Template tab, click Messages in the Web site banner.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 321


Preview Report Card<br />

Adjust Messages Using RTF Code<br />

Since there isn’t a legend for the Work Habits & Skills course, we can create one using check<br />

marks and plus and minus symbols that will display immediately above the course on the report<br />

card. We can also combine the explanation of marks messages we entered previously to display<br />

in one box instead of three boxes with space between individual lines and a border around the<br />

Explanation of Marks title.<br />

1. On the Messages tab, type the following text in the Message 5 field:<br />

{\fs16 {\box{\brdrdb {\qj \b {\f14\fs16 {\field{\*\fldinst SYMBOL 252 \\f"Wingdings" \\s<br />

10}{\fldrslt\f14\fs16}}}+ = Excellent {\f14\fs16 {\field{\*\fldinst SYMBOL 252<br />

\\f"Wingdings" \\s 10}{\fldrslt\f14\fs16}}} = Average {\f14\fs16 {\field{\*\fldinst<br />

SYMBOL 252 \\f"Wingdings" \\s 10}{\fldrslt\f14\fs16}}}- = Needs Improvement{\par}}}}}<br />

Inserted RTF Code<br />

2. Click Save.<br />

3. Type the following RTF code in the Message 6 field.<br />

{\box{\brdrdb \qc \fs24 Explanation of Marks{\par}}}<br />

{\box \brdrs \fs20<br />

{\tab}{\tab}{\tab}b = Beginning{\par}<br />

{\tab}{\tab}{\tab}d = Developing{\par}<br />

{\tab}{\tab}{\tab}s = Secure{\brdrbtw \brdrs {\par}}<br />

{\tab}{\tab}{\tab}4 = Excellent{\par}<br />

{\tab}{\tab}{\tab}3 = Good{\par}<br />

{\tab}{\tab}{\tab}2 = Needs Improvement{\par}<br />

{\tab}{\tab}{\tab}1 = Unsatisfactory<br />

4. Click Save.<br />

Creating a Box Around the Explanation of Marks Legend with RTF Code<br />

322 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Preview Report Card<br />

Entering {\tab} RTF Code to Indent and {\par} RTF Code to Force a Line Break<br />

5. Click Template in the Web site banner.<br />

6. On the Template tab, enter 45 in the first empty row in the Seq# column.<br />

7. Select Message 5 (no border) in the Option column.<br />

8. Enter 0 in the Rows After column.<br />

9. Scroll to Seq# 240 and change Message 2 (with a border) to Message 6 (no border) in<br />

the Option column.<br />

10. Click the check box in the Del? column for Seq# 250 Message 3 (with a border) and<br />

Seq# 260 Message 4 (with a border).<br />

Delete Message 3 (with a Border) and Message 4 (with a Border)<br />

11. Change the number in the Rows After column from 1 to 3 for sequence numbers 210, 220,<br />

230 and 240 to create more space between the template pieces on the report card.<br />

12. Click Save.<br />

Preview Messages Using RTF Code<br />

1. Click Preview.<br />

In the first column on the report card, notice the legend of marks between the Physical<br />

Education and Work Habits & Skills courses. Also, in the third column, the Explanation of<br />

Marks title displays inside of a border with the remaining explanation of marks centered<br />

beneath it in one box.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 323


Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting Periods – Mappings Tab<br />

2. Close the RTF report card file.<br />

3. Click Mappings in the Web site banner.<br />

Preview Messages<br />

Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting<br />

Periods – Mappings Tab<br />

1. On the Mappings tab, select Attendance in the Course list.<br />

2. Select the following mapping identifiers in the Q1 list for the attendance assessments.<br />

Mapping ID<br />

#Present1#<br />

#Absent1#<br />

#Tardy1#<br />

#Comment1#<br />

Assessment<br />

Days Present<br />

Days Absent<br />

Times Tardy<br />

Comments (do not exceed 495 characters)<br />

324 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting Periods – Mappings Tab<br />

Mapping Identifiers for Assessments in the Reporting Period on the Mappings Tab<br />

3. Click Save.<br />

4. Continue to select the following mapping identifiers in the Q2 list for the attendance<br />

assessments.<br />

Mapping ID<br />

#Present2#<br />

#Absent2#<br />

#Tardy2#<br />

#Comment2#<br />

Assessment<br />

Days Present<br />

Days Absent<br />

Times Tardy<br />

Comments (do not exceed 495 characters)<br />

5. Continue to select the following mapping identifiers in the Q3 list for the attendance<br />

assessments.<br />

Mapping ID<br />

#Present3#<br />

#Absent3#<br />

#Tardy3#<br />

#Comment3#<br />

Assessment<br />

Days Present<br />

Days Absent<br />

Times Tardy<br />

Comments (do not exceed 495 characters)<br />

6. Continue to select the following mapping identifiers in the Q4 list for the attendance<br />

assessments.<br />

Mapping ID<br />

#Present4#<br />

#Absent4#<br />

#Tardy4#<br />

#Comment4#<br />

Assessment<br />

Days Present<br />

Days Absent<br />

Times Tardy<br />

Comments (do not exceed 495 characters)<br />

7. Continue to select the following mapping identifiers in the YEF list for the assessments.<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 325


Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting Periods – Mappings Tab<br />

Mapping ID<br />

#Present5#<br />

#Absent5#<br />

#Tardy5#<br />

#Promoted#<br />

#Placed#<br />

#Retained#<br />

Assessment<br />

Days Present<br />

Days Absent<br />

Times Tardy<br />

Promoted to grade<br />

Placed in grade<br />

Retained in grade<br />

8. Click Save.<br />

Mapping Identifiers for Assessments in Reporting Periods on the Mappings Tab<br />

9. Select Letter & Sound Recognition in the Course list.<br />

10. Select #A1# in all of the reporting periods and AY lists for the A assessment.<br />

11. Continue to select the mapping identifiers that include 1, which represent the uppercase<br />

letters, in the remaining three reporting periods and AY lists for all the remaining<br />

uppercase letter assessments through Z.<br />

Note: It’s a good idea to Save after you fill in all the rows on the screen so that if<br />

the Internet connection is lost you will only lose the data since the last time you<br />

saved and not all of it.<br />

12. Continue to select the mapping identifiers that include 2, which represent the lowercase<br />

letters, in all the reporting periods and AY lists for all the lowercase letter assessments, a<br />

through z.<br />

13. Click Save.<br />

14. Continue to select the mapping identifiers that include 3, which represent the letter sounds,<br />

in all the reporting periods and AY lists for all the letter sounds assessments.<br />

15. Click Save.<br />

326 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Check Spelling on Report Card<br />

Check Spelling on Report Card<br />

You can use the Spell Check feature to check the text on the report card for spelling errors.<br />

1. Click Preview in the Web site banner.<br />

2. Click the Spell Check icon in Microsoft Word to begin searching for spelling errors.<br />

3. Notice that “responsiblity” is misspelled in the Accepts responsiblity assessment in the<br />

Work Habits & Skills course.<br />

Run the Spell Check<br />

4. Do not correct the error, but close the spell check feature.<br />

5. Close the RTF report card file.<br />

6. On the Mapping tab, click Assessments in the Web site banner.<br />

7. On the Assessments tab, select the Work Habits & Skills course in the Course list.<br />

8. Scroll to the Accepts responsiblity assessment with the spelling error and correct it.<br />

9. Click Save.<br />

Correct Spelling Errors in the Assessments<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 327


Compile Report Card<br />

Compile Report Card<br />

The report card or interim must be compiled successfully before teachers can use it to enter<br />

grades on the Report Card Entry screen. GradeBook runs numerous verifications to make sure<br />

the report card is set up properly. Once the report card has been compiled, each time it is<br />

changed, it must be recompiled. The status displays in the Compile Results column on the Report<br />

Cards screen where you can easily see if the report card contains warnings or errors.<br />

1. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link.<br />

The compiled report card or interim displays in a separate browser window listing any<br />

warnings or errors that were detected during compilation. A reference number displays<br />

next to the description of each warning or error. This reference number is used for<br />

troubleshooting purposes by GradeBook Support personnel.<br />

Error and Warning Messages from the Compile Tab<br />

The following warnings and/or errors may occur:<br />

• Warning – Potential errors were found during compilation, but teachers can use the<br />

report card to enter grades on the Report Card Entry screen. It is recommended to<br />

investigate the warnings and try to correct any issues.<br />

• Critical error – Errors were found during compilation that prevent the report card<br />

from displaying and teachers from entering grades on the Report Card Entry screen<br />

until they are corrected.<br />

• Severe error – Errors were found during compilation that prevent teachers from<br />

entering grades on the Report Card Entry screen until they are corrected.<br />

If there are no warnings or errors, the following message displays. “Congratulations, no<br />

errors were found! The report card compiled successfully.” Proceed with step 7.<br />

2. If there are any warnings or errors, review the description, and then click the Go link.<br />

The screen where the issue occurred that caused the warning or error displays behind the<br />

Compiled Report Card/Interim screen.<br />

3. Troubleshoot the issue(s) as needed.<br />

4. Return to the Compiled Report Card/Interim screen, and then click Refresh.<br />

328 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Compile Report Card<br />

If the warning or error was corrected, it does not display in the list. Proceed with step 5. If<br />

the warning or error was not corrected, repeat step 2 through step 4 until the issue is<br />

corrected. If you cannot correct the issue, follow your appropriate GradeBook support<br />

channel.<br />

5. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link again.<br />

6. If the report card compiled without critical or severe errors, close the Compile Report<br />

Card/Interim screen.<br />

7. On the Web site banner, click the General tab.<br />

8. Select the Active report card mode to make the report card available to teachers to enter<br />

grades.<br />

9. Click Save.<br />

10. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link for the final time.<br />

11. Close the Compile Report Card/Interim screen.<br />

Note: If you have to make changes to a report card in Active mode, you must first<br />

change the report card mode to Testing.<br />

Note: You can compile a report card without opening it on the Report Cards<br />

screen by clicking the Compile All Active Changed Report Cards link or by clicking<br />

in the Actions column.<br />

Completed Standards-Based Report Card in RTF Format – Page 1<br />

<strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> 329


Compile Report Card<br />

Completed Standards-Based Report Card in RTF Format – Page 2<br />

330 <strong>ProgressBook</strong> GradeBook <strong>System</strong> <strong>Manager</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!